100% found this document useful (1 vote)

771 views

Eltek PDF

Uploaded by

MahmoudSalah

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

771 views

Eltek PDF

Uploaded by

MahmoudSalah

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 364

HYPERCABLE sarl 74 Avenue Paul Sabatier ZA de la Coupe 11.

100 Narbonne Tel : +33 (0) 4 68 70 91 75 - Fax : 04 68 70 91 76

Mail : [email protected] - N° SIRET : 384 007 894 00031 – Code TVA CEE: FR90384007894 - www.hypercable.fr
www.hypercable.fr

Safe
ety an
nd En
nviron
nmenttal Pre
ecauttions
IMPORT
TANT: Read
d user insttructions before
b operrating equipment!
The follo
owing docu
uments are
e available online at e
eltek.share
efile.com.

Co
ontroller Us
ser Guides

Sm
martpack2 Ma
aster Controlller: Doc #35
50020.013

Sm
martpack S Co
ontroller: Doc #35
50030.013

Compack Contrroller: Doc #35

50011.013

Otther Contro
oller/Monitor Guides

I/O
O Monitor2 Ins
stallation Guide: Doc #35
51509.033

Read and observe

o alll safety sttatements and requirrements be
elow beforre
performing any instaallation or operation work on p
power equipment.
Failure to
t comply with the safetys sta
atements aand require
ements coontained in this
docume ent may res sult in injurry and/or equipment
e damage, aand it may void the user’s
authoritty to opera
ate the equ uipment.
Full product manu
uals are av
vailable onlline at: elttek.sharefi
file.com
WARNING: HAZARDO OUS VOLTA AGE AND E ENERGY LEV VELS CAN PRODUCE
SERIOUS SHOCKS
S AN
ND BURNS. Only auth horized, qua
alified, and
d trained
personnnel should attempt
a to
o work on power
p equipment. Th he equipme ent is to be
e
connectted to suppply mains by
b a qualifieed personaal in accord
dance with h local and
national codes (e.g
g. NEC, CEC asheets forr full product
C, etc). Reffer to data
cations.
specific
WARNING: Changes or modifica ations to the system
m not expreessly appro
oved
by the parrty respons
sible for the compliannce could v
void the user's authorrity
to operate
e the systeem.
CAUTION:: Refer to the
t battery y manufac turer's doc cumentatio on for
recommen nded batte ery settings
s. It is the user's resp
ponsibility to enter
proper battery
b parrameters.
Observe
e local and
d national electrical,
e environme
e ental, and w
workplace
e codes.
NOTICE: Alarm con
ntacts are rated for a maximumm voltage o of 60 V, SEL
LV (Safety
Extra Lo
ow Voltage
e) and a ma
aximum con ntinuous c urrent of 0
0.5A.

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr

DISCLAIMER
Information in this doc
cument is be
elieved to be accurate as of the date o of publication n and is subje
ect to
change without
w notice. This document and the information n contained herein do not represent e either
a committment or any guarantee on o the part off Eltek regard ability, fitness, or compattibility
ding the relia
of the pro
oducts and procedures
p de
escribed.
While eveery reasonabble effort is made
m to ensuure the accuuracy and com mpleteness of this docum ment,
Eltek asssumes no re esponsibility or liability for
f any dam mages that may be dire ectly or indirrectly
d to the use of the inform
attributed mation contaiined within o
or to any erro
ors or omissio
ons.
No part of
o this docum ment may be reproduced
r or
o transmitte
ed in any form
m or by any m
means—electtronic
or mecha anical, includ
ding photocopying and recording—ffor any purp pose withou ut the expre
essed
consent of
o Eltek.

Copyrigh
ht © 2014 Eltek

2925 E Plano Pkw

wy
Plano
o, TX 7507
74
USA

Phone: +1
1 (469) 330
0-9100
Fax: +1 (469)
( 330-9
9101

Techn
nical Suppo
ort
+1 (80
00) 435-48
872
techsuppo
ort.us@elte
ek.com

www
w.eltek.com
m

Doc. No
o. 370035.013 Issue
e 1, April 2014
Publish
hed 4/25/20
014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr

Table of Contents
Comprehensive Overview ...................................................................................... 9
1. Guide Overview .................................................................................................. 10
Eltek Controllers with Web Interface ............................................................................. 11
Web Interface Features ..................................................................................................... 12
Functions Available Only Through the Web Interface................................................ 12
Controller Login and Access Levels ................................................................................ 13
Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 15
Hardware ....................................................................................................................................................... 16
Software ........................................................................................................................................................ 16
Recommended ............................................................................................................................................. 17
Optional .......................................................................................................................................................... 17

Direct Connection with the Controller ........................................................................... 17

2. Web Interface Overview .................................................................................... 24
Alarm Icons and Monitors .................................................................................................. 25
Alarm Monitor Variables and Brackets .......................................................................... 25
Category Buttons ................................................................................................................ 26
3. Home .................................................................................................................. 28
System Overview Window................................................................................................. 28
System Status and Operational Mode ................................................................................................... 29
Power System Components, Controller Nodes, and Inputs .............................................................. 31

System History Window..................................................................................................... 80

System Monitors Window.................................................................................................. 81
4. System Configuration ........................................................................................ 82
Power System ...................................................................................................................... 83
Power system ............................................................................................................................................... 83
Mains ............................................................................................................................................................... 91
Generator....................................................................................................................................................... 93
Rectifiers........................................................................................................................................................ 98
[Solar Charger] .......................................................................................................................................... 102

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr

[Wind] ........................................................................................................................................................... 103

[Fuel Cell] .................................................................................................................................................... 104
[DcDc Converter] ...................................................................................................................................... 104
Load.............................................................................................................................................................. 105
Battery ........................................................................................................................................................ 107
Control System ......................................................................................................................................... 122

Device Settings ..................................................................................................................138

Time Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 138
Network Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 139
SNMP Settings........................................................................................................................................... 144
User Accounts ........................................................................................................................................... 158

5. Alarm Configuration ........................................................................................ 162

Alarm Monitors Edit Windows ........................................................................................163
General Alarm Monitor Window (not LVD) .......................................................................................... 164
Edit Window for LVBD .............................................................................................................................. 172
Edit Window for LVLD............................................................................................................................... 173

Alarm Configuration Menus ............................................................................................174

Power System ........................................................................................................................................... 174

Eltek CAN Nodes................................................................................................................207

AC Mains Monitor ...................................................................................................................................... 208
Battery Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 210
Load Monitor .............................................................................................................................................. 211
Flexi Monitor............................................................................................................................................... 216
I/O Monitor Alarm Monitors .................................................................................................................... 220
I/O Monitor Output Relays ...................................................................................................................... 224

6. Logs .................................................................................................................. 225

Event Log .............................................................................................................................225
Data Log ...............................................................................................................................226
Energy Log ..........................................................................................................................228
Accumulated.............................................................................................................................................. 231
Hourly .......................................................................................................................................................... 231
Daily.............................................................................................................................................................. 232
Weekly ......................................................................................................................................................... 233

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr

Generator Log.....................................................................................................................234
Battery Cycles....................................................................................................................235
Battery Tests .....................................................................................................................236
Change Log .........................................................................................................................239
Save Logs to File ................................................................................................................240
Accounts Log......................................................................................................................242
7. Commands ....................................................................................................... 244
System .................................................................................................................................244
Battery .................................................................................................................................246
Output Test.........................................................................................................................247
Virtual Inputs ......................................................................................................................249
Software Upgrade .............................................................................................................249
Load/Save Config ..............................................................................................................251
Load Config File ......................................................................................................................................... 251
Save Config File ......................................................................................................................................... 252

8. Statistics .......................................................................................................... 255

Statistics .............................................................................................................................255
Browse SD Card ......................................................................................................................................... 255

9. Help .................................................................................................................. 257

10. Logout ......................................................................................................... 258
Procedures ......................................................................................................... 259
1. Procedures Overview ....................................................................................... 260
2. Setup ................................................................................................................ 261
Setting Float (Reference) Voltage ................................................................................261
Setting Rectifier Current Limit .......................................................................................262
Battery Configuration ......................................................................................................263
Number of Banks ...................................................................................................................................... 264
Capacity and Number of Battery Strings ........................................................................................... 264
Battery Table ............................................................................................................................................. 265

Setting Battery Charging Current Limit .......................................................................267

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr

Battery Discharge Testing ..............................................................................................268

Battery Temperature Compensation ...........................................................................272
Temperature Probe Setup ..............................................................................................276
Controllers .................................................................................................................................................. 276
Flexi Monitors ............................................................................................................................................ 280

Setting Alarms ...................................................................................................................282

Input Alarms ............................................................................................................................................... 283
Output Alarm Relays ................................................................................................................................ 288
Alarm Setpoints ........................................................................................................................................ 289
Setting Alarm Battery Voltage Alarm (Example) .............................................................................. 289
Setting Nag Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 293

Setting Site Information ..................................................................................................295

Setting Generator Activation .........................................................................................297
Setting SNMP Communication .......................................................................................300
SNMP Web-Based Configuration ........................................................................................................... 301
SNMP Implementation ............................................................................................................................. 302

Load Monitor and Flexi Monitor Setup .........................................................................304

Load Monitor .............................................................................................................................................. 304
Flexi Monitor............................................................................................................................................... 310

Logical Groups (Boolean Algebra) .................................................................................315

Email (SMTP) Setup ...........................................................................................................318
3. Operation ......................................................................................................... 322
Using the Commands Buttons .......................................................................................322
System ........................................................................................................................................................ 322
Battery ........................................................................................................................................................ 323
Output Test ................................................................................................................................................ 324
Virtual Inputs ............................................................................................................................................. 325

Alarm Relay Test ...............................................................................................................334

Manual Battery Discharge Test .....................................................................................334
Downloading Logs .............................................................................................................335
Downloading Statistics ....................................................................................................339

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr

Downloading and Uploading Configuration Files .......................................................340

Download Configuration Files ................................................................................................................ 340
Upload Configuration Files ..................................................................................................................... 344

4. Administration ................................................................................................. 346

Administering User Accounts ........................................................................................346
Change Controller Name .................................................................................................347
Find and Change the IP Address ....................................................................................348
Find the IP Address................................................................................................................................... 348
Change the IP Address ............................................................................................................................ 351

Trademark and Copyright Notices........................................................................ 353

Glossary................................................................................................................. 354
Acronyms .............................................................................................................. 359
Index ...................................................................................................................... 360

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr

Comprehensive Overview

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
10 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

1. Guide Overview
This guide provides information and instructions for the Web Interface featured on
the following Eltek controllers:
• Smartpack2
• Smartpack S
• Compack
Eltek controllers are designed for use with Eltek dc power systems only.
The topics covered in this guide include how to establish communication between
an Eltek controller and a computer, comprehensive descriptions of each page and
field of the web interface, and how to apply parameter settings through the web
interface.
NOTE: Screenshots for the web interface are taken from the Smartpack2 controller
(unless otherwise noted).
NOTE: For the Smartpack2 and Smartpack S controllers, setup and operational
functions can be performed through either the web interface or display panel. The
Compack controller does not have a display panel and therefore requires the use of
a computer and an Ethernet connection for the web interface in order to adjust
parameters.

Table 1.1 – Controller Documentation

Controller Unit Document(s)

Eltek Controllers Description of System Functionality – Smartpack2 Smartpack

Compack (350020.073)
(general documentation)
Configuration Guide – Smartpack2, Smartpack S, Compack
Controllers (370013.063)

Smartpack2 Navigation and Menu Tree – Smartpack2 Controller

(370017.033)
User’s Guide – Smartpack2 Basic Controller (350021.013)
User’s Guide – Smartpack2 Basic Industrial Controller
(350025.013)
User’s Guide – Smartpack2 Master Controller (350020.013)

Smartpack S User Guide – Smartpack S Controller (350030.013)

Compack User’s guide – Compack Monitoring and Control Unit

(350011.013)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Guide Ove
erview 11

Controlller Unit Document((s)

CAN No
odes Installation
n Guide – Batttery Monitor CAN Bus Node
(351507.03 33)
Installation
n Guide – IO M
Monitor2 CAN
N Node (3515
509.033)
Installation
n Guide – IO M
Monitor, CAN Nodes T1&T3 (351503.033)
Installation
n Guide – Load
d Monitor, CA
AN Bus Node
e (351506.033)

REVISIOON NOTE: This

T guide was
w writtenn using Smmartpack2 c controller s
software
revision
n 2.3. Menus and optio
ons may va
ary as laterr software revisions a
are release
ed.

Eltek
k Conttrollers
s with Web
W Innterfac
ce
The follo
owing table lists the available Eltek
E contr ollers thatt feature th
he web
interfac
ce.
Table 1..2 – Eltek Controllers witth Web Interfface

Image Con
ntroller Descripttion

Sm
martpack2 The prim
mary interface e and data agggregation u unit
Master for the S
Smartpack2 c controller sys
stem; it conttains
the displlay interface, Ethernet poort (for web
interface
e), and SD card slot. The MMaster unit iss
connecte ed to Smartp pack2 Basic oor Smartpack k2
Basic Ind
dustrial contrrollers and a variety of CA
AN
Nodes.
Smartpa
ack2 controlleers are integ
grated into large-
and med
dium-sized Elttek power syystems.

Sm
martpack S Smartpaack S is prima
arily used witth Eltek Flatppack
S power systems. It ccontains a dis splay interfa
ace
and Ethe
ernet port, ass well as alarrm input and
output t erminals.

Com
mpack The sma allest Eltek co
ontroller, use
ed primarily w
with
Micropacck power sysstems. It has no display
interface
e, so the web b interface m
must be used to
configur e controller p
parameters. It does conta ain
alarm inp
put and outp put terminals.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
12 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Web Interface Features

The Eltek Controller Web Interface features the following advantages:
• Platform independence: The web interface operates in common computer
operating system platforms (like Windows®, Mac®, UNIX, etc.) that support
standard web browsers capable of running JavaScript.
NOTE: The web interface is fully tested using the latest versions of
Microsoft® Internet Explorer® and Mozilla® Firefox®. Limited tests are also
performed with Google Chrome™, Apple Safari®, and Opera™; but there is no
guarantee that full functionality is supported with these browsers.
• No software installation required: Communication with the web interface is
facilitated by standard HTTP.
• Field upgrades: Controller firmware can be upgraded over the network.
• Simultaneous sessions: Multiple login sessions are supported, which can be
utilized for cooperative troubleshooting efforts, training purposes, or other
collaborative, multi-user sessions.
• Security: Several group access levels are provided, restricting unauthorized
attempts to alter system settings.
• Protected Operating Firmware: The operating firmware is executed from
RAM, so there is no file system to corrupt or damage. The controller’s RAM is
not accessible externally, which provides excellent security against malicious
attacks. In the event that the RAM is corrupted, a controller reboot loads a
fresh copy of the operating code.
• Embedded SNMP Agent: Standard SNMP traps are provided upon
occurrences of alarm conditions; GET and SET operations are supported to
retrieve data and perform remote operations on the power plant. The MIB
files are provided with the controller’s firmware.

Functions Available Only Through the Web

Interface
The following functions are not available through the controller displays of the
Smartpack2 and Smartpack S controllers (the Compack controller does not have a
display); they can only be set and/or adjusted through the web interface:
• DC Plant Information: Information regarding the dc system and installation
site details, including site name and location, power system model, and
installation and service dates.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Guide Overview 13

System Conf. > Power System > Power System > System Info
• SNMP Configuration: Simple Network Management Protocol settings for
communication with a Network Management System (NMS) that uses SNMP
v1, v2c, or v3.
System Conf. > Device Settings > SNMP Settings

Controller Login and Access Levels

The controller web interface can be accessed through a network (e.g., a LAN),
through the Internet, or through direct Ethernet connection with a computer.

Figure 1.1 – Web Interface Login Page

• LOGIN – link for a normal connection

• Switch to SSL – link for a Secure Sockets Layer connection
Click on the Switch to SSL link if encrypted, secure communication is
required between the computer and controller.
NOTE: Due to strict security settings, some web browsers and local networks
may prohibit SSL connections that are missing valid certificates. If access is
blocked by the web browser, it may be possible to use an alternate web
browser that permits a temporary exception for each session. For example,

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
14 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Mozilla Firefox currently allows users to add a temporary exception when a

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Guide Ove
erview 15

• Control:
C Read-Write ac
ccess. Conntrol creden
ntials allow
w changes to be made to
most
m system parametters but ex xcludes somme setting gs and commands, such
as SNMP coonfiguration
n, user acc
counts, andd the “Delette Event Lo
og” comma
and.
The
T defaultt credentials are:
User
U name: control
Password:
P control
c
NOTE:
N It is advisable to
t make thhis access llevel availa
able for reggular
maintenanc
m ce, as it pre
events changes from being mad de to critica
al features
s like
user accoun nts and SN NMP configuuration.
• Status:
S Rea
ad-only acccess. Statu
us credentia
als permit viewing pa
arameter
settings butt prevent making
m and
d saving ch
hanges. The default ccredentials
s are:
User
U name: status
Password:
P status
s
NOTE:
N e-sensitive
User names and passwords are case e.
When
W loggeed in, the ac
ccess level can be fo
ound in the bottom rig
ght corner of
th
he web interface pagges.

Figu
ure 1.2 – Acc
cess Level Ind
dicators (botttom right of web page)

CAUTIOON: For seccurity reaso

ons, do nott leave you
ur compute er unattend
ded after
logging in. When logging outt, make surre to close all browse
er windowss that were
e
e web interface sessio
opened during the on.

Requ
uireme
ents
NOTE: Adjusting
A settings on the Compa ack controoller require
es the use of a compu uter
and an Ethernet
E co
onnection. The Smarttpack2 and d Smartpac ck S contro
ollers can b
be
configured using either
e the display
d pan
nel or a con
nnection to o a computter.
Make suure the Use er Guides for the conttroller and power sysstem are on n hand. If n
not,
please visit
v the Elttek ShareF
File site (htttp://eltek.sharefile.c
com/) and d
download tthe
relevantt documen nts.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
16 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Hardware
• Computer with network card/adapter (Ethernet port, Ethernet port adapter,
or wireless card)
• If working through a local or wide area network (LAN or WAN), the controller’s
Ethernet port must be connected to the network with an Ethernet cable
For a direct connection between a computer and an Eltek controller:
• Computer with Ethernet port or Ethernet port adapter
• Ethernet cable (either cross-over or straight-through)

Software
The following software is required to use the Web Interface:
• One of the following web browsers:
o Internet Explorer® 9 or later
o Mozilla Firefox® 12 or later
NOTE: Internet Explorer 9 is not available for Windows XP. If the computer is
running Windows XP, then Mozilla Firefox 12 or later should be downloaded
and used to ensure full functionality of the web interface.
The web interface is fully tested using the latest versions of Microsoft®
Internet Explorer® and Mozilla® Firefox®. Limited tests are also performed
with Google Chrome™, Apple Safari®, and Opera™; but there is no guarantee
that full functionality is supported with these browsers.
• The latest version of Oracle Java™ installed on the computer and enabled in
the web browser
• IMPORTANT: The following Eltek applications/interfaces require the specified
communication ports to be available (i.e., not blocked by the local network
administration or IT group):
o Eltek Network Utility:
UPD port 20034
TCP port 80
o Web Interface:
TCP port 80
TCP port 443

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Guide Overview 17

Recommended
The following is recommended:
• Eltek Network Utility (ENU): an Eltek program that locates Eltek controllers
located on a network and facilitates software updates.
NOTE: This utility is required for the procedure in the “Direct Connection with
the Controller” section, as it provides the easiest way to determine the IP
address of an Eltek controller.
o Requires Microsoft® Windows XP and later (e.g., Vista, 7, 8).
o This utility can be downloaded from the Internet at
http://msm.eltek.com/enu.

Optional
It may be advantageous in some cases to install the Eltek PowerSuite program on
the computer to be used. For example, if the computer is running Windows XP and it
is not possible to install one of the required web browsers, then PowerSuite is the
most convenient way to access and configure the controller through a computer.
• PowerSuite
o Requires Microsoft® Windows XP and later (e.g., Vista, 7, 8).
o UDP port 4002 must be available
o PowerSuite is on the CD provided with the controller. It can also be
downloaded from Eltek's FTP site (ftp://ftp.eltek.com); please contact
Eltek for the current credentials.
NOTE: PowerSuite is not covered in this guide. If necessary, please
consult the documentation provided on the CD as well as the online help
file at http://onlinedocs.eltek.com/wip4/mywip/powersuite; please
contact Eltek for the current credentials.

Direct Connection with the Controller

Direct connection between the Eltek controller and a computer using an Ethernet
cable is the most reliable method for establishing a communication connection.
For controllers with a display (Smartpack2, Smartpack S), the controller’s IP address
can be found at the following location in the display menu:
Main Menu > Sys.Config. > PowerSystem > General System Config. >
Agent IP Address (four lines, one line per octet)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
18 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

SIMPLE METHOD: If the Eltek controlle er’s IP addre

ess is know
wn, then th he compute er
can be connected
c to the con
ntroller (via
a Ethernet cable) and d the contro oller IP adddress
typed in
nto an Interrnet browsser address s bar on thee compute er. This is th
he simplest
connecttion methood. If, howeever, the Web Interfac ce login page does no ot appear in n
the brow
wser, then use the fo ollowing proocedure w ith the Elte ek Network k Utility (EN
NU)
to troub
bleshoot.
NOTE: This
T proceddure require
es installattion of the Eltek Netwwork Utility
y (ENU)
program
m in order to
t determinne the Eltek controlle ess and to change it if
er’s IP addre
necessa
ary.
To establish a dire
ect connection with an
a Eltek con
ntroller:
1. Connect
C an Ethernet cable
c (eithe
er cross-ov
ver or straight-throug
gh) to the
controller and computter Etherneet ports.

Fig
gure 1.3 – Co
ontroller Ethe
ernet Ports

2. Launch the Eltek Netw

work Utility
y (ENU) on tthe compu
uter.

Fig
gure 1.4 – Elttek Network Utility Icon

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Guide Ove
erview 19

3. After
A the EN
NU program m opens, cllick on the search button (magn nifying glas
ss
ic
con) in the upper left corner to find
f the co
ontroller. W
Wait for the window to o
populate.
p

Figurre 1.5 – Eltek

k Network Uttility Window
w

4. Click
C on the
e controllerr line to sellect it.
NOTE:
N By de
efault, Elte
ek controlle
ers are ship
pped with a static IP a
address off
192.168.100.20.
5. Click
C on the
e Web Interrface butto
on.
6. Does
D the Lo
ogin page appear
a in th
he web bro
owser? (See the follow
wing figure
e.)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
20 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Fig
gure 1.6 – We
eb Interface Login Page

Iff YES, then skip to ste

ep 20.
Iff NO, then the
t controller's IP add
dress mustt be changed to be clloser to the
e IP
address of the
t compuuter. Contin nue to the n
next step.
7. On
O the computer, laun
nch a Comm
mand Prom
mpt window
w. This can
n be done in
n
one of two ways:
w
Click
C the Sttart button
n, choose Run,
R type cm
md in the ttext field, a
and click th
he
OK
O button.
Click
C the Sttart button
n, choose All
A Program
ms, select A
Accessorie
es, and then
n
select Command Prom mpt.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Guide Ove
erview 21

Fig
gure 1.7 – Com
mmand Prom
mpt Window

8. At
A the comm mand prom mpt, type ip
pconfig andd press [EN
NTER]. A se
eries of line
es
appears listting all of the TCP/IP identities o
of the com
mputer.
9. Find the hea
ading Etheernet adaptter Local AArea Conne ection (or s
similar textt); it
may
m be necessary to scroll
s upwaards in the command prompt window. Loc cate
th
he IPv4 address line and
a write down
d or co
opy the adddress. It consists of foour
sets of num
mbers (or, octets)
o separated by tthree perio
ods (in the form x.x.xx.x).
This
T address is neededd in step 15.
10. Type
T exit att the prompt to close
e the Comm
mand Prom
mpt window
w.
11. In
n the ENU program,
p se
elect the controller
c a
and click on
n the IP Config… buttton.
The
T Ip confiiguration window
w apppears.
12. Click
C on the
e Clear IP button.
13. Make
M sure the
t check box
b under DHCP
D is NO
OT checked (empty).
14. Click
C ss until the box is high
in the field underr IP Addres hlighted an
nd a cursorr
appears.
15. Type
T an adddress that is close to the IP add dress of the
e computer. The firstt
th
hree numbbers (or octtets) shouldd be exacttly the samme to ensurre that bothh
th
he computter and con ntroller are on the sam me networrk; the last number
(o
octet) shou
uld be diffe
erent by a few
f digits.
FOR
F EXAMP PLE: If the computer’s
c s IPv4 addrress is 192.168.1.30,, then use the
fiirst three numbers
n 192.168.1) for the controller’s a
(1 address. Fo
or the last
number, pic ck somethin ng close to
o the compputer's lastt address n
number, likee 35.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
22 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

The
T resultin
ng IP address for the controller
c iin this exam
mple will be
192.168.1.3
35.
NOTE:
N If an invalid add
dress is enttered, the b
box showss a red outlline. Omit
le
eading zerooes.
16. Click
C the Suubmit butto
on. There may
m be a “c click” from the contro
oller as it
re
eboots to apply
a the new
n IP addrress. Allow
w 30 secondds for the c
controller tto
fiinish the re
eboot cycle
e.
17. Click
C the Clo
ose button
n of the Ip configurat
c tion window
w.

Fig
gure 1.8 – Ip Configuratio
on Window

18. After
A the coontroller re
eboots, retu
urn to the main windo ow of the E
ENU progra am
and click the search button again. The con ntroller app
pears in the
e list with tthe
new IP addrress.
19. Select
S the controller
c and
a click th
he Web Inte
erface buttton. The lo
ogin page
appears (as
s shown in Step
S 6).
20. Click
C the LO
OGIN link.
NOTE:
N If a secured
s co
onnection is
s required, use the Sw
witch to SS
SL link insttead.
21. At
A the prom
mpt, type in
n the usern
name and p
password. T
The defaullts are:
Username:
U admin
a
Password:
P admin
a
NOTE:
N The username
u and
a passw word are case-sensitiv e credentials
ve. If these
do not workk, then they
y have bee
en changedd on site. C
Consult site
e personneel
and/or site documenttation for th
he current credentialls.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Guide Overview 23

Controller connection is now established. Make sure to logout from the controller
when you are finished.
NOTE: If the controller is to be connected to a local area network (LAN) after
configuration is complete, contact the local network administrator to determine if a
static IP address is to be assigned or if the IP address will be assigned dynamically
(DHCP). Use the "Ip configuration" window to set the controller IP configuration
according to the instructions from the network administrator. Refer to steps 11– 17
again if necessary.
RECOMMENDATION: If connecting the controller to a LAN after setup, make sure to
check connectivity through the network!

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
24 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

2. Web
W Innterfa
ace Ov
vervie
ew
Upon su uccessful lo
ogin, the home screeen appears in the web b browser. Along the top
of the page
p are the category y buttons, controller model nam me, and thee software and
revision
n numbers. In the botttom right corner
c is th
he access le
evel. (See tthe following
figure.) These top and bottom informattion bars are presentt at all time es in the weeb
ce. The hom
interfac me screen isi discusseed in the seection “Hom
me”.

Figure 2.1 – Top an

nd Bottom Infformation Ba
ars

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Web Interrface Overvie
ew 25

Alarm
m Icons and Monito
M ors
Alarm ic
cons appea ar througho
out the web interfacee, indicating the statuus of alarm
m
monitorrs. In every
y place whe
ere alarm ic
cons appea ar (includin
ng the Evennt Status
windoww and individ
dual alarm monitors) they use tthe same ic cons to indicate statu
us,
as the following
f able explains:
ta

Table 2.1 – Alarm Icon

n Table

Alarm Ic
con Definittion

Normall
(no acttive alarms)

Major A
Alarm

Minor A
Alarm

Disable
ed
(alarm monitoring iss not enabled
d for this
parameeter or input))

Alarm
m Mon
nitor Va
ariable
es and Brackets
Multiple
e alarm monitors with h the same name can appear in the Web In nterface fo
or
each Coontroller or CAN Node e device; th
hey are disttinguished from eachh other by
sequenttial numera als. In this guide, such alarm moonitors (witth numeric
c designatio
ons)
ariables. For example
are writtten with va e:
SP2 Bas
sicInd X
ProgInp
put X.Y
ProgInp
put XX.Y
The X and Y are va
ariables sta
anding in fo
or numeralls. Here is what they
y indicate:
N Node or Controller
X = CAN C number
n ass
signed to d
distinguish multiple devices of tthe
same ty
ype that are connecteed to the CAN
C bus. EEach parammeter with tthis variable
has the same valu
ue as that assigned
a he CAN Node or Conttroller that it belongs to.
th

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
26 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

X.Y = Inp
put terminal designattion, where e X is the n
number of tthe CAN No
ode or
Controlller, and Y is
s the inputt terminal on
o the deviice
XX.Y = Input termiinal designation for I/
/O Monitorss, where XX X is the CA
AN
cation num
identific mber of the I/O Monito or, and Y is the input tterminal on
n the devic
ce
NOTE: Alarm
A monnitors betwween brackeets indicatte that they
y only appe
ear when tthe
associatted device
e or input is
s connected to the syystem. Forr example:
[Solar Charger]
C – only
o appea
ars if solar chargers
c a
are presentt in the sys
stem
[DCDC CurMon
C X] – only app
pears if a Lo
oad Monito
or is assigned to meas
sure curren
nt
from dc
c-to-dc converters

Cate
egory Button
B ns
The category butttons are loc
cated at th
he top and left of the
e web interfface.

Fig
gure 2.2 – Ca
ategory Butttons (Icons)

The table below describes th

he pages or
o actions tthat each b
button reprresents.

Table 2.2 – Description of Cate

egory Button
ns

Icon Catego
ory Descripttion

Home This secttion is read-o

only. It is the home page, which contains
the systtem overview w window and d status notiffications. Rollling
over andd clicking the
e various icon ns and boxes provides mo ore
detailed system info rmation.

System
m NOTE: This section iss password-p
protected and
d should only
y be
Configu
uration used by System Adm ministrators
Use this section to in
nterrogate th
he system, m make changes s, or
reprograam the syste m parameters. Administrrators can
programm basic system m parameterrs, network c configuration n,
system voltages,
v sysstem calibrattions, generaators, rectifie
ers,
solar cha
argers, dc-dcc converters, batteries, baattery test,
battery boost,
b and ba attery symm
metry configu urations.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Web Interrface Overvie
ew 27

Icon Catego
ory Descripttion

Alarm Configuration
C n NOTE: This section iss password-p
protected and
d should only
y be
used by System Adm ministrators
Use this section to coonfigure systtem low-volttage disconnect
(LVD) devices and sy ystem alarm ttables, create/delete and d
enable/ddisable alarmms and alarm groups, enab ble/disable
system inputs
i and ou utputs, progrram alarms a and alarm
severity levels for AC
C mains, gene erator, rectiffiers, solar
chargerss, dc-dc convverters, loadss, batteries, inputs/outpu uts,
and the control syste em.

Logs This secttion is read-o

only. Use thiss section to v
view and save
logs abo
out active ala arms, systemm events, volttage, loads,
batteries
s, and batterry test resultts. Logs can bbe saved to a
compute er.

Comma
ands NOTE: This section iss password-p
protected and
d should only
y be
used by System Adm ministrators
Use this section to ex xecute comm mands to sta art and stop
specific functions of the power sy ystem. Comm mands includde
resetting
g alarms, staarting/stopping battery te ests,
starting/
/stopping ba attery boost, resetting sy ystem
configuration, and ex xecuting rela
ay tests; loadding and savin
ng
configuration files arre also perforrmed in this c
category

Statistics This secttion is read-o

only. It displays daily and monthly ene
ergy
statistics for the high
hest, lowest,, and average e values.

Help This buttton launchess the online h

help file syste
em, which is
passworrd-protected . Please con tact Eltek fo or current
credentials.

Logoutt This buttton logs out of the web in

nterface, end
ding the current
session.

The follo
owing secttions descrribe each category
c in detail.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
28 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

3. Home
H
After su
uccessful lo
ogin, the Home
H page of the web
b interface
e appears. IIt can also be
accesseed at any time by clicking on the
e Home bu
utton in the
e top menuu of catego ory
buttonss.

Figure 3..1 – Home Bu

utton

Figure 3.2 – Home Screen

S Pane
es and Featurres

Systtem Ov
verview
w Wind
dow
The Sys
stem Overv
view Windo
ow provides
s summary
y and statu
us informattion for crittical
system parameters and com
mponents. The
T panes and buttons in this w
window can n be

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 29

clicked with the mouse for more information. In addition, the square buttons in this
window provide a dynamic status box when rolled over with the mouse cursor.

Figure 3.3 – Status Box on Mouse Roll Over (Example: Battery Status)

NOTE: The Power System Readings area on the far right of the System Overview
Window is not interactive; there are no panes or buttons to click.
NOTE: The parameters listed in the summary windows (which appear when the
component buttons are clicked) represent the status of alarms rather than real-
time readings.
NOTE: The alarm monitors in the summary windows are configured in the Alarm
Configuration section and show the current status and measured readings of each
parameter. This means that if the description (or name) of the alarm or parameter is
changed in the Alarm Configuration section, the description also changes in the
summary windows and anywhere else it appears in the web interface.
Along the top of the System Overview window are the Site name (if applied) and
Site Time (far right).

System Status and Operational Mode

Figure 3.4 – Event Status and System Mode

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
30 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

• Event Status indicates whether there is an alarm condition or not. Possible

status messages are: Normal, Major Alarm, and Minor Alarm
• System Mode indicates the operational mode of the controllers, especially as
related to batteries. The system modes are: Float (normal operation), Test
(batteries are being tested), Boost (battery voltage is being boosted), and
Critical (conditions may open an LVD).
Clicking on the System Status and Operational Mode pane with the mouse
brings up the Active Alarm Overview window. The following lists appear:
o Active Alarm(s) – If one or more alarms are active, then this section lists
the individual alarms. If the “Active Alarms Groups” list is visible, then it is
necessary to click on the “Active Alarm(s)” header bar to see the active
alarms list.

Figure 3.5 – Active Alarm Overview with an Active Alarm

NOTE: Most lists in the web interface are only visible one at a time. It is
necessary to click on each list’s header bar to view it.
NOTE: If there are no active alarms, then the “Active Alarm(s)” list is
empty.
o Active Alarm Groups –This section lists alarm groups. If the Active
Alarm(s) list is visible, then it is necessary to click on the Active Alarm
Groups header bar to see the active alarms list.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 31

Figure 3.6 – Active Alarm Groups List

Power System Components, Controller Nodes, and

Inputs
The major portion of the System Overview Window features a diagram of the
system component, controller nodes, and inputs detected by the control and
monitoring system.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
32 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 3.7 – Example of Power Sy

ystem Overviiew (System
m with Solar In
nput)

The follo
owing table explains each symb
bol that ca
an appear in
n the Syste
em Overvie
ew
diagram
m:
Table 3.1 – Power System Ove rview Symbo
ols

Symbol Compon
nent Definition

Mains Sttatus Status of ac

c input feedss (“mains”)

Generattor Status Status of ac

c generator

Rectifierr Status Status of sy

ystem rectifiiers

Solar Sttatus Status of so

olar output (v
voltage reading only)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 33

Symbol Compon
nent Definition

Wind Ge
enerator Stattus Status of w
wind turbine o
output (voltage reading only)

Fuel Cell Status Status of fu

uel cell outpu
ut (voltage re
eading only)

DC-DC Converter
C / Solar
S Status of dc
c-dc convertters or charge
ers (solar, wind,
Chargerr / Wind Charg
ger / Fuel and/or fuel cell)
Cell Cha
arger Status

Load Sta
atus Status of sy
ystem loads

Battery Status Status of sy

ystem batterries

Control System Status of co

ontrollers and CAN Nodes
s

Outdoorr Inputs Status of mmonitoring inp

puts from outtdoor cabine
ets
(principally fans and tem
mperature)

System Inputs Status of prrogrammable

e monitoring inputs like
alarms and temperaturee

Power System
m Components (AC serv
vice, rec
ctifiers, loads,
batteries)
Alert sy
ymbols app
pear in a corner of the
e button if tthere is an
n alarm or n
notice thatt
affects the compo
onent. Thiss is especia
ally useful ffor trouble
eshooting aalarms.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
34 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 3.8 – Minor Alarm

m Notices

Figure 3.9 – Major Alarm

m Notices

Mains Status
The Maiins Status button sho
ows the sttatus of the
e AC input feed(s).

Mains alarm monittors locatio

on:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > Mains
Clicking
g on the Ma
ains button
n brings up the Mains Summary window.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Mains summary
s w
window witthout group
ps:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 35

Figure 3.10 – Mains Summary Window (without groups)

• Mains summary – summary of generator alarm monitors

WITHOUT GROUPS – ALARM MONITORS THAT APPEAR WHEN THERE ARE NO
SMARTPACK2 BASIC INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS PRESENT
o Mains – lists of ac mains group parameters

■ MainsVolt X – voltage reading for the ac input feed

NOTE: The number of MainsVolt monitors is dependent on how many
phases are specified at System Conf. > Power System > Mains >
(Mains Configuration) Number of Phases

■ MainsLow – indicates a low voltage ac mains alarm

■ Number of Phases – The number of ac phases on the incoming ac

mains lines
The following table lists the Mains alarm monitors (without groups):

Table 3.2 – Mains Alarm Monitors (without groups)

Menu Sub-Menu Alarm Monitor Units Type Alarm Type(s)

(if applicable)

Mains MainsVolt X Volts (ac) Major High

Minor High
Major Low
Minor Low

MainsLow Yes/No Major

Minor

Number of Phases Sum N/A

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
36 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

WITH GROUPS – ALARM SECTIONS AND MONITORS THAT APPEAR WHEN

ONE OR MORE SMARTPACK2 BASIC INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS ARE
PRESENT AND CONNECTED TO RECTIFIERS
o Mains – lists of ac mains group parameters (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial
controller only)
The following figure shows the Mains monitors page with groups:

Figure 3.11 – Mains Summary Window (with groups)

■ MainsGrpInMajor – Mains Group In Major, which indicates if the mains

group is in Major Alarm status

■ MainsGrpInMinor – Mains Group In Minor, which indicates if the mains

group is in Minor Alarm status

■ Number of Mains Groups – the number of ac mains groups present

(Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller only)
o Mains Groups – lists of voltage parameter readings per ac mains group
(Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller only)
The following figure shows the Mains Group monitors page:

Figure 3.12 – Mains Groups List

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 37

■ MainsVolt X.Y – Voltage reading for each ac input feed and line.
NOTE: The number of MainsVolt monitors is dependent on how many
phases are specified at System Conf. > Power System > Mains >
(Mains Configuration) Number of Phases

■ MainsLow X – monitor for defining major and minor alarms for low ac
input (mains) voltage (from MainsVolt X.Y)

■ Number of Phases – The number of ac phases on the incoming mains

lines
The following table lists the Mains alarm monitors (with groups):

Table 3.3 - Mains Alarm Monitors (with groups)

Menu Sub-Menu Alarm Monitor Units Type Alarm Type(s)

(if applicable)

Mains Summary MainsGrpInMajor Yes/No Major

Minor

MainsGrpInMinor Yes/No Major

Minor

Number of Mains Sum N/A

Groups

Mains Groups Mains Group X MainsVolt X.Y Volts (ac) Major High
Minor High
Major Low
Minor Low

MainsLow X Yes/No Major

Minor

Number of Phases Sum N/A

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
38 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Genera
ator Stattus
The Gen
nerator Sta
atus button shows th
he status o
of the gene
erator(s), iff applicable
e.

Generattor alarm monitors

m loc
cation:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > Generato
or
Clicking
g on the Generator bu
utton bring
gs up the Generator S
Summary w
window.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Genera
ator monito
ors page:

Figu
ure 3.13 – Ge
enerator Alarrm Summary
y

• Generator
G summary
s – summary of generattor alarm m
monitors
o Generattor Status – status off generatorr alarms

■ GeneeratorFail – monitors ac input w when the coontroller se

ends a
Geneerator Activ
vation signnal; this moonitor send
ds an alarmm if the
Geneerator Activ
vation signnal is ON annd there is no ac inpu
ut, indicatin
ng
that the
t genera ator is not delivering
d a
ac input po
ower to thee system.

■ Gene
erator Activvation – indicates wh
hether the signal to a
activate the
generator is ON
N or OFF.
o Discharg
ge Status – status off battery diischarge

■ Disch
harge value harge percentage bas
e (%) – esttimated battery disch sed
on th
he last mea
asured batttery cycle. A depth-oof-discharg
ge (DoD)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 39

percentage value can be set as one of the conditions to start the

generator.
System Conf. > Power System > Generator > Capacity
o Timer Status – alarm monitors for the generator timer

■ Mains not present – time (in minutes) that should elapse after an ac
mains outage before the generator is signaled by the controller to turn
on.

■ Charge time – time (in minutes) that the generator ran during the last
measured battery cycle
o Tank X – fuel tank parameters (maximum of two tanks)

■ Fuel Status – indicates if the remaining fuel has dropped below a user-
defined threshold.
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Generator > FuelRemaining X
NOTE: Fuel Status is configured under the FuelRemaining X alarm
monitor on the Alarm Configuration page. The FuelRemaining X line
of the Generator Status window shows the amount of fuel
measured.

■ FuelRemaining X – real-time measurement of the amount of fuel

remaining in the generator fuel tank (units are user-defined)
The following table lists the Generator alarm monitors:

Table 3.4 – Generator Alarm Monitors

Menu Sub-Menu Alarm Monitor Units Type Alarm Type(s)

(if applicable)

Generator GeneratorFail N/A Configurable

Status

Generator ON/OFF N/A

Activation

Discharge Status Discharge value (%) Percentage N/A

Timer Status Mains not present Minutes N/A

(min)

Charge time (min) Minutes N/A

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
40 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Menu Sub-Menu
S Alarm
m Monitor Units Ty
ype A
Alarm Type(s
s)
(if
( applicable
e)

Tank X Fuel Status

S (Liquid V
Volume M
Major High
Units – U
User
M
Minor High
Defined))
M
Major Low
M
Minor Low

FuelR
Remaining X (Liquid V
Volume N
N/A
Units – U
User
Defined))

Rectifiier Status
s
The Rec
ctifier Stattus button shows the
e status of the rectifiers and tottal output
current..

Rectifiers alarm monitors

m loc
cation:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > Rectifierss
Clicking
g on the Rec
ctifier buttton brings up the Rec
ctifier Sum
mmary wind
dow.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Rectifie
er – Summa
ary page (w
without gro
oups):

Figure 3..14 – Rectifie

er Summary (without gro
oups)

• Rectifier
R su
ummary – summary
s of
o rectifier a
alarm para
ameters

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 41

WITHOUT GROUPS – alarm monitors that appear when there are no

Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers present

The following figure shows the Rectifier – Inventory page (without groups):

Figure 3.15 – Rectifier Inventory (without groups)

o RectifierCurrent – indicates if the sum of all rectifier output current

exceeds a predetermined current value
o RectifierError – indicates if an alarm is present in a rectifier; if so, then the
number of affected rectifiers is indicated under the Value column
o RectLowMains – indicates if there are any rectifiers experiencing low ac
input
o RectCommError – indicates if there is a communication error (or failure)
with one or more rectifiers; if so, then the number of affected rectifiers is
indicated under the Value column
o Rect.Capacity – indicates whether or not rectifiers are operating within a
specified percentage of their output capacity
o RectCurrShareErr – indicates if rectifiers are deviating beyond a defined
percentage from the mean rectifier output current
o RectifierTemp – indicates if rectifiers are operating below a defined
temperature value
o Rectifiers Installed – indicates how many rectifiers are installed

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
42 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

The following table lists the Rectifier alarm monitors (without groups):

Table 3.5 – Rectifier Alarm Monitors (without groups)

Rectifiers Installed Sum N/A

Rectifier (List of Rectifiers) N/A N/A

Inventory

WITH GROUPS – alarm sections and monitors that appear when one or more
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers are present and connected to
rectifiers
o Rectifier – list of overall rectifier alarm parameters
The following figure shows the Rectifier monitors page (with groups):

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 43

Figure 3.16 – Rectifier Summary (with groups)

■ TotRectCurrent – Total rectifier current, which indicates if the sum of

all rectifier output current exceeds a predetermined current value.

■ RectGrpErr – Rectifier Group Error, which indicates if an alarm is

present in a rectifier group; if so, then the number of affected
rectifiers is indicated under the Value column.

■ RectGroupInMinor – Indicates if a rectifier group has a minor alarm; if

so, then the number of affected rectifiers is indicated under the
“Value” column.

■ RectGrpCommErr – Rectifier Group Communication Error, indicates if

there is a communication error (or failure) within a rectifier group; if so,
then the number of affected rectifiers is indicated under the Value
column.

■ RectCurrShareErr – Rectifier Current Share Error, indicates if rectifiers

are deviating beyond a defined percentage from the mean rectifier
output current.

■ TotRectCapacity – Total Rectifier Capacity, indicates if rectifiers are

operating within a specified percentage of their output capacity.

■ RectifierTemp – Rectifier Temperature, indicates if rectifiers are

operating below a defined temperature value.

■ Rectifier Groups Installed – Indicates the total number of Smartpack2

Basic Industrial controllers with rectifiers connected.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
44 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

■ Total Number of Rectifiers – Indicates the total number of rectifiers

installed in the power system and communicating with the controller.
o Rect.Group X – details for each rectifier group

The following figure shows the Rectifier Group - Summary monitors page
(with groups):

Figure 3.17 – Rectifier Group Summary

■ Summary – list of rectifier parameters for the rectifier group:

□ RectCurrGrp. X – Rectifier Current Group, indicates if the total

rectifier output of the group is below a defined current value.

□ RectErrGrp. X – Rectifier Error Group, indicates if there are any

rectifier alarms in the group.

□ RectComErrGrp. X – Rectifier Communication Error Group, indicates

if there are any rectifiers in the group that have stopped
communicating with the controller.

□ RectTempGrp. X – Rectifier Temperature Group, indicates if

rectifiers are operating below a defined temperature value.

□ CurrShareErr X – Current Share Error, indicates if rectifiers in the

group are deviating beyond a defined percentage from the mean
rectifier output current.

□ RecLoMainsGrp. X – Rectifier Low Mains Group, indicates if there

are any rectifiers experiencing low ac input.

□ Rectifier Installed in Group – Indicates how many rectifiers are in

the rectifier group.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 45

■ Rectifier Inventory – inventory list of rectifiers assigned to the

rectifier group.
The following figure shows the Rectifier Group - Inventory monitors
page (with groups):

Figure 3.18 – Rectifier Group Inventory

NOTE: The button “Start Reading Data” must be clicked in order to

populate the list.
The following table lists the Rectifier alarm monitors (with groups):

Group

Rectifier (List of Rectifiers) N/A N/A

Inventory

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 47

Solar Status
S
The Sola
ar Status button
b shoows the staatus of sola
ar array ou
utput, which shows
voltage on mouse rollover on
nly; there is
s no summmary window w for this b
button.

NOTE: Solar
S statu
us only app
pears if sola
ar chargerss and/or so
olar monito
oring inputs
are conn
nected to the
t power system.
Solar ch
harger alarm
m monitors
s location:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > Solar Cha
arger
Clicking
g on the con
nnected Co
onverter button bring
gs up the S
Solar Charg
ger Summa
ary
window w.

The follo
owing figure shows the
t Solar Charger – Summary m
monitors pa
age:

Figure 3.19 – Solar Charger Sum

mmary Window

• Solar
S Charg
ger Status – status off solar chargers
o Summarry – list of solar
s monittors for sollar chargerr input

■ Solarr Current – indicates if there is a high amo

ount of sola
ar current

■ SolarrChargerErrr – indicate
es if there is an alarm
m on any so
olar charge
er
moduule

■ SolarrCommErr – indicates
s if there iss a commun
nication error with on
ne or
moree solar charrgers

■ Solarr Chargers Installed – total of solar charge

ers installe
ed in the po
ower
syste
em

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
48 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

o Inventorry – lists th
he solar cha
argers and
d informatio
on about e
each modulle
o Solar Cu
urMon X – see
s section
n Load Mon
nitors
o Solar Fle
exMon X – see sectio
on Flexi Mon
nitors

owing table lists the Solar Charrger alarm m

The follo monitors:

Tablle 3.7 – Solarr Charger Ala

arm Monitorss

Menu Sub-Menu
S Alarm Monitor Units T
Type A
Alarm Type((s)
(iif applicable)

Solar Ch
harger Summary
S SolarC
Current Amps Major
Minor

SolarC
ChargerErr Sum Major
Minor

SolarC
CommErr Sum Major
Minor

Solar Chargers
C Sum N/A
Installed

In
nventory (List off Solar N/A N/A
Charge ers)

Wind Status
S
The Win
nd Status button
b shows the sta atus of wind turbine o
output, which shows
voltage on mouse rollover on
nly; there is
s no summmary windoww for this b
button.

NOTE: Wind
W statuus only app
pears if wind chargerss and/or wiind monito
oring inputs
s are
connectted to the power systtem.
Wind ch
harger alarm
m monitors
s location:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > Wind Cha
arger
Clicking
g on the con
nnected Co
onverter button bring
gs up the W
Wind Charg
ger Summa
ary
window w.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 49

The follo
owing figure shows the
t Wind Ch
harger – Su
ummary m
monitors page:

Figure 3.20 – Wind Charger Sum

mmary Windo
ow

• Wind
W Charg
ger Status – status off wind charrgers
o Wind Charger – me
enu for win
nd charger monitors

■ Summ
mary – sub
b-menu for wind charg
ger input

□ WindCurrent
W t – alarm monitor
m for current fro
om the win
nd chargers
s

□ WindError
W – alarm monnitor for de
etecting the
e number o
of wind
ch
hargers exp
periencing an error

□ WindCommE
W Error – alarrm monitorr for detectting the nu
umber of w
wind
ch
hargers exp
periencing communic cation errors

□ Coonverters Installed – count of tthe numbe

er of wind c
chargers
installed

■ Inven
ntory – lists the wind chargers a
and information abou
ut each mo
odule
o Wind CurMon X – see
s section
n Load Mon
nitors
o Wind Fle
exMon X – see section Flexi Mon
nitors

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
50 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

The follo
owing table lists the Wind Charg
ger alarm m
monitors:

Tablle 3.8 - Wind Charger Ala

arm Monitorss

Menu Sub-Menu
S Alarm Monitor Units T
Type A
Alarm Type((s)
(iif applicable)

Wind Ch
harger Summary
S WindCurrent Amps Major
Minor

WindError Sum Major

Minor

WindCommError Sum Major

Minor

Conve
erters Installe
ed Sum N/A

In
nventory (List) N/A N/A

Fuel Ce
ell Status
s
The Fue
el Status button show
ws the stattus of hydrrogen fuel cells outpu
ut, which
shows voltage
v on mouse rolllover only; there is no
o summary
y window fo or this buttton.

Fuel cell charger alarm

a monittors locatio
on:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > FuelCell C
Charger
NOTE: Fuel
F Cell sttatus only appears if fuel cell ch
hargers and
d/or monittoring inputts
are conn
nected to the
t power system.
Clicking
g on the con
nnected Co
onverter button bring
gs up the F
Fuel Cell Charger
Summary window.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 51

The follo
owing figure shows the
t Fuel Ce
ell Chargerr – Summarry monitors
s page:

Figure 3.21 – Fuel Ce

ell Charger S
Summary Win
ndow

• Fuel
F Cell Ch
harger Sum
mmary – status windo
ow for fuell cell charger alarms
o FuelCelll Charger – menu for fuel cell ch
harger alarm monitors
s

■ Summ
mary – sub
b-menu for fuel cell ch
harger inpu
ut

□ Fu
uelCellCurrrent – alarm
m monitor for current from fuell cell charg
gers

□ Fu
uelCellErro
or – alarm monitor
m forr detecting
g the numb
ber of fuel c
cell
ch
hargers exp
periencing errors

□ Fu
uelCellCommmErr – alaarm monito
or for detec
cting the n
number of ffuel
ce
ell chargers
s experienc
cing comm
munication eerrors

□ Fu
uelCellCap
pacity – ala
arm monito
or for maxim
mum capac
city of fuell cell
ch
hargers

□ Coonverters Installed – count of tthe numbe

er of fuel ce
ell chargers
s
installed

■ Inven
ntory – lists the fuel cell
c charge
ers and info
ormation about each
moduule
o FuelC Cu
urMon X – see section Load Mon
nitors
o FuelC FlexMon X – see sectio
on Flexi Mo
onitors

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
52 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

The follo
owing table lists the Fuel Cell Charger
C alarm monitors:

Ta
able 3.9 – Fuel Cell Alarm
m Monitors

Menu Sub-Menu
S Alarm Monitor Units T
Type A
Alarm Type((s)
(iif applicable)

FuelCelll Summary
S FuelCe
ellCurrent Amps Major
Convertter
Minor

FuelCe
ellError Sum Major
Minor

FuelCe
ellCommErr Sum Major
Minor

FuelCe
ellCapacity Percenttage Major
Minor

Conve
erters Installe
ed Sum N/A

In
nventory (List) N/A N/A

DC-to--DC Conve
erter Sta
atus
The DCD
DC Converter button shows information o
on dc-to-dc
c converterrs.

NOTE: The
T dc-to-d dc convertter button appears
a on
n the right side of the
e Power
Systemm Overview diagram since dc-to--dc convertters feed loads that are separa
ate
from the
e loads fed
d by rectifie
ers.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 53

Figure 3.22 – Location of Dc-to-Dc

D Con
nverter Stattus Button

Dc-to-dc
c converte
er alarm mo
onitors loca
ation:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > DcDc Con
nverter
Clicking
g on the DC
CDC Converrter button
n brings up
p the DCDC
C Converter Summary
y
window w.
• DCDC
D Converter Summary – sta
atus window
w for dc-to
o-dc converter alarms
s
o DcDc Co
onverter – menu
m for dc-to-dc
d co
onverter ala
arms

■ Summmary – subb-menu for dc-to-dc c

converter a
alarm monittors
The following
f figure show
ws the DCDCC Converteer – Summ
mary monito
ors
page:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
54 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 3.23 – Dc-to-dc Converter Summary Window

□ DcDcCurrent – alarm monitor for current from dc-to-dc converters

□ DcDcError – alarm monitor for detecting the number of dc-to-dc

converters experiencing an error

□ DcDcCommError – alarm monitor for detecting the number dc-to-dc

converters experiencing communication errors

□ DcDcCapacity – alarm monitor for the maximum capacity of the dc-

to-dc converters

□ DcDcTemp – alarm monitor for high and low temperature

thresholds for the dc-to-dc converters

□ Converters Installed – count of the number of dc-to-dc converters

installed

■ Inventory – lists the dc-to-dc converters and information about each

module
The following figure shows the DCDC Converter – Inventory monitors
page:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 55

Figure 3.24 – Dc-tto-dc Converrter Inventorry

o DCDC Cu
urMon X – see
s section
n Load Mon
nitors
o DCDC FlexMon X – see sectio
on Flexi Mo
onitors
The follo
owing table lists the Dc-to-dc Converter
C a
alarm monitors:

Table 3..10 – Dc-to-d

dc Converterr Alarm Monittors

Menu Sub-Menu
S Alarm Monitor Units T
Type A
Alarm Type((s)
(iif applicable)

DcDc Co
onverter Summary
S DcDcC
Current Amps Major
Minor

DcDcE
Error Sum Major
Minor

DcDcC
CommErr Sum Major
Minor

DcDcC
Capacity Percenttage Major
Minor

DcDcT
Temp Degree
es Major
Minor

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
56 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Menu Sub-Menu
S Alarm Monitor Units T
Type A
Alarm Type((s)
(iif applicable)

Conve
erters Installe
ed Sum N/A

In
nventory (List) N/A N/A

Load Status
S
The Loa
ad Status button(s)
b show the sttatus of loa
ad alarms, load current, fuses
and/or circuit
c brea
akers, and low-voltag
ge disconneects (LVDss).

Load ala
arm monito
ors location
n:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > Load
Clicking
g on the Loa
ad Status button
b ngs up the Load Summary wind
brin dow.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Load monitors
m pag
ge:

Fig
gure 3.25 – Load
L Summa ry Window

• Load Summ
mary – statu
us window
w of load ala
arms
o Load – List of load alarm mon
nitors

■ LoadCurrent – Indicates
I whether
w loa
ad current is below th
he current
level defined in the Alarm Configurattion.

■ Numb ber of Load

d Groups – Indicates the numbe er of dc loa
ad groups
monittored by th
he power system,
s int ended to represent tthe number of
contrrollers mon
nitoring distinct group ps (or bayss) of loads. The numbber
of loa
ad groups must
m be se
et manually y under Sysstem Conffiguration
(Systtem Conf. > Power System
S > LLoad > Con nfiguratioon)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 57

■ Fuse Status – Inndicates th

he status o
of the load fuse(s) and/or circuit
break
ker(s) in the
e dc load group
g circu it(s)

■ LVLDD Status – Indicates th

he status o VD, if one is installed or
of a load LV
active
o LoadGrooup X – Loa
ad monitor group for E
Eltek contrrollers (one
e group perr
controlle
er)
The follo
owing figurre shows th
he Load Grroup monitors page:

Figure
e 3.26 – Load
d Group Sum
mmary Window

■ LoadCurr grp. X – Load Cu

urrent Grouup, indicate
es if the tottal load
ent drawn by
curre b the loadd group is b
below a deffined curreent value.

■ LoadCurrentX.Y Y – Indicate
es if the loa
ad currentt through a specific
monittoring inpu
ut is below a defined ccurrent vallue.

■ LoadFuse X – Inndicates wh
hether the
e fuse or cirrcuit break
ker for the lload
group
p is open.

■ Drop diode X.Y – Indicates

s whether a drop diod
de is functioning prop
perly
(drop
pping voltag
ge to the required lev
vel)
o LoadPrim
mary X – se
ee section Load Moniitors
o Load CurMon X – see
s section
n Load Mon
nitors
o Load Fle
exiMon X – see sectio
on Flexi Monitors

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
58 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

The following table lists the Load alarm monitors:

Table 3.11 - Load Alarm Monitors

Menu Sub-Menu Alarm Monitor Units Type Alarm Type(s)

(if applicable)

Load Summary LoadCurrent Amp Major

Minor

Number of Load Sum N/A

Groups

Fuse Status Yes/No N/A

LVLD Status Yes/No N/A

Load Group X LoadCurrGrp. X Amp Major High

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

LoadCurrent X.Y Amp Major High

Minor High
Error

LoadFuse X Yes/No Configurable

Drop diode X.Y Yes/No Minor High

Battery Status
The Battery Status button shows the status of battery alarms, battery voltage,
battery current, and whether current limit and temperature compensation are
enabled or disabled.

Battery alarm monitors location:

Alarm Conf. > Power System > Battery
Clicking on the Battery Status button brings up the Battery Summary window.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 59

The following figure shows the Battery monitors page:

Figure 3.27 – Battery Summary Window

• Battery Summary – status window of battery alarms

o Battery – list of battery monitors

■ BatteryVoltage – Indicates if battery voltage is within acceptable

parameters

■ BatteryCurrent – Indicates if battery current monitored is within

acceptable parameters

■ BatteryTemp – Indicates if battery temperature is within acceptable

parameters

■ BatteryLifeTime – Indicates whether the batteries have exceeded the

maximum number of days (user-defined) for a normal life cycle. The
number of days is dependent on the batteries operating within the
acceptable battery temperature range.

■ LVBD – Indicates the status of the system’s low-voltage battery

disconnect (LVBD) contactor

■ Fuse Status – Indicates the status of battery fuses or circuit breakers

■ Symmetry Status – Indicates the status of battery symmetry inputs,

whether or not there is a significant voltage deviation

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
60 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

■ DeltaStringCurr – Delta String Current, which indicates that a battery

string measurement has deviated from the average of all battery
string measurements by a user-specified percentage.
NOTE: The following parameters estimated using calculations based on
the Battery Table and battery test results.

■ BatteryQuality – Battery Quality, which indicates what percentage of

the battery’s original capacity remains for charging.

■ BatteryTotCap – Battery Total Capacity, indicates whether the

batteries have exceeded total capacity (user-defined, amp-hours).

■ BatteryRemCap – Battery Remaining Capacity, indicates whether the

batteries have exceeded remaining capacity (user-defined, amp-
hours).

■ BatteryUsedCap – Battery Used Capacity, indicates whether the

batteries have exceeded a user-defined amount of charge (amp-
hours).

■ BatteryTimeLeft – Indicates if the estimated time remaining for

battery discharge has dropped below a user-defined threshold
(minutes).

■ Ah Charged – Indicates if the batteries have been charged beyond a

user-defined threshold (amp-hours).

■ Ah Discharged – Indicates if the batteries have discharged below a

user-defined threshold (amp-hours).

■ BadTestResults – Indicates how many battery tests determined that

the batteries are “bad”, where End Voltage is reached before the time
allotted for the Simple Test (a type of battery discharge test)

o BatteryBank X – A battery bank consists of two or more battery strings

connected in parallel, with each string having the voltage required to
support the power system (e.g., 48V or 24V). The number of banks must
be manually set under Battery Configuration (System Conf. > Power
System > Battery > Configuration).

■ Voltage
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Voltage monitors page:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 61

Figure 3.28 – Battery Bank Voltage Summary

□ BattVolt bank X – Indicates the status of the battery voltage alarm

for the battery bank.

■ Currents
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Current monitors page:

Figure 3.29 – Battery Bank Currents Summary

□ BattCurrentX.Y – Indicates the status of the battery current inputs

for the battery bank, whether they exceed the user-defined high
and low current parameters.

■ Fuses
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Fuses monitors page:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
62 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 3.30 – Battery Bank Fuses Summary

□ BattFuses X – Indicates the status of any fuses or circuit breakers

(open or closed)

■ Temperatures
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Temperatures monitors
page:

Figure 3.31 – Battery Bank Temperatures Summary

□ BatteryTempX.Y – Indicates the status of battery temperature

inputs for the bank, whether any readings exceed the user-defined
high and low temperature parameters.

■ Symmetry
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Symmetry monitors
page:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 63

Figure 3.32 – Battery Bank Symmetry Summary

□ SymmVolt X.Y – Indicates if the voltage deviation between the

points monitored is greater than a user-defined limit (volts).
o BattMonStr.X – list of alarm monitors from a Battery Monitor (Eltek CAN
Node) connected to the CAN bus (only appears if connected)
The following figure shows the Battery Monitor monitors page:

Figure 3.33 – Battery Monitor Summary Window

Fuses BattFuses X N/A Configurable

BattMonFuse X N/A Configurable

BattMonSym X.Y Volts (dc) Major

Minor

Load Monitors
Load Monitors are Eltek CAN Nodes that are connected to the controller system.
They can be configured for monitoring these specific power components: load,
solar, wind, fuel cell, and dc-to-dc converter input. The Load Monitor as a whole unit
is assigned to one of these input types under System Configuration:
System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Current Monitor
NOTE: Load Monitors are also called Current Monitors in the Web Interface.
Load Monitors are address in this separate section because of their ability to be
used for a variety of applications, and because they always maintain the same
structure for their alarm monitors.
Load Monitors have eight input channels for fuse monitoring and eight channels for
current monitoring. Load Monitors appear in the Summary windows with the
following names (depending on monitoring type):
Load: Load CurMon X (set as Load CurMon) or LoadPrimary X (set as Std
LoadMon)
Solar: Solar CurMon X

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 67

Wind: Wind CurMon X

Fuel Cell: FuelC CurMon X
Dc-to-dc: DCDC CurMon X
Load Monitor alarm monitors location:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > [Applicable Device]
NOTE: The alarm monitors of Load Monitor devices appear under the power
component that they are configured for (e.g., load, solar, fuel cell, etc.).

• [Current Monitor X]
o Fuses

■ Fuse X.Y – Indicates the status of a branch fuse or circuit breaker

(open or closed)
o Currents

■ Current X – Indicates whether the total current read over all inputs of
the monitor is below the defined total current level.

■ Current X.Y – Indicates whether the load branch circuit is below the
defined current levels
o Power

■ TotPower X – Indicates the status of total power read over all inputs
of the monitor (not configurable)

■ Power X.Y – Indicates the status of power calculations for each

programmable input (not configurable)
The following table lists the Load alarm monitors:

Table 3.13 – Load Monitor Alarm Monitors

Monitor Type Sub-Menu Alarm Monitor Unit(s) Alarm Type(s)

Current Monitor X Fuses Fuse X.Y N/A Configurable

Currents Current X.Y Amp Major High

Minor High

Power TotPower X Watt N/A

Power X.Y Watt N/A

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
68 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Flexi Monitors
Flexi Monitors, like Load Monitors, are Eltek CAN Nodes that can be utilized for a
variety of current monitoring types. They can be configured for monitoring these
specific power components: load, battery, solar, wind, fuel cell, and dc-to-dc
converter input. The Flexi Monitor as a whole unit is assigned to one of these input
types under System Configuration:
System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Current Monitor
Flexi Monitor alarm monitors location:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > [Applicable Device]
NOTE: The alarm monitors of Flexi Monitor devices appear under the power
component that they are configured for (e.g., load, battery, solar, etc.)
Flexi Monitors are address in this separate section because of their ability to be
used for a variety of applications, and because they always maintain the same
structure for their alarm monitors.
Flexi Monitors have 16 input channels for a variety of monitoring inputs (fuse,
current, temperature, etc.). Flexi Monitors appear in the Summary windows with
the following names (depending on monitoring type):
Load: Load FlexMon X
Battery: Batt FlexMon X
Solar: Solar FlexMon X
Wind: Wind FlexMon X
Fuel Cell: FuelC FlexMon X
Dc-to-dc: DCDC FlexMon X
Inputs: Contr FlexMon X (set as Std Fleximon)
• [Flexi Monitor X]
o Inputs
The following figure shows the Flexi Monitor – Inputs monitors page:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 69

Figure
e 3.34 – Flex
xi Monitor Inp
puts Summarry

■ Curre
ent X – Indiicates wheether the to
otal curren
nt read ove
er all inputs
s of
the monitor
m is below
b the defined
d tottal current level

■ ProgIInput X.Y – indicates the statuss of progra

ammable innputs, whic ch
can be
b configurred for a va
ariety of inp
put types, including ffuses, relayys,
curre
ent, and tem
mperature
o Power
The follo
owing figurre shows th
he Flexi Mo
onitor – Po
ower monittors page:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
70 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure
e 3.35 – Flex
xi Monitor Po
ower Summarry

■ TotPower X – Inndicates whether thee total pow

wer read ov
ver all inputts of
the monitor
m is below
b the defined
d tottal power le
evel

■ Poweer X.Y – ind

dicates the
e status of the powerr calculatio
on for each
progrrammable input (not configurab
c ble)
The follo
owing table lists the Flexi Monittor alarm m
monitors:

Flexi Monittor Alarm Mo

onitors

Monitorr Type Sub-Menu

S Alarm Monitor Unit(s) A
Alarm Type((s)

Flexi Mo
onitor X In
nputs Curren
nt X Amp Major High
Minor High

ProgIn
nput X.Y N/A C
Configurable
e
(Volt DC
C)

Power
P TotPow
wer X Watt N/A

Powerr X.Y N/A N/A

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 71

Contrroller No
odes and
d Inputs and Outtputs
Just as with the Poower Systeem Components, alerrt symbols appear in a corner off the
button if
i there is an
a alarm orr notice tha
at affects tthe compo
onent. This is especially
useful for
f troubles shooting allarms.

Contro
ol System
m
Clicking
g on the Control Systeem button opens the e Control uunits summ mary window,
which lis
sts connec
cted CAN Nodes
N (controllers, moonitors, etc
c.), includin
ng part
numberrs, version number
n (off the part), serial num
mber, softwware numbe er and vers
sion,
and stattus.

NOTE: Load
L Monittors are listted as CurrrMonitor X in this sum
mmary win
ndow.
• Control
C Units Summary – summ
mary window
w of contro
oller alarms
o Inventorry – list of control
c and
d monitorin
ng devices connected
d to the
system
owing figurre shows th
The follo he Control Units – Inv
ventory mo
onitors pag
ge:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
72 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 3.36
3 – Contro
ol Units Inve
entory Summ
mary

o Top Monnitors – top

p-level alarm monitors for contrrollers and monitoring
g
devices
owing figurre shows th
The follo he Control Units – To
op Monitors
s page:

Figure 3.37
7 – Control Units Monitorss Summary W
Window

NOTE: The
T followin ng list is no
ot exhausttive, as monitors can be added ffor
new or updated
u de
evices. Alarm monitors only app pear when the
associatted device is connectted to the pprimary conntroller.

■ AmbiientTemp – the maximum temp perature de

etected byy any of the
e
contrroller temp
perature inp
puts (Smarrtpack2 Ba
asic or Sma
artpack2 Baasic
Indus
strial)

■ Batt--AmbientT
Temp – difference bettween batttery tempe
erature and
d
the AmbientTe
A mp value (BatteryTe
( emp – AmbbientTemp))

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 73

■ User suspended – indicates if a user account has been suspended due

to too many unsuccessful login attempts

■ CU Err.Basic – indicates if there is an error in one or more of the

Smartpack2 Basic or Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers

■ CU Err.BattMon – indicates if there is an error in one or more of the

System Inputs
Clicking on the Inputs button brings up the list of inputs for each control and
monitoring device connected to the CAN bus.

Inputs alarm monitors location:

Alarm Conf. > Power System > Inputs
• Inputs Summary – summary window of controller and monitor inputs
o SP2 Master – Master controller of the Smartpack2 controller family;
includes an interactive display and Ethernet port for the web interface.

■ Virtual Input X – Indicates if a virtual input is active.

The following figure shows the Input monitors page:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 75

Figu
ure 3.38 – Inp
put Summary
y Window (w
with Smartpa
ack2 Master)

o SP2 Basic X – Smartpack2 Ba asic contro

oller of the Smartpack
k2 controlller
family; in
ncludes pro
ogrammable inputs, ttemperature inputs, aand
earth/grround faultt detection
n.
NOTE: The
T Smartp c and Sma rtpack2 Ba
pack2 Basic asic Industrial controlllers
have thee same inpu
ut alarm monitors.
m See the SP2
2 BasicInd X list (nextt)
for the alarm
a monittors.
o SP2 BasicInd X – Smartpack2 2 Basic Induustrial controller of the
Smartpa ack2 contro
oller family
y; includes programm mable inputs s, tempera
ature
inputs, and
a earth/g ground fau ult detectio
on.

■ Prog.. Inputs – inndicates iff there is an

n alarm on the controoller’s alarm
m
inputts. This dessignation is
s for input aalarm term
minals, withh the excep ption
of temmperature probes (w which use th he same teerminals). P
Programma able
inputts can be reelay input (normally
( o
open or norrmally closed), diode
matriix, clock inpput, or volttage.
The following
f figure show ws the Sma rtpack2 Ba asic – Prog
g. Inputs
monittors page:

Figure 3.39
9 – Smartpac
ck2 Basic Pro
ogrammable
e Inputs

■ Tempp. Inputs – indicates if

i there is a
an alarm onn the contrroller’s
tempperature inp
puts. This designatio
d n is reserved for tem
mperature
probe
es connectted to input terminalss of Eltek c
controllers..

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
76 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

NOTE: The input terminals used for temperature are the same physical
terminals used for the programmable inputs. If the temperature input
(“Temperature X.Y”) is enabled, then the corresponding Programmable
Input (“ProgInput X.Y) is not available; similarly, if the programmable
input is enabled, then the corresponding temperature input is not
available.
The following figure shows the Smartpack2 Basic – Temp. Inputs
monitors page:

Figure 3.40 – Smartpack2 Basic Temperature Inputs

■ Earth Fault – if enabled, indicates an earth or ground fault has been

detected.
The Earth Fault Detection functionality built-in the Smartpack2 Basic
controllers can be used to raise an earth fault alarm, when the
impedance ground-to-positive supply conductor is not the same as the
impedance ground-to-negative supply conductor. This situation will
occur when there is current leakage from the supply conductor (from +
or – or both) to ground.
The following figure shows the Smartpack2 Basic – Earth Fault
monitors page:

Figure 3.41 – Smartpack2 Basic Earth (Ground) Fault Inputs

o I/O unit X – I/O Monitor, an Eltek CAN Node for accommodating additional
programmable inputs.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 77

■ Prog.Input – programmable inputs, which indicates if there is an alarm

on the controller’s alarm inputs. This designation is for input alarm
terminals, with the exception of temperature probes (which use the
same terminals). Programmable inputs can be relay input (normally
open or normally closed), diode matrix, clock input, or voltage.
The following figure shows the I/O Unit monitors page:

Figure 3.42 – I/O Unit Alarm Monitors

Outdoor Inputs
Outdoor inputs is a special designation for outdoor cabinet inputs, which are
supported by the I/O Monitor Type 1 and I/O Monitor Type 3.

Location of configuration page(s):

Alarm Conf. > Power System > Inputs > I/O unit X Outdoor Configuration
• Outdoor Input Summary – summary window of outdoor input monitors
The following figure shows the Outdoor Input monitors page:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
78 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 3.43 – Outdoor Input Summary Window

o FanSpeed XX.Y – indicates if a cabinet fan is near the high or low

thresholds for operational capacity (as a percentage of rpms and
pulses/revolutions); intended for use with SpeedDev. XX.Y (below).
o OutDoorTemp XX.Y – indicates if a temperature probe in an outdoor
cabinet reports a temperature that exceeds the high or low thresholds;
designed to be used to compare the temperatures inside and outside the
cabinet for TempDev XX.Y (below).
o SpeedDev. XX.Y – indicates if the fan speed monitored is deviating from
the intended fan speed specified by output FanControl Y (alarm output
relay).
Location of Fan Control parameter: System Conf. > Power System >
Control System > Outdoor > Fan Control Y
o TempDev. XX.Y – indicates if the temperature deviation between the
cabinet’s internal and external temperature measurements exceeds user-
defined thresholds.
The following table lists the Input alarm monitors:

Table 3.15 – Input Alarm Monitors

Menu Sub-Menu Alarm Monitor Units Type Alarm Type(s)

(if applicable)

SP2 Master Virtual Input X N/A Configurable

SP2 BasicInd X Prog. Inputs ProgInput X.Y N/A Configurable

(Volt DC)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 79

Menu Sub-Menu Alarm Monitor Units Type Alarm Type(s)

(if applicable)

Temp. Inputs Temperature X.Y Degrees Major High

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

Earth Fault EarthFault X kilo Ohms Major

IO Unit X ProgInput XX.Y N/A Configurable

(Type 2) (Volt DC)

IO Unit X Fan speed XX.Y Percentage Major High

(Type 3) Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

OutDoorTemp XX.Y Degrees Configurable

SpeedDev. XX.Y Percentage Major Alarm

Minor Alarm

TempDev. XX.Y Degrees Configurable

System Measurements (voltage, current, batteries)

Real-time measurements or calculations appear on the right side of the System
Overview panel:

Figure 3.44 – System Measurements Panel

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
80 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

• Battery
B Volltage – rea
al-time mea
asurementt of the batttery voltag
ge
• Battery
B Currrent – real-time mea
asurement or calculattion of batttery curren
nt
• Load Curren
nt – real-tim
me measurrement or c
calculation
n of the loa
ad current
• Battery
B Cha
arge/Capa
acity – estimated cha
arge and ca
apacity of tthe battery
y
banks
b

Systtem His
story Window
W w
The Sys
stem History window provides a real-time graph of b
battery and
d load
voltages, as well as
a system events.

Fiigure 3.45 – System

S Histtory Graph

s a Print bu
There is utton in the
e bottom right cornerr, which prints the Sy
ystem Histo
ory
graph as it appearrs.
The BattteryVoltag ge, LoadCu
urrent, and
d Event datta points c
can be togg
gled on andd off
by clicking on the respective
e icons and names in tthe legend
d (below the graph).

Figu
ure 3.46 – Lo
oad Current T
Toggled OFF

Rolling over
o the da
ata or evennt points on
n the graph
h with the mouse currsor genera
ates
a brief summary
s of the pointt.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Home 81

Figure 3.47 – Data Point Highlighted

System Monitors Window

The System Monitors window provides real-time data reported by each controller
and monitor connected to the Smartpack2 controller CAN bus.

Figure 3.48 – Default System Monitors

The default metrics listed are:

• Battery voltage and current
• Mains (AC utility) voltage
• Load Current
• Total Rectifier Current
• Battery Temperature
• Battery Capacity
NOTE: The System Monitors reflect the configurable page of the display (on
Smartpack2 Master and Smartpack S controllers) and can be configured using
PowerSuite.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
82 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

4. System
S m Con
nfigurration
n
Settings
s pertaining to system
m operatio
on, parametters, and v
various other settings
s are
found in
n the Syste
em Configuuration secttion.

As of th
he date of this
t guide, the major submenus
s are:
• Power
P System
o Power System
o Mains
o Generato
or
o Rectifierrs
o Load
o Battery
o Control System
S
• Device
D Setttings
o Time Setttings
o Network
k Settings
o SNMP Se
ettings
o User Acc
counts

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 83

Figure 4.1
1 – Default Menu
M for Systtem Configuration

In additiion to the major

m menu us, the following appear under Power Sys
stem when the
power modules
m are either present or coonfigured ffor monitorring:
• Solar
S
• Wind
W
• FuelC (fuel cell)
c
• DcDc
D (dc-to
o-dc converrters)

Powe
er Systtem
The Powwer System
m section contains
c co
onfigurable
e paramete ers for site and system
information (name
e, location, etc.), global preferen
nces (unitss formats, ppolarity
preferen
nce, contactor trigge
ers, etc.), an
nd system voltage se ettings (ba
ased on
battery parameters).

Powe
er syste
em
The Pow
wer Systemm sub-secttion contain
ns parametters relate
ed to power system
componnents and global
g values.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
84 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

System Info
The System Info page is for configuring system and site information. Fields are for
free-form text, unless otherwise indicated.

Figure 4.2 – Power System – System Info Page

NOTE: All fields on this page are optional; none are required. These fields are
provided for discretionary purposes by the end user, customer, operator, or owner;
they are not filled by Eltek.
• Company – name of the company that owns or operates this power system
• Site – name for the site or power system
NOTE: This field appears on the Login page as Site. It is different from the
field used on the Eltek Network Utility (ENU) for the Name; the power system
Name is configured as part of the network settings (System Conf. > Device
Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP > Device Name).
• Model – model name of the power system
• Serial Number – serial number of the power system
• Install Date – date that the power system was installed; date format is
years, months, days; [yyyy-mm-dd]
• Service Date – date of the most recent service/maintenance; date is years,
months, days; [yyyy-mm-dd]

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 85

• Responsible – name of person or organization responsible for the latest

service/maintenance performed
• Message 1 – free-form field for comments on the last service/maintenance
performed
• Message 2 – free-form field for comments on the last service/maintenance
performed
• Latitude – latitude of site location; format is degrees (ddd), hours (hh),
minutes (mm.mm, which includes two decimal places), compass direction (c);
[ddd-hh-mm.mm-c]
• Longitude – longitude of site location; format is degrees (ddd), hours (hh),
minutes (mm.mm, which includes two decimal places), compass direction (c);
[ddd-hh-mm.mm-c]
• Elevation – elevation of the site, in meters

System Globals
The System Globals page is for configuring parameters that are applied to the
entire system, such as unit formats, polarity preference, and contactor triggers.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
86 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.3 – Power System – System Globals Page (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial)

• System global settings

o System Capacity scale – choose the format for remaining battery
capacity: Ampere-Hours or Percentage
o Temperature scale – choose the format for temperature: Celsius or
Fahrenheit
o System Polarity – choose how system polarity is to be expressed:
Positive or Negative
NOTE: System Polarity is not for defining the system’s polarity, but
rather, for defining how the polarity is expressed throughout the
interface. For example, if the system voltage is negative 48 volts (-48V),
selecting Positive causes the voltage to be displayed without the
negative symbol (48V); selecting Negative causes the voltage to be
displayed with the negative symbol (-48V).
o Current Decimal settings – choose the format for current: Amps or
deciAmps (1/10 of an ampere)
o Store statistics – for Smartpack2 controllers only: enable or disable
saving statistics to the SD card

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 87

o Individual Voltage Control for Battery Groups – enable or disable

individual voltage control for battery groups
o Individual Current Share for Rectifier Groups – enable or disable
individual current control for rectifier groups
o Allow rectifier remote on/off – enable or disable turning rectifiers on or
off remotely (admin login required)
• Critical premises (Contactor operation) - This section defines alarm
conditions that must be met for the system to report a critical condition,
which indicates that there is low ac current (mains) and/or low battery
current. The choice affects when the low-voltage disconnect (LVD)
contactors may be disconnected; by design, LVDs disconnect in critical
condition and reconnect in normal condition.
o Mains Minor Low – ac mains low current minor alarm is ON
o Battery Current Minor Low – battery low current minor alarm is ON
o Mains Minor Low OR Battery Current Minor Low – either the ac mains low
current minor alarm or the battery low current minor alarm is ON
o Mains Minor Low AND Battery Current Minor Low – both the ac mains low
current minor alarm and the battery low current minor alarm are ON
• Rectifier and DCDC Group configuration - Defines the power module
represented by each rectifier group ID (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial only)
o Group Id – rectifier group ID number(s); choose either Rectifier (for
rectifier modules) or DCDC (for dc-to-dc converters) for each Group Id
NOTE: Group Id refers to the rectifier group number; the total number is
set at System Conf. > Power System > Rectifiers

System Voltages
The System Voltages page is for configuring critical voltage parameters for system
operation.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
88 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.4 – Power System – System Voltages Page

• Nominal Voltage – nominal system voltage determined by the Reference

voltage (Cell) value and the Number of Battery Cells; not a configurable field
• Auto-set number of cells based on rectifier output voltage – check this box
to automatically fill the next field—Number of Battery Cells—based on the
rectifier output voltage
• Number of Battery Cells – enter the number of battery cells in each battery
string; this field is not configurable if the box for Auto-set number of cells
based on rectifier output voltage is checked
• Reference voltage (Cell) – the charging voltage per battery cell as
recommended by the battery manufacturer; this is the same field as
Reference voltage (Cell) under System Conf. > Power System > Battery
>TempComp.
• Reference voltage (Total) – the charging voltage for an entire battery string
as recommended by the battery manufacturer
NOTE: Reference voltage (Cell) and Reference voltage (Total) are linked;
changing one field changes the other when a change is saved.
If Reference voltage (Cell) is changed and saved, then Reference voltage
(Total) updates as follows: Reference voltage (Cell) x Number of Battery

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 89

Cells. This field is the same as Reference voltage (Cell) under System Conf.
> Power System > Battery >TempComp.
If Reference voltage (Total) is changed and saved, then Reference voltage
(Cell) updates as follows: Reference voltage (Total) ÷ Number of Battery
Cells.

Table 4.1 – Calculations for Reference voltage (Cell) and Reference voltage (Total)

If this value is changed… …then this calculation is performed:

Reference voltage (Cell) Reference voltage (Total) = Reference voltage (Cell) X Number
of Battery Cells

Reference voltage (Total) Reference voltage (Cell) = Reference voltage (Total) ÷ Number
of Battery Cells

• Boost voltage – boost charge value per cell; the voltage value must be
higher than float (or Reference) voltage but lower than the over-voltage
shutdown (OVS) value. The total string voltage value in parenthesis (to the
right of the field) updates based on the value entered and saved.
NOTE: Only enter the boost voltage value recommended by the battery
manufacturer. This field is the same as the Boost voltage field of the
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Boost page.
• Rectifier standby voltage – a “safety net” voltage that the rectifiers
maintain during a battery discharge test. This is to ensure that power is
maintained if the batteries fail; it also prevents the batteries from being
disconnected. Therefore, this value (in volts per cell) must be higher than the
Battery disconnect voltage. The total string voltage value in parenthesis (to
the right of the field) updates based on the value entered and saved.
• Rectifier OVS limit – over-voltage shutdown value in volts per cell. The total
string voltage value in parenthesis (to the right of the field) updates based
on the value entered and saved.
NOTE: This field is the same as the Over voltage shutdown (OVS) limit field
of on the page System Conf. > Power System > Rectifiers >
Configuration.
• Battery disconnect voltage – low battery voltage value (per cell) at which
the low-voltage battery disconnect (LVBD) contactor should open. The total
string voltage value in parenthesis (to the right of the field) updates based
on the value entered and saved.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
90 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

NOTE: This field is the same as the Disconnect voltage [V] field on the
Battery contactor table found on the System Conf. > Power System >
Battery > Configuration page.
• Battery reconnect voltage – battery voltage value (per cell) at which the
low-voltage battery disconnect (LVBD) contactor should close. The total
string voltage value in parenthesis (to the right of the field) updates based
on the value entered and saved.
NOTE: This field is the same as the Reconnect voltage [V] field on the
Battery contactor table found on the System Conf. > Power System >
Battery > Configuration page.
NOTE: Changing and saving the Battery disconnect voltage without
entering a new value for the Battery reconnect voltage causes the Battery
reconnect voltage to be updated automatically, maintaining the same
voltage difference as before the change.
• Battery test end voltage (Normal test) – end voltage per cell for the Normal
Test of Battery Test configuration (System Conf. > Power System >
Battery > Test), which is derived from the battery definition table (System
Conf. > Power System > Battery > Configuration > Edit battery table).
Therefore, this is not a configurable field. The total string voltage value is in
parenthesis (to the right of the field).
The following table indicates which fields of the System Voltages page can be set
elsewhere in the Web Interface. Changing the value in one field automatically
changes the value in the identical field.

Table 4.2 – Identical Parameter Fields

System Voltages Field Identical Field Elsewhere Path to Identical Field

Reference voltage (Cell) Reference voltage System Conf. > Power System
> Battery > TempComp

Boost voltage Boost voltage System Conf. > Power System

> Battery > Boost

Rectifier OVS limit Over voltage shutdown (OVS) System Conf. > Power System
limit > Rectifiers > Configuration

Battery disconnect voltage Disconnect voltage [V] System Conf. > Power System
> Battery > Configuration
Battery contactor table

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 91

System Voltages Field Identical Field Elsewhere Path to Identical Field

Battery reconnect voltage Reconnect voltage [V] System Conf. > Power System
> Battery > Configuration
Battery contactor table

Mains
The Mains page is for configuring ac input (mains) parameters.
WITHOUT GROUPS – pages that appear when there are no Smartpack2 Basic
Industrial controllers in the system.

Figure 4.5 – AC Mains Page – Without Groups

• Number of Phases – enter the number of ac phases per input feed (1-3)
• Suppress mains alarms when generator is stopped – check the Enable box
to suppress ac mains alarms when the generator is turned off
WITH GROUPS – pages that appear when Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers
are present.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
92 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Summary
The Summary page is for the ac mains groups.

Figure 4.6 – Mains Summary Page – With Groups

• Number of Groups – the number of mains groups, i.e., the number of

Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers that are monitoring Eltek rectifiers
(which report ac mains information)

Mains Group
The Mains Group page shows each ac mains group (one per Smartpack2 Basic or
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller that is monitoring Eltek rectifiers).

Figure 4.7 – Mains Group Page – With Groups

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 93

Gene
erator
The Gennerator sec
ction is for configurin
ng generato
or parametters. Up to
o two ac
generattors can be
e configureed.

Generral
The Genneral page is for enabbling or disa
abling gene
erator control and ac
ctivation, as
well as assigning
a alarm
a groups and time parametters.

Figure 4.8 – Ge
enerator Gen
neral Page

• Generator
G control
c – enable or disable gene
erator conttrol, where
e the power
system con
ntroller will send ON and
a OFF siggnals to the
e generator(s)
• Long charge e time – if the generaator is used
d to charge e batteries
s, this field
specifies hoow many ho ours the ge
enerator shhould operrate to charge the
batteries;
b th
his value iss used wheen the gene erator is sttarted by thhe Monthly y
parameters
p s or battery y voltage has
h dropped d below th he Battery disconnec ct
voltage
v (Sy
ystem Conf. > Powerr System > Power Sy ystem > S System
Voltages).
V Generatorr control must
m be enaabled.
• Stop
S delay – time delaay in minuttes that thee generatoor should wwait to shutt off
after ac input is restorred (to con
ntinue charrging a bit llonger than
n required by
re
echarge seettings)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
94 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

• Mains delay – time delay in minutes that the generator should wait to start
after ac input is lost; this helps prevent generator startup when the ac mains
outage is brief
• Boost during charge – check this box to enable battery boost mode when
the system is on generator
• Test mode – check this box to enable generator test mode; this changes
hours to minutes to accelerate the time limits to confirm that it works
properly
• Event, Alarm Group – Assign generator events to alarm output groups.
There are two Events for up to two generators.

Capacity
The Capacity page is for setting generator operation based on battery capacity. All
of the options on this page can be enabled simultaneously.

Figure 4.9 – Generator Capacity Page

• Capacity controlled Generator start/stop – Check this box to enable

generator operation based on battery capacity

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 95

• Start Generator on discharge limit – set the battery Depth of Discharge

(DoD) percentage at which the generator should activate
• Stop Generator on charge limit – set the battery State of Charge (SoC)
percentage at which the generator should deactivate
• Capacity/Time controlled Generator start/stop – check this box to enable
generator operation based on battery capacity (discharge) to start and time
elapsed to stop
• Start Generator on discharge limit – set the battery Depth of Discharge
(DoD) percentage at which the generator should activate
• Stop Generator on time limit – set the number of operational hours that
should elapse until the generator deactivates
• Current limit controlled Generator stop – check this box to specify a low
current threshold at which the generator should deactivate
• Stop Generator on current limit – low current level from the generator at
which the generator should deactivate
• Solar Generator stop – check this box to stop the generator upon solar
charger input
• Wind Generator stop – check this box to stop the generator upon wind
charger input

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
96 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Daily
The Daily page is for configuring daily generator operation.

Figure 4.10 – Generator Daily Setup Page

• Daily Generator start – check this box to enable daily generator start/stop
parameters
NOTE: If there are any days during which the generator(s) should not run, do
not assign an alarm group; this prevents the start and stop signals from
being sent during the hours specified for that day.
• [Sunday – Saturday] – set start and stop times for each day (24-hour format,
HH); assign alarm output group to signal the generator

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 97

Monthly
The Monthly page is for configuring monthly generator operation.

Figure 4.11 – Generator Monthly Setup Page

• Monthly Generator Start - check this box to enable monthly generator

activation; up to two days can be configured to start the generator
• Start time – hour start time (24-hour format, HH; do not include minutes).
This is the hour during the days specified below that the generator is started.
The generator runs until reaching the Long charge time value specified (in
hours) on the General page. Set the alarm group to send the start signal to
the generator.
• Day in month (1.start) – day of the month to turn on the generator (1-31, DD
format)
• Day in month (2.start) – day of the month to turn on the generator (1-31, DD
format)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
98 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Voltage Setup
The Voltage Setup page is for configuring generator activation upon battery
voltage reaching a low threshold.

Figure 4.12 – Generator Voltage Setup Page

• Voltage controlled Generator start – check this box to enable generator

activation upon reaching a low battery voltage threshold
• Start generation on – specify the low battery voltage level at which the
generator is to be turned on
• Stop generator after – specify the number of hours that the generator
should run; format is 24-hour (HH).

Rectifiers
The Rectifiers section is for configuring rectifier parameters.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 99

Configuration
The Configuration page is for setting general rectifier parameters.

Figure 4.13 - Power System – Rectifiers Configuration Page

• Number of Rectifiers – field for the total number of rectifiers present in the
power system (for manual numbering only; the controller automatically
counts all Eltek rectifiers)
• Suppress rectifier fail when mains is gone – check this box to prevent the
Rectifier Alarm from triggering during a loss of ac input (mains)
• Walk-in time – relative time frame (short or long) that the rectifiers should
take to reach float (or Reference) voltage (beginning at 44.0 Vdc and rising
to 53.5 Vdc). As the writing of this guide, Short time is 5 seconds and Long
time is 60 seconds. This feature is useful when generators are connected.
• Over voltage shutdown (OVS) limit – output voltage threshold (in volts per
battery cell) at which the rectifiers should shutdown. The total string voltage
value in parenthesis (to the right of the field) updates based on the value
entered and saved.
NOTE: This is the same field as Rectifier OVS limit on the System Conf. >
Power System > Power System > System Voltages page.
• Current limit – check the box to enable current limit on total rectifier output
• Current limit value – enter the maximum total rectifier current desired (in
amps)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
100 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

NOTE: Rectifier current limit manages total rectifier output rather than
output per rectifier.
NOTE: Eltek rectifiers use a constant-power architecture, which means that
output voltage is adjusted to maintain the current limit value. To prevent a
system outage, the current limit setting is overridden if system voltage
drops too low.
• Emergency voltage – enter an emergency voltage value, which is a value
lower than float (or Reference) voltage that the rectifiers should drop to in
the event that an emergency signal is received from an external source
• Generator dependent delay – check this box to enable rectifier startup delay
when the system is powered by a generator. This feature helps prevent
drawing too much current from the generator when it begins supplying
power.
• Startup delay time – enter the time in minutes that the rectifiers should wait
after the generator activates before starting up (to avoid overloading the
generator)
• Silence rectifier alarm – check this box to silence rectifier alarm reporting
through the controller. Rectifiers still alarm normally, but the controller does
not report them. This is useful for areas with unreliable ac service.
• Redundant rectifiers – Under efficiency management (see the section
“Efficiency”), the controller switches off redundant rectifiers if total load
current is less than 50% of the system’s total rectifier capacity. To change
the load current percentage to a lower value, enter a percentage (lower than
50%) of the total rectifier capacity at which the controller should turn off
redundant rectifiers.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 101

Efficie
ency
The Effiiciency pag
ge is for co
onfiguring rectifier
r effficiency ma
anagement.

Figure 4.14 – Power Sys

stem – Rectiffiers Efficien
ncy Page

• Efficiency
E manager
m – select thee efficiency
y profile to use for the
e system:
Disable
D (non
ne), Enable
e efficiency
y manager, or Enable ‘HE” prioritty
• Disable
D – no
o efficiency
y scheme is employed
• Enable
E effic
ciency man
nager – wh
hen selecte
ed, a list off paramete
ers appears
s:
o Power Save
S Mode – determin nes if the re
ectifiers ca
an be turneed off base
ed
on load demand
d annd total rec
ctifier outp
put potential. If “Reduundancy” is
s
selectedd, then one
e more recttifier than nnecessary is kept ena abled to
support the load. If “Non-redundancy” is selected d, then only
y the numbber
of rectifiers necess
sary to suppport the looad are ena abled.
NOTE: Power
P Save e Mode only disables rectifiers if total load
d current is
s
less than
n 50% of th
he total rectifier capa
acity.
o “Rectifie
er off” dela nterval (in minutes) that should
ay – time in d pass befoore
turning off
o a rectifier after tu
urning anotther one onn during effficiency
management
o Shuffle time
t – time
e interval (in hours) thhat should pass befo ore rotating
g
rectifiers
s. When onne rectifierr is turned o
off, anothe
er is turned
d on. Rectifiers
are rotatted sequenntially.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
102 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

o Test mo ode – checkk this box to

t test Recctifier Efficiiency; it ch
hanges houurs
to minuttes and minnutes to seeconds in o
order to acc celerate thhe operatio
on of
this func
ction to con
nfirm that it works prroperly.
o Battery current ca
ancel limit – battery c
current offfset at which efficien
ncy
management is dis ning on all available rectifiers
sabled, turn
NOTE: Th he controlller automaatically disaables efficiiency mana
agement iff
battery discharge
d is detectedd. In very la
arge powerr systems there is
potentiaal for some inaccuracy y in batteryy current rreadings du
ue to shuntt
tolerancces. Therefore, Batterry current cancel lim mit provides
s a means to
enter ann offset to prevent dissabling effficiency ma anagementt due to minor
variation
ns in batterry readings
s.
• Enable
E ‘HE’ priority – if the powe
er system is equippedd with Elte
ek’s High-
Efficiency (H
HE) module es and theyy can supp
ply 70% or more of th he total load
current, the
en this featture turns off
o the nonn-HE rectifiiers.

[Sola
ar Charg
ger]
The Solaar Chargerr page is foor configuring solar chhargers and only appears if sola
ar
chargerrs are insta
alled or a CA
AN Node iss configure ed to monittor solar cu
urrent.

Config
guration
n
The Con
nfiguration
n page is fo
or configuring solar ch
harger mod
dules.

Figu
ure 4.15 – Pow
wer System – Solar Page
e

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 103

• Number
N of Solar
S Charrgers – field
d for the nu
umber of ssolar charger modules
s
in
nstalled
• Suppress
S So
olar Charg
ger fail whe
en all inputts are low – check the box to
suppress low input ala
arms from the solar cchargers
• Over
O voltagge shutdowwn (OVS) limit – set a high volta
age value ((volts per c
cell)
at which the
e solar cha
arger(s) sho
ould shut d
down.

[Wind]
The Winnd page is for
f configu
uring wind chargers
c annd only appears if wind chargerrs
are installed or a CAN
C Node is configure
ed to moniitor wind cu
urrent.

Confiiguration
The Con
nfiguration
n page is fo
or configuring wind ch
harger mod
dules.

Figu
ure 4.16 – Power System – Wind Page
e

• Number
N of Wind
W Charg
gers – field
d for the nu
umber of w
wind charge
er modules
s
in
nstalled
• Suppress
S Wind
W Chargeer fail whe
en all inputts are low – check the
e box to
suppress low input ala
arms from the wind c chargers
• Over
O voltagge shutdow
wn (OVS) limit – set a high volta
age value ((volts per c
cell)
at which the
e wind charger(s) sho
ould shut d
down.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
104 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

[Fuel Cell]
The Fue
el Cell pagee is for con
nfiguring fuel cell charrgers and o
only appeaars if fuel ce
ell
chargerrs are insta
alled or a CA
AN Node iss configureed to monittor fuel celll current.

Confiiguration
The Con
nfiguration
n page is fo
or configuring fuel ce ll charger m
modules.

Figure 4.17 – Powe

er Systems – Fuel Cell Pa
age

• Number
N of FuelCell
F Ch
hargers – field
f for the
e number o
of fuel cell charger
modules
m ins
stalled
• Suppress
S Fu
uelCell Cha
arger fail when
w all inp
puts are loow – check
k the box to
o
suppress low input ala
arms from the fuel ce ell chargerss
• Over
O voltagge shutdow wn (OVS) limit – set a high volta
age value ((volts per c
cell)
at which the
e fuel cell charger(s)
c should shu
ut down.

[DcD
Dc Conv
verter]
The DcDDc Convertter page is for configuuring dc-to only appears if
o-dc converters and o
dc-to-dc
c converters are insta
alled or a CAN
C Node is configure
ed to monitor dc-to-d
dc
convertters.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 105

Configuration
The Configuration page is for configuring dc-to-dc converters (if installed).

Figure 4.18 – Power System – DcDc Converter Page

• Number of DcDc Converters – field for manually specifying the number dc-to-
dc converters in the system
• Output voltage – output voltage for the converters
• Over voltage shutdown (OVS) limit – high voltage limit for the converters
where they shut down
• Current limit – check this box to enable current limit on the dc-to-dc
converters
• Current limit value – total current output in amps for all of the dc-to-dc
converters

Load
The Load page is for configuring system load parameters.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
106 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Config
guration
n
The Con
nfiguration
n page is fo
or configuring load group param
meters.

Figure 4.19
9 – Power Sysstem – Load Configuratio on Page
(Numbe er of load con
ntactors set to 1 or greater)

• Number
N of load
l group
ps – set the
e number o
of load grou
ups presen nt in the en
ntire
power
p systeem. This number is determinedd by the num
mber of co ontroller un
nits
(llike the Sm
martpack2 Basic
B and Smartpack
S k2 Basic Ind
dustrial con
ntrollers) th
hat
are monitorring loads.
• Select
S load group – with
w the Num
mber of loa
ad groups set, selectt a load gro
oup
to
o configure
e.
NOTE:
N Settting load grroup conta
actors requuires that lo
ow-voltage e disconnecct
(L
LVD) contaactors be physically in
nstalled in tthe load circuit(s) mo
onitored by
y the
controller unit, and the contactoors must be e connecte ed to the LVVD termina
als
of the contrroller.
• Load Group p contactorrs – configu
urable list of low-volttage load d
disconnectt
LVLD) conttactors. Th
(L he Number of load co ontactors mmust be seet greater tthan
zero (0) in order
o for the LVLD row
ws to appear on the ttable.
• Enable
E – check this bo
ox to enablle the conttroller’s LVLD termina
al
• Description
D n – if necessary, type a descripttion for the
e LVLD term
minal
• Disconnect
D t voltage [V
V] – battery
y voltage a
at which th
he load con
ntactor sho
ould
open, disconnecting the load fro
om the systtem

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 107

• Reconnect voltage [V] – battery voltage at which the load contactor should
close, reconnecting the load to the system
• Disconnect delay [minutes] – the number of minutes after a loss of ac power
(mains) when the load contactor should be opened to disconnect the load
circuit(s). The Enable box must be checked to enable this feature; otherwise,
the delay based on ac power loss is disabled. This feature is intended for
non-critical or non-priority loads (those that do not need to be supported by
battery back-up).
• Delay after disconnect [seconds] – the time (in seconds) that should elapse
between signaling the LVLD contactor to open (disconnect) and signaling it
to close (reconnect).
• Mains independent – check this box to permit the LVLD to close (reconnect)
if the Reconnect voltage is reached, regardless of whether ac power (mains)
has been restored. This is useful if there are power sources other than ac
utility input that can power the system and charge the batteries. Leaving the
box unchecked ensures that the LVLD does not close until ac power is
restored.
• Number of load contactors – drop-down list to select the number of LVLD
contactor signals available on the controller for the load group specified by
the field Select load group.
NOTE: The number of contactors available in the drop-down list reflects the
number of signal terminals on the controller unit that monitors the specified
load group.

Battery
The Battery section is for configuring parameters for system batteries.

Configuration
The Configuration page is for the general configuration of battery properties,
including number of banks, capacity, and battery table.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
108 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.20 – Power System – Battery Page (Battery Table button highlighted)

• Number of banks – the number of battery banks connected to the power

system.
NOTE: Since only specific controllers are equipped to monitor batteries (like
the Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller), this number should reflect the
number of those controllers (if the power system is so equipped).
• Description – free-form field for a description for the batteries (e.g., the type,
battery manufacturer, or the configuration employed)
• Capacity [per string] – the total capacity (in ampere-hours) per battery string
• Number of Battery strings – the number of battery strings in each battery
bank
• Battery install date [yyyy-mm-dd] – the date of battery installation
• Battery Type – define battery parameters using the battery table (click on
the Edit battery table button).
• Battery contactor – editable table for the primary controller’s low-voltage
battery disconnect (LVBD) contactor terminal.
o Enable – check this box to enable the controller’s low-voltage battery
disconnect (LVBD) contactor terminal
o Description – if necessary, type a description for the LVBD terminal
o Disconnect voltage [V] – battery voltage at which the battery contactor
should open, disconnecting the batteries from the system

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 109

NOTE: This is the same

s field as
a the Batttery discon
nnect volttage field o
on
the Systtem Conf. > Power System
S >PPower Sysstem > Sys stem
Voltage
es page.
o Reconneect voltagee [V] – batttery voltag
ge at whichh the batte
ery contacttor
should close,
c recon
nnecting thhe batteriees to the sy
ystem
NOTE: This is the same
s field as
a the Batttery recon
nnect volta
age field on
n the
System Conf. > Po ower Systtem > Powwer System m > Systemm Voltages s
page.
o Delay affter discon nnect [secoonds] – the
e time (in se
econds) that should
elapse between
b sig
gnaling the
e LVBD conntactor to o onnect) and
open (disco
signaling
g it to closee (reconnect).
o Mains independentt – check thist box to permit the e LVBD to cclose
(reconneect) if the Reconnect
R t voltage iss reached, rregardlesss of whetheer ac
power (mmains) has been resto ored. This is useful iff there are power souurces
other than ac utilitty input tha
at can powwer the systtem and ch harge the
batteries
s. Leaving the box un nchecked e ensures thaat the LVBD does nott
close un
ntil ac powe er is restored.
o Temperaature depe endent – chheck this b
box to ensu
ure the LVB
BD only clo
oses
(reconne
ects) if the battery te
emperaturee than the high temperature lim
mit
defined in the BattteryTemp alarm
a moniitor
Alarm Conf.
C > Batttery > Batttery Alarrm Configu
uration > B
BatteryTem
mp
• Battery
B Tabble – the Baattery Tab
ble contain
ns dischargge specificaations for tthe
batteries
b co
onnected tot the system. It is ac
ccessed by y clicking o
on the Edit
battery
b tabble button on
o the Connfigurationn page of th
he Battery y section.
System
S Conf. > Battery > Conffiguration
n > Edit Ba ttery Tablle

Figure 4.21 – Battery

y Table – Use
e predefined table

o Use Elte
ek predefinned batteryy - Check tthe box to u
use the Elttek Standa ard
battery table,
t whic
ch is based on averagge dischargge characte eristics fro
om a
variety battery
b ma
anufacturerrs; discharg mance and battery
ge perform

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
110 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

characteeristics are
e based on percent va alues rathe
er than amps. As suc ch,
this table should only be usedd if the discharge datta for the b
batteries is
s
unknown n and the use
u of estimmated valu ues is acceeptable. Chhecking this
box removes the editable
e batttery tablee fields. Leave the bo
ox uncheck ked
to use an existing battery
b tab
ble or to co onfigure th
he battery ttable
manuallyy.
The
T followin
ng figure sh
hows the configurabl
c le Battery Table wind
dow;

Figure 4.22
4 – Batterry Table Page
e – Table Dettails

o Templatte Options - Drop-dow wn list of ba

attery tables that are
e loaded inn the
controlle
er. As of th
he writing of
o this guid de, templattes are ava
ailable for tthe
following
g batteriess: FIAMM SLA 100 and d Exide/GNNB Maratho on®
M12V15 55FT. The <empty
< tab
ble> option elected to clear the
n can be se
current battery
b tabble.

■ Load Table - Aftter making

g a selectio
on in the Te
emplate Op
ptions list, click
this button
b to lo
oad the tab
ble template
o Modify table
t – the buttons in
n this section are for editing the
e battery ta
able

■ Edit table
t – clic
ck this buttton to edit the existin
ng table ce
ells. The ta
able
is nott editable until
u this bu
utton is clic
cked.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 111

■ Add row – click this button to add a row after the row with the black
arrow

■ Delete row – click this button to delete the row with the black arrow
o Table Details – window that shows the full battery discharge table
NOTE: If the table fails to load completely, click the Refresh icon in the lower
right of the Battery table window (circle with arrow).

■ Description – field for typing a description of the batteries or battery

table used

■ End volt – end-of-discharge voltage parameters (voltage per cell):

High and Low

■ High [V/cell] – the highest end-of-discharge voltage specification

provided by the battery manufacturer

■ Low [V/cell] – the lowest end-of-discharge voltage specification

provided by the battery manufacturer

■ # - battery table row number

■ Minutes – the discharge time in minutes

■ Current Ref1 – battery current (in amps) specified by the battery

manufacturer for the High [V/cell] end-of-discharge voltage at the
minutes indicated in the Minutes column

■ Current Ref2 – battery current (in amps) specified by the battery

manufacturer for the Low [V/cell] end-of-discharge voltage at the
minutes indicated in the Minutes column
NOTE: The alarm monitors BatteryQuality and BatteryTotCap use the
data from the Current Ref1 column of the battery table. The alarm
monitors BatteryRemCap and BatteryTimeLeft use the data from the
Current Ref2 column of the battery table.
o File operation – window for uploading and downloading battery tables

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
112 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 4..23 – Battery Table Page

e – File Opera
ation

■ Selec
ct battery table file (.tbl)
( for up
ploading to o server – this is the
section for uplo
oading a baattery tablee file (with extension .tbl) to the
e
contrroller. Use the Brows se… button n to locate the file on the compu uter.
Use the
t Upload d file button to uploadd the file to
o the contrroller.

■ Down nload batteery table (.tbl)

( and ssave to file
e – this is th
he section for
down nloading th
he battery table
t from the contro oller to thee computerr.
Click the Save to
t file… buttton to sellect the do ownload loc cation on the
comp puter.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 113

TempComp
The Tem
mpComp pa
age is for setting
s batttery tempe
erature compensatio
on.

Figure 4.24 – Battery – Temperature

T e Configuratiion Page

• Temperatu
T re compen
nsation – ch
heck this b
box to enab
ble battery
y temperatture
compensation
• Minimum
M co
ompensation voltage
e – minimum
m charging
g voltage p
per battery
y cell
• Maximum
M compensat
c tion voltag
ge – maxim um chargin
ng voltage per batterry
cell
• Reference
R voltage
v – charging
c vooltage per battery ceell as recom
mmended b by
th
he battery manufacturer; this is
s the samee field as Re
eference vvoltage (Ceell)
under Systeem Conf. > Power Sy ystem > PPower Systtem > System Volta ages
• Reference
R temperatu
t ure – tempeerature (in degrees Celsius) for the
re
ecommend ded chargin
ng voltage specified b
by the batttery manuffacture
• Temperatu
T re slope – compensation factorr in milliVollts per degree Celsius
s per
battery
b celll (mV/°C/ce ell) recomm
mended by
y the battery manufacturer

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
114 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Current Limitt
The Currrent Limit page is for configurin
ng current limits on b
battery cha
arging.

Figurre 4.25 – Batttery – Curren

nt Limit Page

• Battery
B currrent limita
ation – che
eck this box
x to enable
e current limits on
battery
b cha
arging
NOTE:
N Strin
ng current limitation and
a Rectifiier capacity y limitation
n can only be
enabled if Battery
B current limitattion is enabled first.
• String
S curreent limitattion – check this box tto enable c
current lim
mit on batte
ery
strings; Batttery currennt limitatio
on must be enabled first
• Mains
M feed current lim
mit – the maximum
m ch
harge curreent (in amp
ps) to permmit
fo
or charging
g the batteeries when the system
m is powerred by ac utility (main
ns)
in
nput
• Generator
G feed
f currennt limit – the maximuum charge current (in
n amps) to
permit
p for charging
c th
he batteries s when the
e system iss powered by a generrator
• Rectifier
R ca
apacity limitation – check this b box to enab
ble battery
y charge
current limitts based on total rectifier capac
city
• Rectifier
R apacity limit – the ma
ca aximum pe rcentage o
of total rec
ctifier capa
acity
to
o use for battery cha
arge currennt

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 115

Symm
metry
The Sym
mmetry page is for co
onfiguring battery sy
ymmetry m
monitoring.

Figure 4.2
26 – Battery
y – Symmetry
y Monitoring Page

NOTE: Battery
B symmmetry mo onitoring re
equires sym
mmetry inpputs. In add
dition, each
h
symmettry monitorring input alarm
a moniitor must c
configured under the correspon nding
Alarm Configuratio
C on section..
• Symmetry
S monitoring
m g – check this
t box to enable batttery symm
metry
monitoring
m
• Symmetry
S voltage
v – select
s the symmetry voltage thhat the batttery
monitoring
m uld detect, depending
leads shou g on the sy
ymmetry co onfiguration
employed. For examp ple, if using 12V batte
ery blocks, select:
12V for bloc
ck configuration in a 48V string
g
24V
2 for mid
d-point and double mid-point con
nfiguration
ns in a 48V
V string
12V for mid
d-point or block
b config
gurations in
n a 24V strring
• Symmetry
S mode
m – sellect the sy
ymmetry m
mode, which
h indicates when
symmetry measureme
m ents are taaken:
o Continuo
ous – batte
ery symme
etry measu
urements a
are taken c
continuouslly

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
116 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

o Discharg
ge – batterry symmetry measure
ements are
e taken only during
battery discharge
d
• Discharge
D delay
d – time in minute
es to wait a
after a batttery discharge begin
ns
before
b startting batterry symmetry measure ements

Boostt
The Boo
ost page is for configuring batte
ery boost ((fast charg
ge).

Figure
e 4.27 – Batttery – Boost S
Settings Pag
ge

NOTE: Boost
B charrging must be configuured accord
ding to the
e battery m
manufacturrer’s
specific
cations. Do
o not boostt charge if the
t batteryy manufac cturer does
s not
recommmend it.
• Battery
B boo
ost setting
gs
o Boost vooltage – fie
eld for the boost charrge voltage
e per batte
ery cell. Bo
oost
voltage must be higher than float (or Re eference) v
voltage annd lower than
the overr voltage sh
hutdown (O OVS) value
es, which arre set on the System m
Conf. > Power Sys stem > Power Syste em > Syste em Voltag ges page.
NOTE: This
T is the same
s field as the Boo e field on the System
ost voltage m
Voltages page.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 117

o Current threshold – optional field for setting a minimum charge current. If

the battery charge current drops below the Current threshold, then
battery boost charging is stopped. Check the Enable box to enable this
feature.
o Follow-up voltage – voltage to maintain following the end of a boost
charge before reverting to float (or Reference) voltage; check the Enable
box to enable this feature.
o Follow-up duration – time in minutes to maintain Follow-up voltage (if
enabled) before reverting to float (or Reference) voltage.
o Temperature compensation – check this box to enable temperature
compensation (TempComp) during battery boost charging.
• Manual boost max duration - specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of a
boost charge that is started manually
NOTE: The command to start and stop battery boost charge manually is
under the Commands section (Commands > Battery)
• Interval boost – check this box to enable interval (or scheduled) boost
charging.
o Max duration – specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of an interval
(or scheduled) boost charge.
o Next start date [yyyy-mm-dd] – the date for the start of the next
scheduled battery boost charge
o Next start date [hh:mm] – the time for the start of the next scheduled
battery boost charge (24-hour clock format, HH:MM)
o Interval period – the number of days between scheduled battery boost
charges
• Automatic boost – check this box to enable automatic battery boost
charging based on a battery discharge threshold
o Max duration – specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of an
automatic boost charge.
o Charge factor – percentage of the battery capacity that was discharged
to recharge using boost charging. Once the specified percentage of
battery discharge is boost charged, then Automatic boost charging stops.
The Charge factor can be greater than 100% since the percentage
represents only discharged amp-hours. Range: 60% - 150%
o Discharge threshold – total battery capacity (in amp-hours) discharged by
the batteries before Automatic boost charging starts. Range: 0 – 1000
Ah

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
118 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

NOTE: Entering
E a zero
z (0) dis
sables the A
Automatic
c boost feature.
o Voltage Thresholdd – low batttery voltag
ge threshold at whichh Automatic
boost ch
harging sta
arts. Checkk the Enablle box to enable this feature.

Equalize
The Equ ualize page
e is for configuring ba
attery equa
alize charging (rebala
ancing batttery
cells).

Figure 4.28 – Batte

ery – Equalize
e Settings Pa
age

• Battery
B equ
ualize setttings – para
ameters fo
or battery e
equalize ch
harging
o Equalize
e voltage – field for th
he equalize
e charge vo oltage per battery ce
ell.
Equalize voltage must
m be higher than flloat (or Refference) vo
oltage and
lower than the oveer voltage shutdown
s ((OVS) values (Systemm Conf. >
Power System
S > Power
P Sysstem > Sysstem Volta ages)
o Current threshold – optional field for se
etting a minimum chaarge curren
nt. If
the batttery charge
e current drops beloww the Curreent thresho
old, then
battery equalize
e ch
harging is stopped.
s C
Check the E
Enable boxx to enable
e this
feature.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 119

o Follow-up voltage – voltage to maintain following the end of an equalize

charge before reverting to float (or Reference) voltage; check the Enable
box to enable this feature.
o Follow-up duration – time in minutes to maintain Follow-up voltage (if
enabled) before reverting to float (or Reference) voltage.
o Temperature compensation – check this box to enable temperature
compensation (TempComp) during battery equalize charging.
• Manual boost max duration – specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of
an equalize charge that is started manually
NOTE: The command to start and stop battery equalize charge manually is
under the Commands section (Commands > Battery)
• Interval Equalize – parameters for automated equalize charging
o Interval boost – check this box to enable interval (or scheduled) equalize
charging.
o Max duration – specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of an interval
(or scheduled) equalize charge.
o Next start date [yyyy-mm-dd] – the date for the start of the next
scheduled battery equalize charge
o Next start date [hh:mm] – the time for the start of the next scheduled
battery equalize charge (24-hour clock format, HH:MM)
o Interval period – the number of days between scheduled battery equalize
charges

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
120 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Test
The Tes
st page is for
f configuring batterry discharg
ge testing.

Figure 4.29
4 – Batterry – Test Con
nfiguration P
Page

• Battery
B Tes
st Configuration – pa
age for settting param
meters for b
battery tes
sts
o Test typpe – select a either a Simplified Test or a N
Normal Test (see
definitions in the Glossary)
G
o End volttage – volta
age per cell at which battery discharge te
esting is to
stop
o Max duration – tim
me in minutes that a d
discharge ttest is to la
ast. Check the
Enable box
b to enab ble this fea
ature.
o Max disccharge – maximum
m ba
attery capacity in am
mp-hours th
hat is to be
e
discharg
ged before stopping a battery discharge te est. Check
k the Enable
box to enable this feature.
NOTE: For
F the Sim mple Test, iff either Ma
ax durationn or Max diischarge arre
reached before Endd voltage, then the ttest is regisstered as ““good”. If E
End
voltage is reached
d first, then
n the battery dischargge test is registered a as
“bad”.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 121

NOTE: Under Normal Test, battery discharge results are evaluated only if
the test is stopped by reaching End voltage. Results are discarded if a
test is terminated due to reaching Max duration or any other reasons
(such as manually stopping the test).
o Guard time – the number of hours that a battery test should be delayed
after a loss of AC input (mains) power. Check the Enable box to enable
this feature. Range: 0 - 1000
• Interval test – check the Enable box to enable interval (or scheduled) battery
discharge testing.
o Next start date [yyyy-mm-dd] – the date for the start of the next
scheduled battery discharge test
o Next start date [hh:mm] – the time for the start of the next scheduled
battery discharge test (24-hour clock format, HH:MM)
o Interval period – the number of days between scheduled battery
discharge tests
o Alternative interval test schedule – check the Enable box to invert the
Inhibit months schedule, inhibiting tests for the months that are not
checked in the Inhibit months box
o Inhibit months – check the Enable box to enable this feature, which
prevents battery discharge testing for the months that are selected in
the window below it (January – December); in a Windows environment,
hold the Control key of the keyboard to select multiple months. This
feature is useful for areas with hot summer months, where it would be
unwise to intentionally discharge batteries in elevated heat conditions.
• Automatic test – check the Enable box to enable battery discharge testing
after loss of ac input (mains) power.
NOTE: Data for an automatic test is recorded only if the End voltage is
reached.
• Discontinuance test – check this box to enable discontinuance testing,
which is used to detect unbalanced battery strings
NOTE: Discontinuance test is an advanced battery feature that is used to
detect defective or failed battery cells in unbalanced battery strings. It
requires at least two battery strings and a separate shunt in each string. The
Discontinuance test is not covered in this document.
o Repeat frequency – the number days between discontinuance tests
o Max duration – maximum duration (in minutes) of each discontinuance
test. Range: 1-10

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
122 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

NOTE: The
T Discontinuance testt uses t he Next sttart date [y
yyyy-mm-d
dd]
parametter from the Interval test sectio
on.
NOTE: The
T other battery
b sts have priority over the Discon
tes ntinuance ttest.
NOTE: Discontinua
D ance testin
ng does nott start if to
otal battery
y current is
s
less than
n 5% of the
e battery shunt
s value
e.

Control Systtem
The Con
ntrol Syste
em page is for configu
uring contrroller units and CAN N
Nodes.

Comm
munication
The Commmunication page is for setting
g communi cation prottocols for c
controllers
s
that sup
pport Mode
em Callbacck (like the Smartpac
ck2 Basic In
ndustrial).

Figure 4.30 – Control System

S – Co mmunication
n Page

NOTE: Eltek
E contrrollers are configured d for proprietary communicationn protocols
s.
Please contact
c Elttek if contrroller comm
munication s require re
econfigura
ation.
• Choose
C con
ntrol unit – drop-down
n list of controller units that can be
configured
• Communica
C ations portt – drop-down list of c
communica
ations portts on the
controller unit selecte
ed
NOTE:
N The following
f parameters
p s are only c
configurablle with an a
admin login
n.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 123

• Protocol – communication protocol for the controller; the selection in the

drop-down list depends on the communication ports available on the
controller (e.g., RS485 and RS232)
o pComm – Eltek’s proprietary communication protocol
o Modbus – protocol for communication using the RS485 port of a controller
unit
o Callback – Eltek’s proprietary protocol developed for communication
using the RS232 port of a controller unit with third-party modems
• Speed (bps) – bit rate of communication (bits per second)
• Data bits – the number of data bits in each character for the communication
protocol selected
• Stop bits – number of stop bits at the end of each character in the
communication protocol selected
• Parity – error-detection bits in the communication protocol selected
• Address – device address for the Modbus protocol only

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
124 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Modem CallBa
ack
The Mod
dem Callba
ack page is
s for config
guring a controller to dial an extternal or
remote modem.

Figure 4.31
1 – Control Sy
ystem – Mod
dem Callback
k Page (and IInterval Dialu
up Tab)

NOTE: The
T Modem m Callback feature onnly appearss in the We
eb Interface
e if a contrroller
that sup
pports moddem callback is conne ected. The
e Smartpac ck2 Basic In
ndustrial,
Smartpaack S, and SmartNode units currrently suppport mode em callbackk. Please se ee
the user guides fo
or those units to dete
ermine the proper connnections aand equipm ment
d.
required
• Modem
M Calllback setu
up
o Choose control
c unit– select a controlle
er module; o
only contro
ollers that
support Modem Caallback aree listed
o Enable modem
m callback– che
eck this box to enable
e the Mode
em Callbac
ck
feature
o Advance ed– button n to open a page for m
more advan nced modeem setup,
especially if a modem require es some lev
vel of customization. Admin log gin
is require
ed. It is nott normally necessary
n to reconfig
gure any fiields on thiis
page; it is
i intended d for advannced users only! Click
k the Back button to
return too the Mode em CallBac ck setup pa
age.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 125

Figurre 4.32 – Mod

dem Callback
k – Advanced
d Setup Page
e (admin only
y)

o Phone number X– numeric fie

eld to ente
er the phon
ne number of a modem
m to
dial
o Interval dialup– chheck this bo
ox to enabble dialing o
of the phonne number at
regular intervals (a
as defined under
u the IInterval Dialup tab att the botto
om
of the pa
age)
o Data– chheck this ra
adio button
n to enable
e data calling (for a data modem
m)
instead of
o SMS me essaging
o SMS– ch
heck this ra
adio buttonn to enable
e SMS messsaging (forr a GSM
modem) instead off data callin
ng
NOTE: Data and SM
MS are muttually exclu
usive optio
ons.
NOTE: SMS is only available iff a GSM mo
odem is enabled unde
er the GSM
M tab
ottom of th
at the bo he page.
• In
nterval Dia
alup (tab) – tab to con
nfigure inte
erval dialin
ng as a “hea
artbeat” sig
gnal
to
o the netw
work monito oring location

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
126 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.33 – Modem Callback – Interval Dialup Tab

NOTE: Phone numbers to be used for Interval Dialup must have their Interval
dialup box checked.
o Enable interval dialup– check this box to enable the Interval Dialup
feature
o Start time– enter the start time for the initial Interval Dialup call; the first
field is for the hour (24-hour clock), and the second field is for the minute
o Interval (hours)– enter the number of hours to pass between each
interval dialup. The maximum value is 8760 (one year).
o Site message– free-form field for a message to send with each interval
call. The full interval message also includes the Site Location name and
timestamp.
NOTE: The format for the interval dialup message is as follows:
[Site location]
[Date and time]
[Site message]
• Alarm Dialup (tab) – tab to configure dialing modem numbers when an alarm
is triggered

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 127

4.34 – Modem Callback – Alarm Dialup Tab

o Enable alarm dialup – check this box to enable the Alarm Dialup feature
o Number of dial attempts – number of times to dial the phone number if
connection fails
o Dial interval (sec) – wait time after dialing a phone number. If there is no
connection established, then the next number is dialed (if applicable)
o Alarm check interval (min) – time to wait before checking for a system
alarm. Longer polling times are recommended to avoid rejecting incoming
calls.
NOTE:Alarm groups must be mapped to the phone channels of the
controller in order to execute the Alarm Dialup feature. The phone
channels are found at the following location:
Alarm Conf. > Power System >Outputs > [Select Unit]
Select the appropriate controller unit to see the phone channels.
• GSM (tab) – tab for configuring dialing GSM modems, thereby enabling SMS
messaging

4.35 – Modem Callback – GSM Tab

o Enable GSM – check this box to enable the GSM modem feature

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
128 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

NOTE: If the modem has SIM lock enabled, do not enable the GSM feature
until after sending the SIM PIN code (REFERENCE BELOW)
o Sim facilities – box for configuring SIM security for the GSM modem
o SIM pin code – field for the SIM PIN code of the GSM modem
o Send pin code – button to send the SIM PIN code to the modem to enable
communication between the devices
NOTE: If the modem’s SIM card has SIM lock enabled, then the PIN must be
sent before enabling GSM functionality; otherwise the modem may lock,
preventing further communication until the modem is unlocked (which
cannot be done from the controller).
o Enable SIM lock – command to enable or disable the SIM lock feature of
the GSM modem. The PIN code must be sent first in order to change the
SIM lock status.
o Network status – box for indicating the signal strength of the radio link
and status of the network
o Signal strength – indicates the strength of the radio link
o Network status – indicates the network status, including the possible
cause of any communication problems

Outdoor
The Outdoor page is for configuring outdoor cabinet fan monitoring through an I/O
Monitor Type 1 or Type 3. This page only appears when an I/O Monitor Type 1 or
Type 3 is connected.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 129

4.36 - Control System

ms – Outdoorr Settings Pa
age and Fan C
Configuration Tab

• Outdoor
O setttings – se
elect the I/O Monitor (Type 1 or Type 3) to
o configure (I/O
unit X)
• Fan
F controll X (1 and 2)
2 – fan con
ntrol config
guration pa
anes for up
p to two
connected outdoor
o caabinet fans
s
o Inhibit “S ck this box to inhibit tthe
SpeedDev”” when Rellay X is acttive – chec
speed de eviation ala
arm monito or (SpeedDDev) when tthe FanControl X.Y
output relay (outpu ut relay 5 or
o 6) is actiivated
• Configurati
C ion – fan co
onfiguratio
on tab
o Fan conffiguration

■ Tempperature – column for temperatture valuess for the Lo

ow point an
nd
High point parameters

■ Speed – percen
ntage of the fan’s ope
erational sp
peed for th
he
temp
perature po
oints speciffied

■ Low point
p – low
w temperatture fan speed setting

■ High point – hig

gh tempera
ature fan speed setting

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
130 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

NOTE: By default, the fan speed for both temperature points is set at
50%. This feature uses the high and low points to create a linear slope
to adjust fan speed as temperatures increase and decrease.

■ Max fan speed – temperature in degrees Celsius at which the fan

should reach maximum speed. Check the Enable box to enable this
feature.

■ Temperature input – select the temperature input to use for this fan’s
speed control parameters
o Calibration – fan calibration tab; this function permits changing the
default voltage-to-speed relationship used to control fan speed. By
default, the low calibration point is configured to zero percent speed (0%)
being zero volts (0V); high calibration point is configured to 100 percent
speed (100%) being ten volts (10V).
In order to convert the fan speed (tachometer) inputs to the correct
percentage speed, the inputs must be configured with the number of
pulses per revolution (ppr) and the maximum fan speed (rpm), using the
Configuration tab of the alarm monitor input.

Figure 4.37 – Fan Control – Calibration Tab

■ Low calibration point (default: 0V = 0%)

□ Speed[%] – field to enter a percentage for speed control; click the

Enable button in order to edit the field. Default is zero (0%).

□ Voltage[V] – field to enter a voltage value for speed control; click

the Apply button to apply the voltage value entered. Default is
zero volts (0V).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 131

■ High calibration point (default: 10V = 100%)

□ Speed[%] – field to enter a percentage for speed control; click the

Enable button in order to edit the field. Default is 100%.

□ Voltage[V] – field to enter a voltage value for speed control; click

the Apply button to apply the voltage value entered. Default is ten
volts (10V).
o Pressure – internal pressure testing for outdoor cabinets to determine
whether or not fan filters need to be replaced. During the test, the I/O
Monitor increasing fan speed to 100% for ten seconds. If the pressure
sensor detects high pressure, an alarm is triggered.
REQUIREMENTS: A pressure sensor configured to send an alarm signal
above a certain air pressure threshold (in Pascals) is needed; it must be
connected to a programmable input of an I/O Monitor.

Figure 4.38 – Fan Control – Pressure Tab

■ Interval pressure Test – check the Enable box to enable a periodic

pressure test

□ Next start date – enter the date for the next test to start (format
YYYY-MM-DD); or use the calendar button next to the field

□ Next start time – enter the time in (hours and minutes; HH:MM, 24-
hour clock format) to begin the pressure test

□ Interval period – number of days between each pressure test

o Humidity – humidity reduction control; requires a temperature sensor,
humidity sensor, and heater (on I/O Monitor alarm relay output 1)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
132 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.39 – Fan Control – Humidity Tab

■ Humidity Reduction – check the Enable box to enable humidity

reduction control

□ Test mode – check the Enable box to enable test mode, which sets
the hours specified in the Time field to minutes (requires admin
login); this accelerates the normal operation to test the function of
the humidity control

□ Temperature – internal cabinet temperature (in degrees Celsius) at

which humidity control should terminate

□ Time – maximum run time (in hours) of the humidity reduction

control

Current Monitor
The Current Monitor page is for configuring Eltek Load Monitors, which have eight
configurable inputs for current monitoring. This page only appears if Eltek Load
Monitors are connected.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 133

Figure 4..40 – Currentt Monitor Co

onfiguration P
Page

• Unit
U to conffigure – list of Load Monitors
M de
etected by
y the system controller
(n
not configu
urable)
NOTE:
N Mon
nitors of the
e same typpe can appear on thiss list with d
different un
nit
names. For example, Eltek Load Monitors c can appearr as CurrMo onitor X an
nd
Load Monitoor X. The name
n listed
d in this co
olumn is the
e same as that of the e
Control
C Units Summary pane off the Contr ol System button (on n the Home e
page).
p
• Monitor
M typ
pe – drop-d
down list off current m
monitor types:
o StdLoaddmon – Standard Load d Monitor, intended ffor load bra anch circuitts
where thhe current only needs s to be monitored and d not usedd for any
calculatiions (like to
otal load cu
urrent); thiis is useful for fuse an
nd circuit
breaker shunts
A Load Monitor
M con
nfigured as mon appears as LoadPrimary X at
s StdLoadm
Alarm Conf.
C > Powwer Systemm > Load
NOTE: Load
L Monito
ors set for StdLoadm mon (load branch curre
ent)
monitoring must ha st IDs in th e CAN bus chain.
ave the firs
o Load CurMon – Loa ad Current Monitor, inntended for load shun nts that ne
eed
to be summed for total
t load current
c callculations; this is useful for shunts
located in load bay
ys or other major distrribution po
oints where e load curreent
branches off of a main
m powerr bus.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
134 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

A Load Monitor configured as Load CurMonappears as LoadCurMon X at

Alarm Conf. > Power System > Load
o Rect CurMon– Rectifier Current Monitor, intended for monitoring shunts
on the output of non-Eltek rectifier bays or ferroresonant rectifiers. Eltek
rectifiers communicate output current directly to the controller and do
not need auxiliary shunts.
A Load Monitor configured as RectCurMon appears as RectCurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System > Rectifiers
o DCDC CurMon – Dc-to-dc converter current monitor, intended for
monitoring current from non-Eltek dc-to-dc converters. Eltek dc-to-dc
converters communicate output current directly to the controller and do
not need auxiliary monitoring.
A Load Monitor configured as DCDC CurMon appears as DCDCCurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System >DcDc Converter
o Solar CurMon – Solar charger current monitor, intended for monitoring
current from non-Eltek solar chargers. Eltek solar chargers communicate
output current directly to the controller and do not need auxiliary
monitoring.
A Load Monitor configured as Solar CurMon appears as Solar CurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System > Solar Charger
o Wind CurMon – Wind charger current monitor
A Load Monitor configured as Wind CurMon appears as Wind CurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System > Wind Charger
o FuelC CurMon – Fuel cell charger current monitor
A Load Monitor configured as FuelCCurMon appears as FuelCCurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System >FuelCell Charger
• System type – unit classification data (hardcoded)
• System index – controller data; do not modify
• Unit index – controller data; do not modify
• Sub system – controller data; do not modify
• Unit name – free-form field where the current monitor can be renamed. The
name entered here affects how the monitor appears under the respective
Alarm Configuration section (Alarm Conf. > Load)
• Control unit index – the unit’s index number relative to all other units on the
CAN bus. The index range for Load Monitors is 49 – 62.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 135

Flexi Monitor
The Flexi Monitor page is for configuring Eltek Flexi Monitors, which have 16
configurable input channels for monitoring a variety of inputs, including current,
voltage, temperature, and relays.

Figure 4.41 – Flexi Monitor Configuration Page

• Unit to configure – list of Flexi Monitors detected by the system controller

(not configurable)
• Monitor type – drop-down list of current monitor types:
o StdFleximon – Standard Flexi Monitor, intended for load branch circuits
where the current only needs to be monitored and not used for any
calculations (like total load current); this is useful for fuse and circuit
breaker shunts
A Flexi Monitor configured as StdFleximon appears as ContrFlexMon X at
Alarm Conf. > Power System >Inputs
NOTE: Flexi Monitors set for StdFleximon (load branch current) monitoring
must have the first IDs in the CAN bus chain.
o BatteryFleximon – Battery Flexi Monitor, intended for battery shunts that
are to be summed for total load current calculations
A Flexi Monitor configured as BatteryFleximon appears as BattFlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >Battery

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
136 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

o Load Fleximon – Load Flexi Monitor, intended for load shunts that need to
be summed for total load current calculations; this is useful for shunts
located in load bays or other major distribution points where load current
branches off of a main power bus.
A Flexi Monitor configured as LoadFleximon appears as Load FlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >Load
o RectFleximon – Rectifier Flexi Monitor, intended for monitoring shunts on
the output of non-Eltek rectifier bays or ferroresonant rectifiers. Eltek
rectifiers communicate output current directly to the controller and do
not need auxiliary shunts.
A Flexi Monitor configured as RectFleximon appears as RectFlexMon X at
Alarm Conf. > Power System >Rectifiers
o DCDC Fleximon – Dc-to-dc converter current monitor, intended for
monitoring current from non-Eltek dc-to-dc converters. Eltek dc-to-dc
converters communicate output current directly to the controller and do
not need auxiliary monitoring.
A Flexi Monitor configured as DCDCFleximon appears as DCDC FlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >DcDc Converter
o Solar Fleximon – Solar charger current monitor, intended for monitoring
current from non-Eltek solar chargers. Eltek solar chargers communicate
output current directly to the controller and do not need auxiliary
monitoring.
A Flexi Monitor configured as SolarFleximon appears as Solar FlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >Solar Charger
o Wind Fleximon – Wind charger current monitor
A Flexi Monitor configured as Wind Fleximon appears as Wind FlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System > Wind Charger
o FuelCFleximon – Fuel cell charger current monitor
A Flexi Monitor configured as FuelCFleximon appears as FuelCFlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >FuelCell Charger
• System type – unit classification data (hardcoded)
• System index – controller data; do not modify
• Unit index – controller data; do not modify
• Sub system – controller data; do not modify

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 137

• Unit name – free-form field where the Flexi Monitor can be renamed. The
name entered here affects how the monitor appears under Alarm Conf. >
Load
• Control unit index – the unit’s index number relative to all other units on the
CAN bus. The index range for Flexi Monitors is 65 – 78.

Data Log
The Data Log page is for configuring data logging parameters for supported
controller and monitoring units.

Figure 4.42 – Data Log Configuration Page

NOTE: Changing parameters on this page for the primary controller (e.g.,
Smartpack2 Master or Smartpack S) affects how data points are displayed on the
System History graph of the Home page.
• Select Unit – drop-down list of controller and monitoring units connected to
the system that support data logging
• Normal log interval – time interval (in minutes) between system data capture
when the controller is in Normal condition (i.e., not in critical condition)
• Critical log interval – time interval (in minutes) between system data capture
when the controller is in Critical condition (which indicates that there is low
ac current (mains) and/or low battery current)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
138 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

• Enable average values – check the Enable box to enable averaging, which
provides an average value for each 10 minute interval rather than an
instantaneous reading
• Enable minor/major On-event triggered – check the Enable box to enable
event-triggered logging, where data is captured when minor and major alarm
events occur
• Log if any value changes more than – percentage change of any value to
trigger data capture; enter zero (0) to disable this feature

License Keys
The License Keys page is intended for future implementation, where extended or
specialized controller features will be made accessible by license from Eltek; admin
permissions are required to view and modify this page.

Device Settings
The Device Settings section contains configurable parameters for the controller
device itself—particularly time, network, and user account settings.

Time Settings
The Time Settings page is for manually configuring the controller’s date and time
clocks.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 139

Figure 4.43 – Time Settings Configuration Page

• Time [hh:mm] – current time, 24-hour clock format

• Date [yyyy-mm-dd] – current date
• Enable time server connection – Check the Enable box to enable automatic
time updates from a local network server; this box is the same as the Enable
time server connection box on the Timeserver page
NOTE: Further configuration is required under the Timeserver page under
Network Settings (a link is provided on the Time Settings page)

Network Settings
The Network Settings page is for setting controller parameters for use on a
computer network.
NOTE: Network settings require specific information about the network to which
the controller is to be connected. The local network/systems administrator should
be consulted for the required information.
NOTE: Admin login is required to make any changes to Network Settings.

TCP/IP
The TCP/IP page is for configuring the controller’s TCP/IP settings.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
140 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.44 – TCP/IP Setup Page (DHCP Enabled)

• TCP/IP Setup
o DHCP – check the Enable box to enable automatic IP configuration by the
local network (if the network supports DHCP). If not enabled, then IP
settings must be configured manually.
NOTE: By default, Eltek controllers are shipped with a static IP address of
192.168.10.20.
• Manual settings
NOTE: Manual configuration of the controller’s IP settings must be
appropriate for the network to which it is connected. The local
network/systems administrator should be consulted for correct
configuration.
o Agent IP Address – IPv4 address to assign to the controller
o Network Subnet Mask – field for the subnet mask
o Default Gateway – field for the default gateway (if required)
o DNS Server – field to specify a DNS server
o Device Name – free-form field to name the controller (this name appears
in the Name field of the controller when it appears in the Eltek Network
Utility)
NOTE: This is different from the Site field on the System Info page.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 141

o Force SSL protocol – check the Enable box to force connection through
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol; if left unchecked, SSL connection is
an option on the Login page
CAUTION: Checking the Enable box and saving the change immediately
ends the current session and returns the web interface to the Login page.
NOTE: To fully implement the Force SSL protocol option, it is necessary to
login once using the SSL connection. To do so, click on the Switch to SSL
link, and then log into the web interface by clicking on the SSL Login link.
Only afterward will the Switch to non-SSL link disappear from the SSL
Login page, requiring the use of the SSL Login link.

eMail
The eMail Page is for configuring the controller to send e-mail notifications to up to
two e-mail addresses using a local SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) network
server.

Figure 4.45 – E-mail Configuration Page

• Mail Server Setup – setup section for SMTP parameters

o SMTP User Name – field for a user name to access the mail server
o SMTP Password – field for a password to access the mail server

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
142 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

NOTE: Alarm messages from the controller do not currently include the
User Name and Password; therefore, if the SMTP server requires
authentication, it may block Alarm messages from being delivered.
o SMTP Server ip-Address – IP address of the SMTP server to be used for e-
mail transmission
TIP: Ping the network to find the email server’s IP address.
o Sender e-mail Address – e-mail address for the controller to use as a
sender (can be fictitious)
• Receiver Mail X (1 & 2)
o Receiver E-mail Address X – e-mail address that are to receive alarm and
interval e-mail messages from the controller
o Receive alarms – check this box to send alarm notices to the receiver e-
mail address
o Receive interval mail – check this box to send interval messages to the
receiver e-mail address
• Alarm E-Mail Settings
NOTE: Alarm messages from the controller do not currently include the
User Name and Password; therefore, if the SMTP server requires
authentication, it may block Alarm messages from being delivered.
o Alarm mail Subject – subject line text for alarm e-mail messages sent by
the controller
o Send Off Alarm – check this box to enable sending a notice when an alarm
turns off (is no longer active)
• Interval E-Mail Settings
o Interval Subject – subject line text for interval e-mail messages sent by
the controller
o Interval Attachment – name for the data file attached to the interval e-
mail address
NOTE: The data file sent as an attachment is a comma-separated values
(CSV) file with semi-colons as delimiters.
o Interval period (min) – time period (in minutes) between interval e-mail
messages
o Interval start time – time of day to begin sending interval e-mail
messages (24-hour format, HH:MM)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 143

Timeserver
The Timeserver page is for setting up a connection to a time server (NTP server).

Figure 4.46 – Timeserver Configuration Page

• Enable time server connection – Check the Enable box to enable automatic
time updates from a local network server; this box is the same as the Enable
time server connection box on the Time Settings page
• Clock synchronization Time-of-day – hour of the day to synchronize with the
time server (24-hour clock format, HH)
• UTC Time zone Offset (+-12h) – time zone setting, using UTC offset (whole
number of hours)
• NTP Server IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) – IP address of NTP (Network Time
Protocol) server to use
• Test connection – button to test connectivity with the NTP server; the result
appears to the right of the button

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
144 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Online Help
The Online Help page is provided to update the location of the online help file (from
Eltek).

Figure 4.47 – Online Help Configuration Page

CAUTION: Do not change this field without consulting Eltek first. This field directly
affects the link for the Help button in the top menu bar.
• Online Help IP Address/URL – field for the location of Eltek’s Online Help File

SNMP Settings
The SNMP Settings page is for configuring the controller for interface with a
network that utilizes Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
NOTE: SNMP settings are for establishing the Eltek controller as an object on an
existing network. Any other details regarding the network, NMS, or SNMP
configuration for the installation site must be obtained from local network/systems
administration (IT) and associated documentation. This includes the SNMP version,
network settings, security protocols, and community strings.
NOTE: Admin login is required to make any changes to SNMP Settings.

Configurations
The Configuration page provides general parameters for use with SNMP.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 145

Figure 4.48 – SNMP Settings Page (SNMP-based configuration)

• General SNMP Configuration

o Inhibit Traps – This feature is used in conjunction with the Block Outputs
command, which is intended for use during system service to prevent
false alarms from being transmitted. Enabling the Inhibit Traps field when
Block Outputs On is enabled prevents traps from being sent on the
network.
NOTE: The Block Outputs command times out if there is no user activity.
This command is only available through the display panel menu.
Main Menu > Commands > Block Outputs On
o Send Off Traps – Enabling this field sends a trap when an event or alarm
returns to normal status (i.e., when the alarm or notice turns "off").
o Trap Repeat Rate (minutes) – Interval in minutes of how frequently a trap
message should be sent when an event or alarm is in active status. Enter
the number zero ("0") to disable.
o Heartbeat Trap Repeat Rate (minutes) – Interval in minutes of how
frequently a heartbeat trap (signal) should be sent. Enter the number
zero ("0") to disable.
NOTE: Configuration options are available for SNMP v3, SNMP v1, and
SNMP v2c. Configure the appropriate settings for the SNMP version of
the network.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
146 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

• SNMP
S v3 Co
onfiguratio
on– configu
uration sec
ction for SN
NMPv3
o Web-bas sed configuuration – click
c this ra
adio button
n to configu
ure SNMP
through the controoller’s web interface. This optioon removes s the “admiin”
user’s MIB write access.
o SNMP-ba ased configuration – click this rradio butto
on to permit
configurration throu
ugh an SNM MP manage ement app plication ratther than tthe
controlle
er’s web intterface. Se
electing th
his option resets the S SNMP v3
configurration and reboots
r the controlle
er.
CAUTION N: Selectinng SNMP-b based conffiguration rresets web
b-based
configurration information! Th
his reset ca
annot be reeversed!
By defauult, the con
ntroller is set to SNMPP-based coonfiguratio on, which
means that an SNM MP manage ement appplication willl be used tto configurre
the conttroller's SNMP setting gs rather th
han the controller's wweb interfa ace.
Where permissible,, a Web-based config guration option is available to
configurre the conttroller's SNM
MP settinggs through the web innterface.
When the radio buttton is sele menus appear on the left
ected, the ffollowing m
menu baar:
USM Use
ers
Vacm Ac
ccess
V1/V2 Community
C y
Traps

Fig
gure 4.49 – SNMP
S Setting
gs Page (Web
b-based conffiguration)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 147

The follo
owing table illustrate
es the orde
er in which each page
e should be
e completed for
each ve
ersion of SN
NMP:
Table 4..3 - Web-Base
ed Configura
ation Page O
Order

o Reset SNNMP v3 default configurationss – This buttton resets s the defauult

SNMP co onfiguration. It is esp
pecially useeful if some
e condition n has resultted
in the NM
MS being blocked
b outt of the con
ntroller—iff, for instan
nce, all the
USM use ers were ac
ccidentally deleted.
CAUTION N: As with any "Reseet" configurration commmand, all c
customized d
settings are lost when
w execu
uted. Addittionally, the
e controlle
er reboots
when this comman nd is executed.

Fig
gure 4.50 – SNMPv3
S Rese
et Warning

NOTE: The
T following pages only
o appea
ar if Web-ba
ased configuration is
s selected
under SNMP v3 Co
onfiguratio
on:

USM Users
U
The USMM Users pa age is for se
etting up and
a configu uring user a
accounts (User-based d
Security
y Model). ByB default, the first fo
our accounnts (1-4) are set for sttandard SN
NMP
v3 userss. Accountts 5 and 6 are set forr SNMP v2c c and SNMP P v1 netwo orks,
respecttively. All user
u accoun nts can be modified.
NOTE: The
T precon nfigured SN
NMP v3 use er accountts can be edited, but only the
Authenttication and Privacy protocols
p and
a passph hrases can be change ed for the
accountts. The pre
econfiguredd SNMP v2 2c/v1 accoounts can oonly be view
wed, not
edited.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
148 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.51 – USM Users Page

• # - User account number

• User Name – User name for each account
• Authentication Protocol – SNMPv3 authentication protocols (MD5, SHA1); a
passphrase field is available in setup
• Privacy Protocol – SNMPv3 privacy protocols (DES, AES); a passphrase field is
available in setup
• Security Group – security level for the user. The following levels are
available for the SNMP versions:

Table 4.4 – Security Groups for SNMP Versions

SNMP Version Security Group Description

SNMP v3 admin-group Admin access (level 3)

SNMP v3 readwrite-group Control access (level 2)

SNMP v3 readonly-group Status access (level 1)

SNMP v2c snmpv2c-group SNMP v2c support only

SNMP v1/v2c snmpv12c SNMP v2c and SNMP v1 support

SNMP v1 snmpv1-group SNMP v1 support only

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 149

• Delete
D – Click the Dele
ete button
n to delete the user account row
w.
CAUTION:
C The
T preconfigured acc counts can n be delete
ed! Deletio
ons of
preconfigur
p red accounnts can only
y be reverssed by reseetting the S
SNMP v3
default configurations
s, which can be done either by sselecting thhe SNMP-
based
b confiiguration button or cllicking the Reset SNMMP v3 default
configuratio
ons buttonn on the Configuration n page.
• Edit
E – click the
t Edit buutton to ed
dit an SNMP P v3 user a
account row w (SNMP vv2c
and SNMP v1 v accountts cannot be
b edited); click the VView button n to view and
SNMP
S v2c or
o SNMP v11 user accoount; click tthe New buutton to crreate a new
w
account (ma aximum off 10 accoun
nts)
Edit/View SNMP
S User profile Winndows (onlly Authenttication and
d Privacy
protocols
p an
nd passphrrases for SNMP
S v3 caan be edite
ed)

Figure 4.52
2 – SNMP Acc
counts – Editt and View W
Windows

• New
N – Click
k the New button
b to create
c a ne
ew user acc
count.
o Select Security
S Mo
odel – select SNMP ve
ersion v3, v
v2c, or v1; click the
Continuee… button to proceedd
NOTE: TheT SNMP version
v can
nnot be cha anged onc ce the Conttinue… buttton
is clicked
d. If the veersion need
ds to be changed, clo ose the SNM MP User
profile window
w witthout savin
ng; then, cliick the Neww button to start ove
er.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
150 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.53 – New SNMP User Profile Window

o SNMP v3 User Profile Configuration

■ USM User Name – free-form text field for entering a user name

■ Security Group – security level to assign to the user

The default SNMP v3 user names reflect the three security levels of
Eltek controllers: admin (Administrator), control, and status.
o Authentication and Privacy

■ Security Level – currently, Authentication and Privacy (AuthPriv) is the

only available security level for SNMP v3, so this parameter cannot be
changed.

■ Auth protocol – authentication protocol to use: MD5 or SHA1

■ Auth passphrase – passphrase for authentication (required)

■ Priv protocol – privacy protocol to use: DES or AES

■ Priv passphrase – passphrase for privacy (required)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration
C n 151

Figure 4.54 – SNMPv3 Us

ser Profile Co
onfiguration
n Window

o SNMP v1
1/v2c

■ USM User Name

e – free-form text fie
eld for ente
ering a userr name

■ Security Group – security

y level to asssign to the user
o Commun nity String
gs – list of Community
C y Names associated with the us ser
profile; all
a Commun nity Names s configure
ed for the u
user profile
e on the
V1/V2 Community
C y page app pear here

■ Comm munity Name 1 –one Communitty Name can be conffigured durring

the fiirst setup of
o the SNM
MP User pro ofile. This Communitty Name an nd
moree are configgurable on the V1/V2 2 Communiity page; th hey cannott be
edite
ed from the e SNMP Use er profile w
window aftter first settup.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
152 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.55 – SNMPv1/v2c User Profile Configuration Window

Vacm Access
The Vacm Access page is for setting view access administration, where read, write,
and notify permissions are defined for security groups.

Figure 4.56 – Vacm Access Configuration Page

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 153

• # - security group row number

• Security Group Name – name of the security group (same as Security Group
in the User Profile Configuration windows of the USM Users page)
• Security Model – SNMP security model version (3, 2, or 1)
• Security Level – security level, reflecting the three security levels of Eltek
controllers (1=status, 2=control, 3=admin)
• Read View – access level for read permissions
• Write View – access level for write permissions (level 3 security only)
• Notify View – access level for notifications
• Edit – click the Edit button to edit the Read View, Write View, and Notify
View columns of the security group row

V1/V2 Community
The V1/V2 Community Page is for configuring SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c community
strings.

Figure 4.57 – V1/V2 Community Configuration Page

• # - community string number

• Community Name – name of community string for SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c
authentication; once the initial setup of a community string is complete, only

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
154 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

the Community Name is editable. After configuration, the Community Name

appears on the Community Strings list of the associated User Name.
• User Name – user name to which the Community Name is assigned; user
names must be set up on the USM Users page before they can be assigned
on the V1/V2 Community page.
• Trap Format – SNMP trap format, determined by the Security Model selected
during setup of the community string
• Delete – button for deleting the community string row
• Edit – click the Edit button to edit the Community Name field (no other fields
are editable after setup); click the New button to add another community
string.
o SNMP Community String – window for configuring a new community
string (SNMP v1/v2C)

■ MP Model – select the appropriate SNMP version for the community

string (either v2c or v1; changes to Security Model on the following
page)

Figure 4.58 – SNMP Security Model Selection Window

■ User Name – select one of the SNMP v2c or SNMP v1 user names
(which come from the USM Users page)

■ Community Name – enter a name for the community string

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 155

Figure 4.59 – SNMP Community String Configuration

Traps
The Traps page is for configuring IP addresses of trap receivers (hosts) for traps
sent by the Eltek controller. By default several rows are set up as examples for
each SNMP version with IP address 127.0.0.1 (localhost). All rows can be deleted
and/or edited.

Figure 4.60 – Traps Configuration Page

• # - trap receiver number

• IP Address – target IP address of the trap host to receive trap messages
from the controller
• Port Number – target port number of the trap receiver

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
156 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

• SNMP Version – SNMP version of the trap host (v3, v2c, or 1)

• Trap Community – community string for the trap, which comes from
Community Name strings set on the V1/V2 Community page; this field only
applies to SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c.
• USM User name – user name from the USM Users page; only applies to SNMP
v3 (since v3 has no community strings).
• Delete – click the Delete button to delete the trap receiver
• Edit Row – click the Edit Row button to edit the trap receiver row (only the
SNMP version cannot be edited); click the New Row button to add another
trap receiver.
o SNMP Trap Receiver Configuration – window for creating and editing trap
receivers (hosts)
o SNMP v3

■ Trap profile configuration

□ MP Model – SNMP version (not editable after initial configuration);

during initial configuration, select the appropriate SNMP version
and click the Continue… button.

Figure 4.61 – SNMP Trap Model Selection (SNMPv3)

□ Target IP Address – field for the receiver’s IPv4 address

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 157

□ Target IP Port – field for the receiver’s IP port

■ Select USM User

□ User Name– For SNMP v3 only, select the user name (which comes
from the USM Users page)

Figure 4.62 – SNMP Trap Receiver Configuration (SNMPv3)

o SNMP v1/v2c

■ Trap profile configuration

□ MP Model – SNMP version (not editable after initial configuration);

during initial configuration, select the appropriate SNMP version
and click the Continue… button.

□ Target IP Address – field for the receiver’s IPv4 address

□ Target IP Port – field for the receiver’s IP port

■ Select Community String

□ Community Name – For SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c, select the

community string (which comes from the V1/V2 Community page)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
158 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figu
ure 4.63 – SN
NMP Trap Re
eceiver Config
guration (SN
NMPv1/v2c)

User Accoun
nts
The Use
er Accountts page is for
f adding and
a modify ying user accounts. TThe main U
User
Accounts page provides infoormation on
n the curre
ent user an
nd allows changing th
he
password.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 159

Figure 4.64 – User Accounts Configuration Page

NOTE: Admin login is required to make any changes to User Account settings,
except for the current user’s password.
• User Accounts
o Current User Name – field that identifies the current user (not editable)
o Access Level - field that identifies the current user’s access level (not
editable)
• Change Password
o Enter current – field for the current password
o Enter new – field for a new password
o Re-enter new – second field for verifying the new password (must be the
same as the Enter new field)
• Edit Accounts – click the Edit Accounts button to open the Global Account
Settings page

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
160 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 4.65 – Edit Accounts Page (Admin only)

NOTE: This section is only accessible with admin rights.

o Global Account Settings – password settings section

■ Password is required – check this box to require passwords for all

accounts

■ Username and Password must be different – check this box to force

user names and passwords to be different

■ Password must be different from the 5 previous – check this box to

remember the five previous passwords for each user and ensure that
new passwords are different

■ Password minimum length – enter a value for the minimum character

length of passwords

■ Retries before suspension – enter a value for the number of

unsuccessful login attempts before the user account is temporarily
suspended (time determined by the User suspension time field)

■ User suspension time[Min] – enter a value (in minutes) for the time
that a user must wait after account suspension before attempting to
log in again

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
System Configuration 161

o User Account Administration – user account section; up to ten user

accounts can be configured; by default, the first three accounts are
configured (admin, control, status)

■ # - user account number

■ User Name – free-form field for user names

■ Password – password field

■ Access level – access level number:

1 = read-only (status)
2 = read-write (control)
3 = admin (administrator)

■ Max users – field to specify the maximum number of users that can be
logged in simultaneously

■ Idle Timeout [min] – time in minutes after which the controller

automatically logs out an idle user

■ Max Lifetime [days] – field for the maximum lifetime of the user
account; useful for providing temporary access. Enter zero (0) to
disable this function.

■ Delete/Enable – click the Delete button to delete the user account

row; click the Enable button to enable and configure a user account
row
CAUTION: The preconfigured user accounts can be deleted!
o Back – click the Back button to return to the main User Accounts page
o Show Active Sessions – click this button to see the Active Sessions
window, which lists the users that are currently logged in

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
162 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

5. Alarm
A Configuration
Alarm monitors
m are configure
ed under th
he Alarm C
Conf. categ
gory.

Alarm monitors
m me easure inteernal and external
e inp
put signalss and logicaal states.
When ann alarm mo onitor is enabled, it co
ompares th he parametter measurrement witth
pre-prog
grammed thresholds
t and raisess an alarm iin the even
nt a threshhold is
exceedeed. Alarm events are e stored in the Event Log. If con nfigured, ann alarm outtput
group (A
AOG) is acttivated to send
s an alaarm signal tto an exterrnal receiver.
There are four typ
pes of alarm
m monitors
s:
• Analog
A – me
easured va
alue (like vo
oltage or c urrent)
• Numeric
N – sum,
s count, or calcula
ation (like tthe numberr of ac phases, rectifiiers,
or other pow
wer modulees)
• Logical – sta
ate of relay
ys, form-C contacts, or logical c
combinatio
ons of alarm
m
states (e.g.,, Boolean algebra)
a
• LVD – a spe
ecial event--based mon
nitor that o
opens a low
w-voltage d
disconnectt
(L
LVD) conta
actor
NOTE: The
T status of each ala
arm monito
or appearss on the Ho
ome page u
under its
respecttive catego
ory.
NOTE: Alarm
A page
es and dev
vices appeaaring betweeen bracke ets indicate
e that they
y
only app
pear when the associated devic
ce or input is connectted to the s
system. Foor
examplee:
• [S
Solar]– only appears if solar cha
argers are present in the system
m
• [D
DCDC CurM Mon X]– only appears
s if a Load M
Monitor is a
assigned to
o measure
current from
m dc-to-dc converters
On each
h alarm con nfiguration page, alarm monitors are group ped by con ntroller,
categorry group, orr CAN Nodee sections.. As of the
e date of th he major
his guide, th
submennus are:
• Mains
M
• Generator
G
• Rectifiers
R
• [S
Solar]
• [D
DcDc Converter]

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 163

• [W
Wind Charg
ger]
• [F
FuelCell Ch
harger]
• Load
• Battery
B
• In
nputs
• Outputs
O
• Control
C System

Figure 5.1
1 – Alarm Con
nfiguration Menu
M (withou
ut alternativ
ve energy sou
urces)

Alarm
m Mon
nitors Edit
E Wiindowss
All alarm
m monitors
s share com
mmon conffiguration w
windows.

Figure 5.2 – Alarm Monittor Rows

On each
h configuraation page, alarm mon
nitors have
e unique rows under ttheir
subsecttion headin
ngs:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
164 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

• Alarm Monitor Row – alarm monitors are grouped under their respective
categories and devices (where applicable)
o # - row number
o Edit – edit icon; click to open the Edit window to configure the alarm
monitor
o Description – free-form field for the alarm monitor description
o Enable – check this box to enable the alarm monitor
o Status – indicates the status of the alarm monitor: disabled, OK, Minor
alarm, or Major alarm (see Table 2.1 - Alarm Icon Table)

General Alarm Monitor Window (not LVD)

Clicking on the Edit icon of the alarm monitor row brings up the Edit Window, which
is the same for all alarm monitors except those for LVDs (LVBD and LVLD).

Figure 5.3 – Alarm Edit Window Example (MainsVolt X)

General
Appears as the first tab if there are additional pages of configurations (e.g., Scale,
Calibration, and Configuration); otherwise, only the page with its fields appears
(without the General tab or any other tabs)
• Description | Value | Unit
o Alarm Monitor – check the Enable box to enable this alarm monitor

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 165

o Manual reset – select option (Disabled, All Levels, Major High only) from
the drop-down list to indicate whether the alarm is permitted to be reset
manually—when a Reset Alarms command is executed (button is on the
Commands page)

■ Disabled – the monitor alarm cannot be manually reset (only resets

automatically—when the alarm condition is no longer true)

■ All Levels – the monitor alarm must be manually reset when triggered
by any assigned alarm event

■ Major High only – the monitor alarm must be reset manually when the
alarm is generated by a Major High alarm event. It is reset
automatically if triggered by any other assigned alarm event.
o Hysteresis–buffer on either side of the alarm threshold values (higher and
lower) in the unit of the alarm parameter (e.g., volts or amps). If the alarm
is activated, Hysteresis keeps the alarm active even if the measured
value changes slightly within the buffer range specified. This feature
prevents rapid ON/OFF switching of the alarm if the measured value is
changing rapidly.
o Time delay – drop-down list of time delay options (in seconds and
minutes) before activating and deactivating the alarm if the thresholds
are exceeded.
o Monitor Description – free-form field for a description of the alarm
monitor
• Event | [Value] | Alarm Group
o Event – the name for the specific event to activate when the alarm is
activated. Events are logged in the Event Log.
NOTE: Pre-configured alarm events cannot be changed; the drop-down
list is grayed out to prevent assigning a different event.
NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.
o [Value] – threshold value at which an alarm should be raised; this field is
available for Analog (measured) and Numeric (counted) alarm monitors
only; Logical alarm monitors trigger an alarm based on an alarm event
rather than a numeric threshold.
Possible units: Volts, Amps, kOhm, Degrees (Fahrenheit or Celcius), Unit(s)
(for Numeric count)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
166 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

o Alarm Group – controller alarm group assigned to report the alarm. Alarm
groups can be assigned to specific output relays of controllers and
monitors that are so equipped.
The status of all active alarm groups can be found in the Active Alarm
Overview window on the Home Page (click on the Event Status and
System Mode pane).
NOTE: There are at least 20 alarm groups available for each controller,
with the first eight pre-configured, ten for custom configuration (Alarm
Group XX), and two or three alarm groups configured for LVDs (depending
on the number of contactor relay controls available through the
controller). Pre-configured alarm groups differ by system and, in some
cases, by customer requirements.

■ Events:

□ Error – activate an error

□ Minor Alarm – activate a minor alarm

□ Major Alarm – activate a major alarm

□ Major Low – activate a Major Low alarm

□ Minor Low – activate a Minor Low alarm

□ Major High – activate a Major High alarm

□ Minor High – activate a Minor High alarm

□ Event – activate a generic alarm event. This is useful for

inconsequential alarm triggers, like Virtual Inputs.

□ Critical – activate a Critical condition. By default, Critical is a

condition where the power system is on battery power only (i.e.,
primary power sources are offline)

□ Warning – activate an alarm warning. A warning indicates that an

abnormal situation is present; related to a minor alarm

□ Battery Test – activate a battery test

NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.

□ Boost – activate battery boost

NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 167

□ System Shutdown – trigger a system shutdown

NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.

□ Reset no of Modules – reset the number of modules (both power

and controller units)

□ Rect Current limit – activate rectifier current limit

□ Batt Current limit – activate battery charge current limit

□ Temp Comp – activating temperature compensation

NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.

□ Boost Inhibit – inhibit (block) battery boost charging

□ Block Outputs – alarm output relays are blocked for maintenance

purposes; this command is only available through the display panel

□ Generator – activate a generator (if connected)

NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.

□ Emergency – active Emergency voltage (if configured); the

rectifiers drop to Emergency voltage

□ Test Inhibit – inhibit (block) battery tests

□ Equalize – activate battery equalize charging

NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.

□ Equalize Inhibit– inhibit (block) battery equalize charging

□ Silence buzzer – activate a buzzer silence command

□ Earthfault Inhibit – inhibit (block) earth (ground) fault detection

□ Inverters Shutdown – activate shutdown of inverters (if applicable)

■ Alarm Groups - Alarm groups are software assignments for grouping

alarms together, which can then be mapped to output alarm channels
of controllers and/or CAN nodes. Alarm groups (including names) and
output mapping are user-definable. Currently, there are 24 alarm
groups available: 18 for output relays and 6 for low-voltage
disconnect (LVD) contactors. Alarm events can be assigned to None
(no alarm group).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
168 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Config (Configuration)
The Configuration tab is for alarm monitors with programmable inputs (e.g., fuse
monitors, relay monitors, temperature probes).

Figure 5.4 – Configuration Tab Example (Flexi Monitor – ProgInput X.Y)

NOTE: The following list of configuration options is exhaustive; available options

differ by controller and CAN Node.
• Normally Open – alarm is monitoring a normally-open relay contact
• Normally Closed – alarm is monitoring a normally-closed relay contact
• Diode Matrix – alarm is monitoring a diode matrix
• Clock Input – alarm is receiving a clock signal
• Voltage – alarm is monitoring a voltage input
• 4-20mA – alarm is monitoring current between 4 and 20 mA
• Temperature – alarm is monitoring a temperature probe input
• Current – alarm is monitoring current
• Fan Speed – alarm is monitoring fan speed
• Fuse-NO – alarm is monitoring a fuse with a normally-open relay contact
(scaling available)
• Fuse-NC – alarm is monitoring a fuse with a normally-closed relay contact
(scaling available)
• Fuse-DM – alarm is monitoring a fuse with a diode matrix (scaling available)
• Outdoor temp 1 / Outdoor temp 2 – alarm is monitoring a temperature probe
input from an outdoor cabinet
• Battery temp – alarm is monitoring a temperature probe from batteries
• Rectifier temp – alarm is monitoring a temperature probe from rectifiers

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 169

Fan Config
The Fan Configuration tab appears for configuring fan speed monitoring in outdoor
cabinet applications.
NOTE: The Fan Config tab is available only for I/O Monitor Type 1, I/O Monitor Type
3, and Flexi Monitor.

Figure 5.5 – Fan Config Tab Example

• Max fan speed – enter the maximum rotations per minute (rpm) from the fan
specifications
• Pulses/revolution – enter the maximum pulses per revolution (ppr) from the
fan specifications
NOTE: Both fan parameters are required in order to convert the signal
frequency from the fan speed inputs to accurate speed percentages.

Calibration
Appears when using inputs for current, voltage, or temperature, aiding improved
accuracy of input values if they are significantly different from measured values.
CAUTION: Calibration should only be used when the accuracy of the input value is
proved to be significantly off the measured value. It should not be used as part of
an installation procedure. Manufacturer values and proper calibration equipment
(e.g., an accurate multimeter) must be available in order to calibrate the input
values accurately. Improper calibration can cascade inaccuracy to all controller
calculations and functions that use the input value.
NOTE: Calibrating for current measured by a shunt requires entering the shunt
ratings under the Scale tab.
NOTE: If measuring battery discharge, enter negative values for current.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
170 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 5.6 – Calibration Tab Example (OutDoor Temp XX.Y)

• Low calibration point – section for adjusting the low value of the input
measurement, but only if necessary (i.e., the lowest value expected is not
zero). This is not used for such monitors as Battery Temperature, Battery
Symmetry Voltage, and Battery Voltage.
• High calibration point – section for adjusting the high value of the input
measurement
o Calibrate value – field for entering the measured high or low value
(depending on the section). Click the Apply button to apply the
calibration value
o A/D value – analog-to-digital conversion value. Please do not change this
value without consulting Eltek, as it is intended for production use only.
CAUTION: By enabling the A/D value, the actual A/D value on the
corresponding input will be overwritten by the value in this field.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 171

Scale
Tab for entering the values of either a shunt or fuse.
• Shunt

Figure 5.7 – Scale Tab – Shunt Example (BattMonCurr X)

o Scale/Shunt Type – select the mV or Volt value of the shunt from the
drop-down list
o Max Rating – select the maximum current rating of the shunt (in amps)
from the drop-down list
• Fuse

Figure 5.8 – Scale Tab – Fuse Example (BattMonFuse X)

o Fuse Rating – enter the fuse rating (in amps)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
172 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Edit Window for LVBD

The following parameters appear for the low-voltage battery disconnect (LVBD)
edit window.

Figure 5.9 – LVBD Edit Window

• LVD – check the Enable box to enable monitoring of the low-voltage battery
disconnect contactor
• Mains Independent reconnect – check the Enable box to permit the LVBD
contactor to close if the Reconnect Voltage is attained, regardless of
whether ac input (mains) is available. This is useful when a backup or
secondary power source is capable of supporting battery charging.
• Temperature Dependent – check the Enable box to permit the LVBD
contactor to close when the battery temperature is lower than the value
configured for the BatteryTemp alarm monitor (Alarm Conf. > Power
System > Battery > Battery Alarm Configuration)
• Disconnect Voltage – discharge voltage threshold at which the LVBD
contactor should open to disconnect the batteries; the LVBD alarm is also
triggered
NOTE: This field is the same as the Battery disconnect voltage (System
Conf. > Power System > Power System > System Voltages) and
Disconnect voltage [V] (System Conf. > Battery > Configuration > System
Voltages) fields under the System Configuration section.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 173

• Reconnect Voltage – system voltage at which the LVBD contactor should be

closed to reconnect the batteries
NOTE: This field is the same as the Battery reconnect voltage (System
Conf. > Power System > Power System > System Voltages) and
Reconnect voltage [V] (System Conf. > Battery > Configuration > System
Voltages) fields under the System Configuration section.
• Delay after disconnect – time delay (in seconds) to enforce between LVBD
disconnect and reconnect
• Description – free-form field for the description of the alarm monitor
• Alarm Group – controller alarm group assigned to report the LVBD alarm

Edit Window for LVLD

The following parameters appear for the low-voltage load disconnect (LVLD) edit
window.

Figure 5.10 – LVLD Edit Window

NOTE: The number of load contactors (LVLDs) must be set under System Conf. >
Power System > Load > Configuration (parameters Select load group and
Number of load contactors). When configured, the LVLD alarm monitor appears
under Alarm Conf. > Power System > Load > Load Group X.
• LVD – check the Enable box to enable monitoring of the low-voltage load
disconnect contactor

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
174 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

• Mains Independent reconnect - check the Enable box to permit the LVLD
contactor to close if the Reconnect Voltage is attained, regardless of
whether ac input (mains) is available. This is useful when a backup or
secondary power source is capable of supporting the load.
• Disconnect Voltage – low voltage threshold at which the LVLD contactor
should open to disconnect the load; the LVLD alarm is also triggered
NOTE: This field is the same as the Disconnect voltage [V] (System Conf. >
Load > Configuration) under the System Configuration section.
• Reconnect Voltage – system voltage at which the LVLD contactor should be
closed to reconnect the load
NOTE: This field is the same as the Reconnect voltage [V] (System Conf. >
Load > Configuration) under the System Configuration section.
• Disconnect delay time – time delay (in minutes) between loss of ac input
(mains) and opening the LVLD contactor to disconnect the load; Disconnect
delay enable (below) must be enabled to use this parameter
• Disconnect delay enable – check the Enable box to enable Disconnect delay
time (above)
• Description – free-form field for the description of the alarm monitor
• Alarm Group – controller alarm group assigned to report the LVLD alarm

Alarm Configuration Menus

Alarm monitors are configured under their respective menus in the Alarm
Configuration section.

Power System
The Power System page contains alarm menus for power system alarm monitors
(currently, the only alarm menu category).

Mains
The Mains page contains alarm monitors for ac input (mains).
WITHOUT GROUPS – alarm sections and monitors that appear when there are no
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers present.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 175

Figure 5.11 – Mains Inputs Alarms (without groups)

• Mains Inputs Alarm Configuration – section for detecting the number of

mains groups with errors
o MainsLow X – monitor for defining major and minor alarms for low ac input
(mains) voltage (from MainsVoltY)
o MainsVoltY – monitors for defining high and low ac input (mains) voltage
thresholds
NOTE: The number of MainsVolt monitors is dependent on how many
phases are specified at System Conf. > Power System > Mains > (Mains
Configuration) Number of Phases
NOTE: AC input (mains) voltage is monitored by rectifiers, which report to
the controller.
WITH GROUPS – alarm sections and monitors that appear when one or more
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers are present and connected to rectifiers.
• Mains Inputs Alarm Configuration – section for detecting the number of
mains groups with errors

Figure 5.12 – Mains Inputs Alarms (with groups)

o MainsGrpInMajor – monitor for defining a major alarm for mains group

errors
o MainsGrpInMinor – monitor for defining a minor alarm for mains group
errors
• Mains Group X – section for mains group monitoring; mains groups appear
only for Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers that are monitoring rectifiers

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
176 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 5.13 – Mains Group Alarms

o MainsVolt X.Y – monitors for defining high and low ac input (mains)
voltage thresholds
NOTE: The number of MainsVolt monitors is dependent on how many
phases are specified at System Conf. > Power System > Mains > (Mains
Configuration) Number of Phases
o MainsLow X–monitor for defining major and minor alarms for low ac input
(mains) voltage (from MainsVolt X.Y)
NOTE: AC input (mains) voltage is monitored by rectifiers, which report to
the controller.
• [Mains Monitor X]– section for configuring an Eltek AC Mains Monitor (CAN
Node); an AC Mains Monitor must be connected for this section to appear.
See the section “AC Mains Monitor”.

Table 5.1 – Mains Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Mains Mains Inputs MainsGrpInMajor Major Alarm Unit(s) N/A

Alarm
Minor Alarm
Configuration

MainsGrpInMinor MajorAlarm Unit(s) N/A

Minor Alarm

Mains Group X MainsVolt X.Y Major High Volt AC N/A

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

MainsLow X Major Alarm Unit(s) N/A

Minor Alarm

Unit(s) represents a whole sum or count

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 177

Generator
Alarm monitors for connected generators (if applicable).

Figure 5.14 – Generator Alarms

• Generator Alarm Configuration – section for configuring generator alarm

monitors
o GeneratorFail – monitor for sending an alarm signal if the controller has
signaled the generator to start and no ac input is detected (i.e., the
generator fails to start).
o FuelRemaining X – monitor for defining high and low fuel amounts in the
generator tank
NOTE: As of the publication date of this document, tank configuration
can only be done through PowerSuite.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Generator page.

Table 5.2 – Generator Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Generator Generator GeneratorFail Configurable N/A N/A

Alarm
Configuration

FuelRemaining X Major High [Liquid N/A

Volume
Minor High
Units – User
Minor Low Defined]
Major Low

Rectifiers
Alarm monitors for rectifiers, rectifier groups, and external rectifier monitors.
WITHOUT GROUPS– alarm sections and monitors that appear when there are no
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers present

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
178 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 5.15 – Rectifier Alarms (without groups)

• Rectifiers Alarm Configuration – section for configuring rectifier alarm

monitors
o RectifierCurrent – monitor for defining maximum current output
thresholds for the rectifiers
o RectifierError – monitor for detecting the number of rectifiers
experiencing errors
o RectLowMains – monitor for detecting the number of rectifiers
experience low ac input (mains)
o RectCommError – monitor for reporting the number of rectifiers
experiencing communication errors
o Rect.Capacity – monitor for the percentage of rectifier capacity being
used
o RectCurrShareErr – monitor for defining current share deviation (in
percentage) across the rectifiers
o RectifierTemp – monitor for defining high and low temperature thresholds
WITH GROUPS – alarm sections and monitors that appear when one or more
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers are present and connected to rectifiers
• Rectifiers Alarm Configuration – section for configuring rectifier alarm
monitors

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 179

Figure 5.16 – Rectifier Alarms (with groups)

o TotRectCurrent – monitor for setting high current thresholds for all

rectifier output (if there is more than one rectifier group)
o RectGrpErr – monitor for detecting the number of rectifier groups
reporting an alarm or error
o RectGroupInMinor – monitor for detecting the number of rectifier groups
experiencing a minor alarm
o RectGrpCommErr – monitor for detecting the number of rectifier groups
experiencing a communication error
o TotRectCapacity – monitor for the percentage of total rectifier capacity
being used
o RectCurrShareErr – monitor for detecting current share errors by defining
current share deviation (as a percentage)
o RectifierTemp – monitor for defining high and low rectifier temperature
thresholds
• Rect.Group X– section for configuring alarm monitors for a rectifier group,
which only appears for a Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
180 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 5.17 – Rectifier Group Alarms

o RectCurrGrp. X – monitor for defining maximum current output thresholds

for the rectifier group
o RectErrGrp. X–monitor for detecting the number of rectifiers experiencing
errors within the rectifier group
o RectComErrGrp. X – monitor for reporting the number of rectifiers
experiencing communication errors within the rectifier group
o RectTempGrp. X – monitor for defining high and low temperature
thresholds for the rectifier group
o CurrShareErr X – monitor for defining current share deviation (as a
percentage) across the rectifiers within the rectifier group
o RecLoMainsGrp. X – monitor for detecting the number of rectifiers
experience low ac input (mains)
• [RectCurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to monitor rectifier current. See the section “Load
Monitor”.
• [RectFlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor rectifier current. See the section “Flexi
Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Rectifiers page.

Table 5.3 – Rectifiers Alarm Monitors

Figure 5.18 – Solar Alarms

o SolarCurrent – monitor for defining maximum output current thresholds

for the solar chargers
o SolarChargerErr – monitor for detecting the number of solar chargers
experiencing an error
o SolarCommErr – monitor for detecting the number of solar chargers
experiencing communication errors
o SolarChargerTemp – monitor for defining high and low temperature
thresholds for the solar chargers
• [SolarCurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to monitor solar current. See the section “Load Monitor”.
• [SolarFlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor solar current. See the section “Flexi Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Solar page.

Table 5.4 – Solar Charger Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Solar Solar Charger SolarCurrent Major Alarm Amp N/A

Charger Alarm Minor Alarm
Configuration

SolarChargeErr Major Alarm Unit(s) N/A

Minor Alarm

SolarCommErr Major Alarm Unit(s) N/A

Minor Alarm

SolarChargerTemp Major High Degrees N/A

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 183

[Wind Charge
er]
Alarm configuratio
on page forr wind charrgers; only appears iff an external monitor is
connectted
• Wind
W Charg
ger Alarm Configurat
C ion – alarm
m monitors for wind chargers

Figure
F 5.19 – Wind Charge
er Alarms

o WindCurrrent – monnitor for de

efining max
ximum output curren
nt threshold
ds
for the wind
w charge
ers
o WindErro
or – monitoor for detecting the n
number of w
wind charg
gers
experien
ncing an error
o WindCommmError – monitor fo
or detecting the number of wind
d chargers
experien
ncing comm
munication errors
o WindChaargerTemp p – monitorr for definin
ng high and
d low temp
perature
threshollds for the wind charggers
• [WindCurM
[ Mon X] – sec ction for co
onfiguring the alarm monitors o of a Load
Monitor
M that is set to monitor wiind currentt. See the ssection “Lo
oad Monitorr”.
• [W
WindFlexMMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors o of a Flexi
Monitor
M that is set to monitor wiind currentt. See the section “Fllexi Monito
or”.
The follo
owing table lists the alarm mon
nitors for th
he Wind Ch
harger pag
ge.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
184 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Table 5.5 – Wind Charger Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Wind Wind Charger WindCurrent Major Alarm Amp N/A

Charger Alarm Minor Alarm
Configuration

WindError Major Alarm Unit(s) N/A

Minor Alarm

WindCommErr Major Alarm Unit(s) N/A

Minor Alarm

WindChargerTemp Major High Degrees N/A

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

[FuelCell Charger]
Alarm configuration page for fuel cell chargers; only appears if an external monitor
is connected
• FuelCell Alarm Configuration – alarm monitors for fuel cell chargers

Figure 5.20 – Fuel Cell Alarms

o FuelCellCurrent – monitor for defining maximum output current

thresholds for fuel cell chargers
o FuelCellError – monitor for detecting the number of fuel cell chargers
experiencing an error
o FuelCellCommErr – monitor for detecting the number of fuel cell chargers
experiencing communication errors
o FuelCellCapacity – monitor for defining maximum output capacity for the
fuel cell chargers (as a percentage of maximum output current)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 185

o FuelCellTemp – monitor for defining high and low temperature thresholds

for fuel cell chargers
• [FuelC CurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to monitor fuel cell current. See the section “Load
Monitor”.
• [FuelC FlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor fuel cell current. See the section “Flexi
Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Fuel Cell page.

Table 5.6 – Fuel Cell Charger Alarm Monitors

[DcDc Converter]
Alarm configuration page for dc-to-dc converters; only appears if dc-to-dc
converters are installed or if an external monitor is connected
• DcDc Converter Alarm Configuration – alarm monitors for dc-to-dc
converters

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
186 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 5.21 – Dc-to-dc Converter Alarms

o DcDcError – monitor for detecting the number of dc-to-dc converters

experiencing an error
o DcDcCommError – monitor for detecting the number of dc-to-dc
converters experiencing communication errors
o DcDcCurrent – monitor for defining maximum output current thresholds
for dc-to-dc converters
o DcDcTemp – monitor for defining high and low temperature thresholds for
dc-to-dc converters
o DcDcCapacity – monitor for defining maximum output capacity for the dc-
to-dc converters (as a percentage of maximum output current)
• [DCDC CurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to monitor dc-to-dc converter current. See the section
“Load Monitor”.
• [DCDC FlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor dc-to-dc converter current. See the section
“Flexi Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the DCDC Converter page.

Table 5.7 – Dc-to-Dc Converter Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

DcDc DcDc Converter DcDcError Major Alarm Unit(s) N/A

Converter Alarm Minor Alarm
Configuration

DcDcCommErr Major Alarm Unit(s) N/A

o LoadFuse X – monitor for a fuse or circuit breaker for the entire load group
(if applicable)
o LoadCurrGrp. X – monitor for defining the high and low current thresholds
for the load group
o LoadCurrent X.Y – monitors for defining the maximum current thresholds
for individual load branch monitors in the group
o [LVLD X.Y] – low-voltage load disconnect contactor monitor; only appears
if configured under System Conf. > Power System > Load
o Drop diode X.Y – monitors for defining the high voltage threshold for drop
diodes in the load group
• [LoadPrimary X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to Stdloadmon. See the section “Load Monitor”.
• [Load CurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to Load CurMon. See the section “Load Monitor”.
• [Load FlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor unit that is set to Load Fleximon. See the section “Flexi Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Load page.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 189

Table 5.8 – Load Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Load Load Alarm LoadCurrent Major Alarm Amp N/A

Configuration
Minor Alarm

Load Group X LoadFuse X Configurable N/A Config

Scale (Fuse)

LoadCurrGrp. X Major High Amp Calibration

(Current)
Minor High
Scale
Minor Low
(Shunt)
Major Low

LoadCurrent X.Y Major High Amp Calibration

(Current)
Minor High
Scale
Error
(Shunt)
Error

LVLD X.Y N/A N/A N/A

Drop diode X.Y Minor High Volt DC N/A

Battery
Alarm monitors for batteries, battery groups, and external battery monitors
• Battery Alarm Configuration – section for configuring battery alarm
monitors handled by the system controller

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
190 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 5.24 – Battery Alarms

o BatteryVoltage–monitor for defining the high and low voltage thresholds

for batteries
o BatteryCurrent – monitor for defining the high and low current thresholds
for batteries (charge and discharge, respectively)
o BatteryTemp – monitor for defining the high and low temperature
thresholds for battery temperature
o BatteryLifeTime – monitor for determining if the batteries have exceeded
the maximum number of days (user-defined) for a normal life cycle
o LVBD – monitor for detecting the state of the battery LVD (i.e., whether it
is closed or open).
o BatteryQuality – monitor for the percentage of the battery’s original
capacity that remains for charging; the controller triggers the alarm if it
calculates the battery’s charging capacity to be below the percentage
specified
CAUTION: Resetting the BatteryQuality monitor (i.e., unchecking the
Enable box and rechecking it) resets the monitor’s value, causing it to lose
the percentage it calculated from the last battery test. The value is,
however, stored in the battery test result log.
o BatteryTotCap – monitor for total maximum capacity of the batteries (in
amp-hours)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 191

o BatteryRemCap – monitor for maximum discharge thresholds (in amp-

hours) for the batteries; it indicates how much battery capacity remains
before disconnect
o BatteryTimeLeft – monitor for the estimated remaining battery discharge
time (in minutes)
o DeltaStringCurr – monitor for the maximum deviation (as a percentage)
between battery string measurements
o BatteryUsedCap – monitor for estimated battery capacity used (in amp-
hours); this monitor is analogous to a DOD (Depth of Discharge)
measurement
o Ah Charged – counter for amp-hours (x100) of charge on the current
batteries
o Ah Discharged – counter for amp-hours (x100) of discharge on the current
batteries
NOTE: Ah Charged and Ah Discharged are defined in amp-hour divided by
100 as a scaling technique to prevent data overflow; the values are to be
multiplied by 100 (x100). Even though one value is for charge and the
other for discharge, both values are positive (as opposed to negative for
discharge). Amp-hours are calculated every minute.
NOTE: Ah Charged and Ah Discharge values are cleared if the Battery
Capacity or Battery Installation Date are changed.
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Capacity [per string] /
Battery install date [yyyy-mm-dd]
o BadTestResults – monitor for counting the number of battery tests
where End Voltage is reached (System Conf. > Power System > Battery
> Test) before the time allotted for the Simple Test, indicating that the
batteries are “bad”
• Battery Bank X – section for configuring battery bank alarm monitors
handled by the system controller(s); battery banks are defined at System
Conf. > Power System > Battery > Configuration

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
192 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 5.25 – Battery Bank Alarms

o BattVolt bank X – monitor for defining the high and low voltage
thresholds for battery voltage within the battery bank
o BattCurr bank X – monitor for defining the high and low (charge and
discharge, respectively) current thresholds for the battery bank
o BattCurrent X.Y – monitors for defining the high and low current
thresholds for battery circuits(other than the battery bank)
o BattFuses X – monitor for a fuse or circuit breaker for the entire battery
bank (if applicable)
o BatteryTemp X.Y – monitors for defining the high and low temperature
thresholds for battery temperature inputs
o SymmVolt X.Y – monitors for defining maximum voltage deviation
between battery symmetry inputs
• [Battery Monitor X] –section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Battery
Monitor (if connected). See the section “Battery Monitor”.
• [Batt FlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor battery current. See the section “Flexi
Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Battery page.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 193

Table 5.9 – Battery Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Unit Tabs

Heading Events

Battery Battery Alarm BatteryVoltage Major High Volt DC N/A

Configuration
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

BatteryCurrent Major High Amp N/A

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

BatteryTemp Major High (Degrees) N/A

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

LVBD* N/A N/A N/A

BatteryQuality Major Alarm % N/A

(Percentage)
Minor Alarm

BatteryTotCap Minor Low Ah N/A

Major Low

BatteryRemCap Minor Low Ah N/A

Major Low

BatteryTimeLeft Minor Alarm Min N/A

Major Alarm

DeltaStringCurr Major Alarm % N/A

(Percentage)
Minor Alarm

BatteryUsedCap Major Alarm Ah N/A

Minor Alarm

Ah Charged Major High Ah*100 N/A

Minor High

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
194 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Unit Tabs

Heading Events

Ah Discharged Major High Ah*100 N/A

Minor High

BadTestResults Major Alarm (Count) N/A

Battery Bank X BattVolt bank X Major High Volt DC Calibration

Minor High (Voltage)
Minor Low
Major Low

BattCurr bank X Major High Amp N/A

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

BattCurrentX.Y Major High Amp Calibration

Minor High (Current)
Minor Low
Scale
Major Low
(Shunt)

BattFuses X Configurable N/A Config

Scale (Fuse)

BatteryTempX.Y Major High (Degrees)

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

SymmVolt X.Y Major Alarm Volt DC Calibration

Minor Alarm (Voltage)

*LVBD has an alarm monitor edit window that differs from the others. See the section “Edit Window
for LVBD” on page 172.

Inputs
Alarm monitor inputs grouped by controller and monitor devices
NOTE: The sections for the controllers and CAN Nodes on this page only appear if
the devices are connected to the controller CAN bus.
NOTE: The ProgInput XX.Y name changes when configured for a voltage or current
input (to Voltage XX.Y or Current XX.Y, respectively).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 195

• SP2 Master 1 Input Configuration – section for configuring the alarm

monitors of a Smartpack2 Master controller

Figure 5.26 – Smartpack2 Master Input Alarms

o Virtual input Y – monitors for Virtual Inputs, which are manual triggers for
toggling an assigned alarm output relay on command
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Smartpack2 controller.

Table 5.10 – Smartpack2 Master Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Inputs SP2 Master 1 Virtual input X Configurable N/A Config

Input
Configuration

• SP2 Basic X Input Configuration or SP2 BasicInd X Input Configuration –

section for configuring the alarm monitors of either a Smartpack2 Basic or a
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller

Figure 5.27 – Smartpack2 Basic and Smartpack2 Basic Industrial Input Alarms

o Temperature X.Y – monitors for defining high and low temperature

thresholds for temperature probe inputs

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
196 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

o EarthFault X – monitor for defining the resistance threshold (in kOhms)

for earth (ground) fault detection
o ProgInput X.Y – monitors for programmable inputs on the controller,
which can be relay inputs or voltage (see NOTE below)
NOTE: The input terminals used for temperature are the same physical
terminals used for the programmable inputs. If the temperature input
(Temperature X.Y) is desired, then the input is configured under the
Temperature X.Y monitor; if another kind of input is used, then the input
is configured under the ProgInput X.Y monitor.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Smartpack2 Basic and Basic
Industrial controllers.

Table 5.11 – Smartpack2 Basic and Basic Industrial Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Inputs SP2 Temperature X.Y Major High (Degrees) N/A

Basic/BasicIndX Minor High
Input Minor Low
Configuration Major Low

EarthFault X Major Alarm kOhm N/A

ProgInput X.Y Configurable N/A Config

(Voltage - 4 (Volt DC)
Calibration
Events)
(Voltage
only)

If configuring a Programmable Input (ProgInput) for Voltage, then an untitled field for a voltage
threshold appears under the General tab (between Event and Alarm Group, where the Unit column
is normally located) and must be specified

• SmartPack S 1 Input Configuration – section for configuring the alarm

monitors of a Smartpack S controller

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 197

Figure 5.28 – Smartpack S Input Alarms

o Temperature X.Y – monitors for defining high and low temperature

thresholds for temperature probe inputs
o Earth Resistance – monitor for defining the resistance threshold (in
kOhms) for earth (ground) fault detection
o Virtual input Y – monitors for Virtual Inputs, which are manual triggers for
toggling an assigned alarm output relay on command
o ProgInput X.Y – monitors for programmable inputs on the controller,
which can be either relay inputs or voltage
NOTE: The input terminals used for temperature are the same physical
terminals used for the programmable inputs. If the temperature input
(Temperature X.Y) is desired, then the input is configured under the
Temperature X.Y monitor; if another kind of input is used, then the input
is configured under the ProgInput X.Y monitor.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Smartpack S controller.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
198 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Table 5.12 – Smartpack S Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Inputs SmartPack S 1 Temperature X.Y Major High (Degrees) N/A

Input Minor High
Configuration Minor Low
Major Low

EarthFault X Major Alarm kOhm N/A

Virtual input Y Configurable N/A Config

ProgInput X.Y Configurable N/A Config

(Voltage - 4 (Volt DC)
Calibration
Events)
(Voltage
only)

• Compack Input Configuration – section for configuring the alarm monitors of

a Compack controller

Figure 5.29 – Compack Input Alarms

o Temperature X.Y – monitors for defining high and low temperature

thresholds for temperature probe inputs
o Virtual input Y – monitors for Virtual Inputs, which are manual triggers for
toggling an assigned alarm output relay on command
o ProgInput X.Y – monitors for programmable inputs on the controller,
which can be relay inputs or voltage (see NOTE below)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 199

NOTE: The input terminals used for temperature are the same physical
terminals used for the programmable inputs. If the temperature input
(Temperature X.Y) is desired, then the input is configuredunder the
Temperature X.Y monitor; if another kind of input is used, then the input
is configured under the ProgInput X.Y monitor.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Compack controller.

Table 5.13 – Compack Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Inputs Compack 1 Temperature X.Y Major High (Degrees) N/A

Input Minor High
Configuration Minor Low
Major Low

Virtual input Y Configurable N/A Config

ProgInput X.Y Configurable N/A Config

(Voltage - 4 (Volt DC)
Calibration
Events)
(Voltage
only)

• [I/O unit X Input Configuration] – section for configuring the input channels
of I/O Monitors (Types 1-3). See the section I/O Monitor Alarm Monitors.
• [ContrFlexMon X] – section for configuring the input channels of a Flexi
Monitor set to Std Fleximon (Standard Flexi Monitor). See the section Flexi
Monitor.
• [Mains Monitor X Input Configuration] –section for configuring the input
channels of a Mains Monitor. See the section AC Mains Monitor.

Outputs
Page for mapping alarm groups to output channels and creating logical alarms.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
200 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 5.30 – Smartpack2 Master Outputs (Buzzer, Virtual)

Figure 5.31 – Smartpack2 Basic Industrial Outputs (Batt/Load Contactor, Alarm Out, Phone)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 201

• Outputs – configuration page for mapping alarm output groups to the

supported output channels (e.g., relays, contactors, buzzers) of controller
and monitor devices
o Select Unit – drop-down list for selecting controllers and CAN Nodes

Table 5.14 – Table of Controller and CAN Node Output Channels

Controller or CAN Node Output Channel(s)

SP2 Master 1 Buzzer

(Smartpack2 Master) Virtual 1-4

SP2 BasicInd X Batt contactor

(Smartpack2 Basic Industrial) Load contactor 1-2
Alarm output 1-3
Phone 1-5

SP2 Basic X Batt contactor

(Smartpack2 Basic) Load contactor 1-2

I/O unit X Alarm output 1-6

(I/O Monitor, Types 1-3)

SmartPack S 1 Alarm output 1-6

(Smartpack S) Batt contactor
Load contactor
Buzzer
Phone 1-3
Virtual 1-4

Compack 1 Alarm output 1-3

(Compack) Batt contactor
Load contactor
Virtual 1-4

o Alarm Map – assignment table for each alarm group. Place a check in the
box under the output desired. Alarm groups can be assigned to multiple
output channels, and multiple alarm groups can be assigned to the same
output channel.
NOTE: Alarm Groups are configurable and may vary in name and order.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
202 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Available output channels:

■ Buzzer – some controllers have an audible buzzer that can be

triggered by an alarm

■ Buzzer output – feature supported by I/O Monitors that triggers a

recurring buzzer
NOTE: The Buzzer output column only appears in Eltek I/O Monitors
that have the latest software revision installed.

■ Alarm output – output relays associated with physical terminals on

the controller or CAN Node; see the manual for each controller or CAN
Node to determine which terminals are associated with each alarm
output relay

■ Batt contactor – low-voltage battery disconnect contactor (LVBD);

assigning alarm groups to the battery contactor triggers a change in
state (either open or closed) in the LVBD. See the manual for each
controller or CAN Node to determine which terminals are associated
with battery contactor relay(s).

■ Load contactor – low-voltage load disconnect contactor (LVLD);

assigning alarm groups to the battery contactor triggers a change in
state (either open or closed) in the LVLD. See the manual for each
controller or CAN Node to determine which terminals are associated
with load contactor relay(s).

■ Virtual – some controllers have virtual alarms; assigning an alarm

group to a virtual output channel triggers the assigned Virtual Input

■ Phone–modem callback phone number(s); assigning an alarm group to

one or more of these output channels sends an alarm message to the
phone number(s) configured on the Modem CallBack page (System
Conf. > Power System > Control System > Modem CallBack).
NOTE: To use the Modem Callback feature, it must be enabled and
phone numbers configured on the Modem CallBack page. In addition,
modem equipment must be connected to the controller unit that
supports modem communication (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial,
Smartpack S, or SmartNode).
o Output Config Window – clicking on an Output Channel column title opens
the Output Config window, where the channel can be configured.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 203

Figure 5.32 – Output

O Conffig Window

■ Description – frree-form te
ext field wh
here a desc
cription of the outputt
channel can be typed

■ [Channnel Charaacteristic] – drop-dowwn list of no avior to ass

ormal beha sign
to the relay. Th
he followingg options a
are available:

□ No
ormally de
eactivated – the relay
y is normallly deactiva
ated (norm
mally
op
pen)

□ Noormally ac
ctivated – the
t relay iss normally a
activated ((normally
closed)

□ La
atched – th
he channell is for a lattched low-v voltage dis
sconnect (LLVD)
co
ontactor (the LVD is la
atched in p place in eitther state, not requiring
en
nergy to re
emain eitheer open or c closed).

□ Noormally de eactivated resettable e – the rela

ay is normaally
de
eactivated (normally open) and can be resset even if the alarm
grroup is still in alarm. This
T settingg is used fo
or the “nag
g” feature,
which recurs s for as lonng as the trriggering alarm is acttive.

□ Normally
N ac
ctivated reesettable – the relay is normally y activatedd
(n
normally clo
osed) and can
c be rese et even if tthe alarm g
group is still in
alarm. This setting
s is used for thee “nag” fea
ature, which recurs fo or as
long as the triggering
t alarm
a is ac tive.

■ Off delay (minuutes) – the number off minutes tto elapse a

after receiv
ving
an ala
arm from an
a alarm grroup beforee the outpuut channell should be
signa
aled.
The following
f im
mage show ws the Outp
put Config
g window fo or the Buzzzer
Outpput. The delay timer changes
c to Nag timerr when eithher of the
resetttable options is selected.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
204 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 5.33 – Ou
utput Config
g Window forr Buzzer Outp
put (Nag tim
mer instead o
of Off delay)

• Logical Groups – configuration page

p for cre
eating logic
c equationns to trigge
er an
alarm group
p when twoo other alarm groups are in spec cific states
s; also know
wn
as Boolean algebra

Figure
F 5.34 – Logical Gro ups Page

o [Table Rows]
R – equ
uations for activating
g an alarm o
output gro
oup based oon
the states of two other
o alarm
m output grroups. Up to ten logical groups
s can
gured.
be config
The equa
ation for ea
ach line rea
ads as follo
ows:
If Alarm Group 1 is
s [Active orr Not Activ
ve] and Ala
arm Group 2 is [Active
e or
Not Actiive], then activate
a Re
esult Group p.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 205

■ Alarm
m Group 1 – drop-dowwn list of allarm group
ps to selectt as the firs
st
alarm
m group sta
ate to chec
ck

■ Alarm
m Group 2 – drop-dow
wn list of allarm group
ps to selectt as the
secon
nd alarm group state
e to check

■ Activ
ve/Not Acttive – drop-down list of states ffor the corrresponding
g
alarm
m group; se
elect eitherr Active or Not Active
e

■ Result Group – drop-down n list of ala

arm groups to select a
as the alarrm
outpu
ut group to
o active if the
t equatio on is true
NOTEE: Alarm grroups assiggned to the e Result Group cannoot be used for
any other
o alarm
m monitors.. In other w words, an aalarm group
p assignedd to a
Result Group must
m be ded dicated to that Resullt Group on nly.

Contrrol Syste
em
The Con
ntrol Systeem page co ontains alarm monitors for deteecting errorrs
(malfunctions) witth the conttroller and CAN
C Node devices co
onnected tto the powe
er
system.

Fig
gure 5.35 – Control
C Syste
em Alarms

NOTE: Alarm
A mon
nitors only appear
a if th
he associated contro
oller or CAN
N Node is
presentt.
• Ambient
A Teemp – monitor for the
e maximum m temperatture detectted by any of
th
he controlller tempera
ature inputts (Smartpack2 Basic
c or Smartp
pack2 Basic
In
ndustrial)
• Batt-Ambie
B entTemp – monitor fo
or the diffe
erence betw
ween batte
ery
emperature and the AmbientTe
te A emp value (BatteryTe emp – AmbbientTemp
p)
• UserSuspen
U nded – indicates if a user
u accou
unt has bee
en suspend
ded due to too
many
m unsuc
ccessful login attemp pts

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
206 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

• CU Err.Basic – monitor for detecting errors with Smartpack2 Basic or

Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers
• CU Err.BattMon – monitor for detecting errors with connected Battery
Monitors
• CU Err.LoadMon – monitor for detecting errors with connected Load Monitors
• CU Err.IO-Unit – monitor for detecting errors with connected I/O Monitors
(Types 1-3)
• CtrlUnitError – monitor for detecting errors with the primary controller unit
(Smartpack2 Master, Smartpack, or Compack)
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Control System page.

Table 5.15 – Control System Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Control Control System Ambient temp Major High (Degrees) N/A

System Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

Batt-AmbientTemp Major High (Degrees) N/A

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

UserSuspended Major Alarm N/A N/A

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 207

Eltek CAN Nodes

Eltek CAN Nodes provide auxiliary monitoring extensibility to the control system;
most CAN Nodes are also equipped with output relays for limited alarm and control
signaling. Configuration pages for CAN Nodes only appear in the web interface
when they are connected to the controller CAN bus.

Table 5.16 – CAN Nodes – Alarm Monitors and Locations

CAN Node Function (Load and Flexi Alarm Page Configuration

Monitors only)* Where It Heading/Section
Appears Name
When Configured
As Monitor Type…

AC Mains Monitor ac input Mains Mains Monitor X

Monitor (mains) voltage,
frequency and current

Battery Monitor battery charge Battery Battery Monitor X

Monitor current, temperature,
fuse or circuit breaker,
and symmetry
measurements

Load Monitor up to eight Std Loadmon Load** LoadPrimary X

Monitor* load current(s) and
Load CurMon Load** Load CurMon X
eight fuses and/or
circuit breakers Rect CurMon Rectifiers Rect CurMon X
DCDC CurMon DcDc Converter DcDc CurMon X
Solar CurMon Solar Charger Solar CurMon X
Wind CurMon Wind Charger Wind CurMon X
FuelC CurMon FuelCell Charger FuelC CurMon X

Flexi Monitor a variety of RectifierFleximon Rectifiers Rect FlexMon X

Monitor* currents on up to 16
Battery Fleximon Battery Batt FlexMon X
input channels
Load Fleximon Load Load FlexMon X
DCDC Fleximon DcDc Converter DcDc FlexMon X
Solar Fleximon Solar Charger Solar FlexMon X
Wind Fleximon Wind Charger Wind FlexMon X
FuelC Fleximon FuelCell Charger FuelC FlexMon X
Std Fleximon Inputs Contr FlexMon X

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
208 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

CAN Node Function (Load and Flexi Alarm Page Configuration

Monitors only)* Where It Heading/Section
Appears Name
When Configured
As Monitor Type…

I/O Monitor Monitor up to six Inputs I/O unit X Input

Type 1 and programmable inputs Configuration
Type 3*** (relays, voltage) and
I/O unit X Outdoor
Outdoor Cabinet
Configuration***
signals

I/O Monitor Monitor up to six Inputs I/O unit X Input

Type 2 programmable inputs Configuration
(relays, voltage)

*Load and Flexi Monitors can be configured to monitor several categories of current through the
System Conf. page (System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Current Monitor (for
Load Monitor) / Flexi Monitor). The Configuration Heading/Section Name appears when the
monitor is configured with the corresponding Monitor Type under the column When Configured As
Monitor Type….
**The Load Monitor appears under the Load page if configured as either Std Loadmon or Load
CurMon. As Std Loadmon (LoadPrimary), the currents monitored are excluded from system current
calculations; as Load CurMon, the currents monitored are included with system current calculations.
***The Fan Control parameters required for the fan inputs are configured under the System Conf.
page (System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Outdoor)

AC Mains Monitor
The AC Mains Monitor provides ac input monitoring beyond what the rectifiers
report. In addition to voltage readings on each phase, frequency, current and total
current can be monitored. The AC Mains Monitor also maintains its own data log.
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Mains

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 209

Figure 5.36 – AC Mains Monitor Alarms

• Mains Monitor X - section for configuring an AC Mains Monitor CAN Node

o MainsVolt X.Y – monitors for defining high and low ac input (mains)
voltage thresholds
o Frequency X – monitor for defining alarm thresholds for the measured ac
input frequency
o MainsCurr X.Y – monitors for defining alarm thresholds for high ac input
(mains) current
o TotMainsCurr X – monitor for defining total ac input high current
thresholds
Alarm Conf. > Power System >Inputs
• Mains Monitor X Input Configuration – section for configuring the inputs of a
Mains Monitor CAN Node
o MainsPrin X – monitors for the configurable input channels of a Mains
Monitor
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Mains Monitor.

Table 5.17 – AC Mains Monitor Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Heading

Mains Mains Monitor X MainsVolt X.Y Major High Volt AC N/A

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
210 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Menu Page Section Alarm Moniitor A

Alarm Events Unit Tabs
Heading

Frequency X M
Major High Hz N/A
M
Minor High
M
Minor Low
M
Major Low

MainsCurr X.Y
X M
Major High Amps Scale
M
Minor High (Shunt)

TotMainsCu
urr X M
Major High Amps N/A
M
Minor High

Inputs Mains
s MonitorX MainsPrin X Co
onfigurable N/A Config
Input
Configuration

Location
n on Home
e Page: Mains Status button

Batte
ery Mon
nitor
The Batttery Monittor provides
s battery current,
c fusse, and tem
mperature monitoring
g as
a supple
ement to the controlller.
Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
ystem > Ba
attery

Fig
gure 5.37 – Battery
B Moniitor Alarms

• Battery
B Monitor X – section for configuring
g a Battery
y Monitor C
CAN Node

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 211

o BattMonCurr X – monitor for defining high and low battery charge (OR
DISCHARGE? OR CHARGE AND DISCHARGE RATHER THAN HIGH AND LOW?)
thresholds; requires a shunt, which must be calibrated and scaled
o BattMonTemp X – monitor for defining high and low battery temperature
thresholds (in degrees)
o BattMonFuse X – monitor for a battery circuit fuse or circuit breaker; fuse
rating must be known
o BattMonSymX.Y – monitors for battery symmetry measurements; an
alarm is triggered if there is a deviation greater than the voltage specified
between any two symmetry measurements on this monitor.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Battery Monitor.

Table 5.18 – Battery Monitor Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Heading Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Battery Battery Monitor X BattMonCurr X Major High Amp

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

BattMonTemp X Major High (Degrees)

Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low

o Currents eight current sense in
nputs of a
Load Mo
onitor

Fig
gure 5.38 – Load
L Monitorr - Currents

■ Curre
ent X–mon nitor for deffining high current thhresholds for the tota
al
curre
ent read by
y all of the Load
L Monittor’s curren
nt sense in
nputs

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
214 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

■ Current X.Y – monitors for defining high current thresholds for current
read by each of the Load Monitor’s current sense inputs
o Fuses – section for configuring the eight fuse (or circuit breaker)
monitoring inputs of a Load Monitor

Figure 5.39 – Load Monitor - Fuses

■ Fuses X.Y – monitors for fuses or circuit breakers; fuse rating must be
known
o Power – section for reporting power calculations (not configurable)

Figure 5.40 – Load Monitor - Power

■ TotPower X – monitor for total power measured on all current sense

inputs of a Load Monitor (not configurable)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 215

■ Power X.Y – monitor for power on each current sense input of a Load
Monitor (not configurable)
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Load Monitor.

Table 5.19 – Load Monitor Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Sub-Section Alarm Alarm Unit Tabs

Heading Heading Monitor Events

Load Load Primary X* Currents Current X Major High Amp

Minor High
Load CurMon X*
Rectifiers Rect CurMon X
DcDc DcDc CurMon X
Converter
Solar Solar CurMon X
Charger
Wind Wind CurMon X
Charger
FuelCell FuelC CurMon X
Charger
Current X.Y Major High Amp Calibration
Minor High (Current)
Scale
(Shunt)
Fuses Configurable Normally N/A Scale
Open (Fuse)
Normally
Closed
Diode
Matrix

Power TotPower X N/A N/A N/A

Power X.Y N/A N/A N/A

*These headings both appear under the Load page, depending on what Monitor Type is assigned.

Name on Control Units Summary page: CurrMonitor Xor LoadMonitor X

NOTE: Load Monitors are named either CurrMonitor or LoadMonitor on the Control
Units Summary page depending on configuration. CurrMonitor typically refers to a
Load Monitor installed by the factory in large power systems with extensive load
distribution. LoadMonitor is the name for Load Monitors installed in the field.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
216 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

stem >Fue
elCell Charrger
• FuelC
F FlexM
Mon X – heading for a Flexi Mon itor used fo
or monitoring fuel cell
chargers. This
T heading appears when a Fleexi Monitorr is set to F
FuelC
Fleximon.
F
Location on
n Home pag
ge: FuelCe
ell Charger Status bu
utton (Flexii Monitor X
X)

• In
nputs– sec
ction for co
onfiguring the
t 16 prog
grammable
e inputs of a Flexi Mon
nitor

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
218 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 5.41 – Flexi Monitor Input Alarms

o Current X– monitor for defining high current thresholds for the total
current read by all Flexi Monitor inputs that are programmed for current
measurement
o ProgInput X.Y–monitors for up to 16 inputs of varying types, including
relays, voltage, temperature, current, and fan speed.
• Power – section for reporting power calculations (not configurable)

Figure 5.42 – Flexi Monitor Power Monitors

o TotPower X – monitor for total power measured on all applicable inputs of

a Flexi Monitor (not configurable)
o Power X.Y – monitor for power on each applicable input of a Flexi Monitor
(not configurable)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 219

The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Flexi Monitor.

Table 5.20 – Flexi Monitor Alarm Monitors

Menu Section Heading Sub- Alarm Alarm Unit Tabs

Page Section Monitor Events
Heading
Rectifiers RectFlexMon X Inputs Current X Major High Amp
Minor High
Battery BattFlexMon X
Load Load FlexMon X
DcDc DcDcFlexMon X
Converter
Solar Solar FlexMon X
Charger
Wind Wind FlexMon X
Charger
FuelCell FuelCFlexMon X
Charger
Inputs ContrFlexMon X
Current X.Y Major High Amp Calibration
Minor High (Current)
Scale
(Shunt)
ProgInput X.Y Configurable N/A Calibration
(Voltage, (Volt (Voltage)
Temperature, DC)
Scale
Current, Fan
(Shunt,
Speed - 4
Fuse)
Events)
(Fan
Speed)
Power TotPower X N/A N/A N/A
Power X.Y N/A N/A N/A

Name on Control Units Summary page: Fleximonitor X

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
220 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

I/O Monitor Alarm Monitors

I/O Monitors have six configurable inputs and six output relays. I/O Monitor Type 1
and Type 3 have additional input/output channels for outdoor cabinet applications.
I/O Monitor Type 3 supports hybrid power functions (solar, fuel tank, wind, etc.) by
providing higher resolution inputs than those in the Type 1. See the installation
guides provided with each I/O Monitor for further details.
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Inputs
• I/O Unit x Input Configuration – section for configuring the input
terminals of the I/O Monitors (Types 1, 2, and 3)

Figure 5.43 – I/O Monitor Programmable Inputs

o ProgInput XX.Y – monitors for up to six inputs: relays, voltage, diode

matrix, clock (inputs vary by terminal for I/O Monitor Type 3)
• I/O unit X Outdoor Configuration – section for configuring the outdoor
cabinet monitors of I/O Monitor Type 1 or Type 3

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 221

Figure 5.44 – I/O Monitor Outdoor Inputs

o Fan speed XX.Y – monitors for high and low fan speed thresholds (as a
percentage); designed to be used in conjunction with SpeedDev XX.Y
(below)
o OutDoorTemp XX.Y – monitors for high temperature thresholds for
outdoor cabinet temperature inputs; designed to be used to compare the
temperature inside and outside the cabinet for TempDev XX.Y (below)
o SpeedDev. XX.Y – monitors for fan speed deviation (as a percentage)
between the expected fan speed (specified under output relay Fan
Control Y) and the measured fan speed (FanSpeed XX.Y, above)
Location of Fan Control parameter: System Conf. > Power System >
Control System > Outdoor > Fan Control Y
o TempDev. XX.Y – monitors for high and low temperature deviation (in
degrees) between the temperatures inside and outside of the cabinet

The following table lists the specifications for the programmable inputs of I/O
Monitors.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
222 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Table 5.21 – I/O Monitor Programmable Input Specifications

Programmable I/O Monitor Type 1and Type 2 I/O Monitor Type 3

Inputs

1-2 NO/NC Relay, Pull Up/Down (?), Diode NO/NC Relay, Pull Up/Down (?), Diode
Matrix Matrix
Voltage range: 0-75 V (78 mV Voltage range: 0-75 V (78 mV
resolution) resolution)

3-4 NO/NC Relay, Pull Up/Down (?), Diode NO/NC Relay

Matrix
Voltage range 0-13 V (13 mV
Voltage range: 0-75 V (78 mV resolution)
resolution)

5-6 NO/NC Relay, Pull Up/Down (?), Diode NO/NC Relay

Matrix
Voltage range 0-13 V (13 mV
Voltage range: 0-75 V (78 mV resolution)
resolution)
Current measurement 4-20mA (27 μA
resolution)

The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Type 1 and Type 2 I/O Monitors.

Table 5.22 – I/O Monitor Type 1 and Type 2 Input Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Heading Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Inputs I/O unit X Input ProgInput XX.Y Configurable N/A Calibration

Configuration (Voltage)
(Voltage – 4 (Volt DC)
events)

The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Type 3 I/O Monitor.

Table 5.23 – I/O Monitor Type 3 Input Alarm Monitors

Menu Page Section Heading Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Inputs I/O unit X Input ProgInput XX.1 Configurable N/A Calibration

Configuration ProgInput XX.2 (Voltage – 4 (Volt DC) (Voltage)
events)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Alarm Configuration 223

Menu Page Section Heading Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

ProgInput XX.3 Configurable N/A Calibration

ProgInput XX.4 (Voltage – 4 (Volt DC) (Voltage)
events)

ProgInput XX.5 Configurable N/A Calibration

ProgInput XX.6 (Voltage, mA (Volt DC, (Voltage,
– 4 events) mA) mA)

Name on Control Units Summary page: I/O unit X

The following table lists the outdoor alarm monitors for the Type 1 and Type 3 I/O
Monitors.
Table 5.24 – I/O Monitor Type 1 and Type 3 Outdoor Alarm Monitors

Menu Section Heading Alarm Monitor Alarm Events Unit Tabs

Page

Inputs I/O unit X Fan speed XX.Y Major High % N/A

Outdoor Minor High (Percentage)
Configuration Minor Low
Major Low

OutDoorTemp XX.Y Major High Degrees Config

Minor High (Temeprature)
Event Calibration
Event (Tempeature)

SpeedDev. XX.Y Major Alarm % N/A

Minor Alarm (Percentage)

TempDev. XX.Y Configurable Degrees N/A

Location on Home page: Outdoor Input button (I/O unit X)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
224 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

I/O Monitor Output Relays

Alarm Conf. > Outputs > Select Unit: I/O unit X
All I/O Monitor types have the same appearance on the Outputs page. Each unit
(when selected from the drop-down list) shows six alarm relays that can be mapped
for all available alarm groups.
NOTE: I/O Monitor Type 1 and Type 3 generate higher output on relays 5 and 6.

Figure 5.45 – I/O Monitor Outputs

The following table lists the output relay specifications for the I/O Monitors.

Table 5.25 - Output Relay Specifications for I/O Monitors

Dry/Form-C Relays I/O Monitor Types 1 & 3 I/O Monitor Type 2

1-4 1A/60W/75V 1A/60W/75V

5-6 8A/300W/75V 1A/60W/75V

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 225

6. Logs
Data collected forr power sys
stem eventts, measurrements, an
nd user acc
counts are
e
stored as
a logs andd viewable under the Logs categ gory.

Even
nt Log
The Eveent Log pagge stores alarm
a evennts (when a
alarms are turned on and off),
including controlle
er or monito
or errors an
nd removaal of module
es.
• # – row num
mber
• Date/Time
D d time of th
– date and he event
• Description
D n – brief des
scription of the even t. Alarms a
are listed b
by the alarm
m
monitor
m nam
me.
• Event
E – reason for the
e alarm eve
ent
There are three na
avigation buttons
b in the
t bottom
m right corn
ner: First p
page, Previious
page, an
nd Next paage. Each page
p lists 20
2 events..

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
226 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 6.1 – Event Log Page

Data Log
The Data log page shows parameter measurements stored by controllers and CAN
Nodes.
• Select Unit – drop-down list of connected controllers and CAN Nodes that
record data measurements
• # - row number
• Timestamp – date and time the measurements are taken for the record (row)
• [Parameters] – each column represents a parameter measured by the
controller or CAN Node device; parameters differ by unit
There are two navigation buttons in the top right corner: Latest xx logs and Next
xx logs. Type the number of entries desired in the field beside either button, then
click the button to view those log entries.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 227

Figure 6.2 – Data Log Page

The following table describes the data log parameters for each supported
controller and CAN Node.

Table 6.1 - Parameters by Controller and CAN Node

Controller or CAN Node (Unit) Parameter Heading Description

SP2 Master 1 Battery Voltage Battery voltage measurement

(Smartpack2 Master)

Battery Current Battery current measurement

Tot Rect Current Total rectifier current

calculation

I/O unit X Out Door Temp XX.Y Outdoor temperature

measurement
(I/O Monitor, Types 1 and 3)

Fan speed XX.Y Fan speed calculation

Fleximonitor X Prog Input X.YY Programmable input; actual

heading name may change
depending on the assignment
(e.g., voltage or current)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
228 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Energy Log
The Energy logs page shows energy calculations (in Watt-hours) for major power
categories; aggregated by hour, day, and week.

Figure 6.3 – Hourly Energy Log Page (as an example)

• Time tag – column that appears first on the time-based tables (Hourly, Daily,
and Weekly); time stamp for the energy calculation.
The time-based Energy log tables (excluding the Accumulated page) have the
same tabs for each power category:
• Summary – lists energy totals for Load and Rectifier; any measurements
from connected CAN Nodes that are monitoring these power categories are
included in the totals.
• Load – lists energy totals for load measurements; columns are added for
each controller and CAN Node that measures load current
o Load Summary – total for load measurements; includes controller sense
inputs and any Load Monitors set to Load CurMon or Flexi Monitors set to
Load Fleximon
o LoadPrimary X – column for a Load Monitor set to Std Loadmon

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 229

o Load CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to Load CurMon

o Load FlexMon – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Load Fleximon
• Rectifier – lists energy totals for rectifier output; columns are added for each
controller and CAN Node that measures rectifier current
o Rectifier Summary – total for rectifier measurements; includes rectifier
measurements and any Load Monitors set to Rect CurMon or Flexi
Monitors set to Rect Fleximon
o Rectifier Group X – energy measurements for total rectifier output in a
rectifier group
o Rect CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to Rect CurMon
o Rect FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Rect Fleximon
• (Solar) – lists energy totals for solar chargers; columns are added for each
CAN Node that measures solar energy
o Solar Charger Summary – total for solar measurements; includes
controller measurements and any Load Monitors set to Solar CurMon or
Flexi Monitors set to Solar Fleximon
o Solar CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to Solar CurMon
o Solar FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Solar Fleximon
• (DCDC) – lists energy totals for dc-to-dc converters; columns are added for
each CAN Node that measures dc-to-dc energy
o DcDc Converter Summary – total for dc-to-dc converter measurements;
includes controller measurements and any Load Monitors set to DCDC
CurMon or Flexi Monitors set to DCDC Fleximon
o DCDC CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to DCDC CurMon
o DCDC FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to DCDC Fleximon
• (Wind) – lists energy totals for wind chargers; columns are added for each
CAN Node that measures wind energy
o Wind Charger Summary – total for wind charger measurements; includes
any Load Monitors set to Wind CurMon or Flexi Monitors set to Wind
Fleximon
o Wind CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to Wind CurMon
o Wind FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Wind Fleximon
• (Fuel Cell) – lists energy totals for fuel cell chargers; columns are added for
each CAN Node that measures fuel cell energy

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
230 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

o FuelCell Charger Summary – total for fuel cell charger measurements;

includes any Load Monitors set to FuelC CurMon or Flexi Monitors set to
FuelC Fleximon
o FuelC CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to FuelC CurMon
o FuelC FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to FuelC Fleximon
• Battery – lists energy totals for batteries; columns are added each Flexi
Monitor that measures battery current (set to Battery Fleximon)
o Batt FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Battery Fleximon

Table 6.2 – Names for Load and Flexi Monitors

CAN Node Appears Under Tab… Appears As… When Configured As

Monitor Type…
Load Monitor* Load** LoadPrimary X Std Loadmon
Load** Load CurMon X Load CurMon
Rectifiers Rect CurMon X Rect CurMon
DCDC DcDc CurMon X DCDC CurMon
Solar Solar CurMon X Solar CurMon
Wind Wind CurMon X Wind CurMon
Fuel Cell FuelC CurMon X FuelC CurMon
Flexi Monitor* Rectifiers Rect FlexMon X RectifierFleximon
Battery Batt FlexMon X Battery Fleximon
Load Load FlexMon X Load Fleximon
DCDC DcDc FlexMon X DCDC Fleximon
Solar Solar FlexMon X Solar Fleximon
Wind Wind FlexMon X Wind Fleximon
Fuel Cell Inputs FuelC FlexMon X FuelC Fleximon

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 231

Accumulated
The Accumulated page lists total accumulated energy (in Watt-hours) by power
categories over the lifetime of the controller. Totals are provided for Load,
Rectifier, and Battery by default. Solar, DcDc Converter, Wind, FuelCell, and
Generator appear if enabled or present in the system.

Figure 6.4 – Accumulated Energy Page

Hourly
The Hourly page lists hourly energy totals over the past two days. Time tag format
is Day.Month – Hour (DD.MM – HH), and uses a 24-hour clock.

Figure 6.5 – Hourly Energy Log Page

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
232 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Daily
The Daily page lists daily energy totals over the last 52 days. Time tag format is
Day.Month (DD.MM).

Figure 6.6 – Daily Energy Log Page

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 233

Week
kly
The Wee
ekly page lists weeklly energy totals
t over the past y
year. Time tag forma
at is
Week – Year (wXX
X – YYYY).

Fig
gure 6.7 – We
eekly Energy
y Log Page

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
234 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Generator Log
The Generator log page displays accumulated run time and fuel consumption over
daily, weekly, and monthly periods for up to two generator fuel tanks.

Figure 6.8 – Generator Log Page

• Select Tank – drop-down list of available fuel tanks that are being monitored
(maximum of two tanks)
o Accumulated run time[hours] – total run time while under monitoring
o Accumulated fuel consumption[units] – total fuel consumed while under
monitoring
o Day – displays run time (in minutes) and fuel consumption over the past
52 days. Date format is Day.Month (DD.MM).
o Week – displays run time (in hours) and fuel consumption over the past
year (52 weeks). Date format is Week – Year (wXX – YYYY).
o Month – displays run time (in hours) and fuel consumption over the past
52 months. Date format is Month Year (Mmm YYYY).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 235

Battery Cycles
The Battery cycles page displays the number of battery cycles (full charge
followed by full discharge, or vice-versa) in total and over time intervals.

Figure 6.9 – Battery Cycles Log

• Total number of battery cycles – total number of battery cycles recorded

while under monitoring
• Index – index number; the last 52 records are viewable
• Day – the number of battery cycles over the last day
• Week – the number of battery cycles over the last week
• Month – the number of battery cycles over the last month

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
236 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Battery Te
ests
The Batttery tests
s page disp
plays a tablle for the re
esults of b
battery tests.

Figure 6.10 – Battery Test Results Log

• # – record number
n of each
e batte
ery test
• Start
S time – time whe
en the batttery test sttarted
• Test
T duration [min] – battery test duration
n, in minute
es
• Test
T type – type of ba
attery testt executed (Interval, A
Automatic,, or Manuall)
• Average
A current [A] – average discharge
d c
current (in a
amps) mea
asured ove
er
th
he entire te
est duratio
on
• Disch.
D Energ
gy [Ah] – total
t energy (in Amp-h
hours) disc
charged du
uring the
battery
b testt
• Temp
T [°C] – average battery
b tem
mperature d
during the test
• End
E voltage
e [V] – final battery voltage mea
asured at tthe end of the batterry
te
est
• Calc
C qualityy [%] – battery quality calculatio
on based o
on the batttery test
re
esult, given
n as a perc
centage of the originaal capacity that rema
ains for
charging
• Termin.
T critteria – reas
son for the
e terminatio
on of the b
battery test (End Volttage
or End Time
e)
• Test
T result – symbol indicating whether
w th
he test wass successffully comple
eted
or not.
• Test
T Details
s Icon – clic
cking the ic
con opens the Batterry test dettails window
w
NOTE:
N The Test
T Details Icon only
y appears ffor successful batterry tests.
• Battery
B tes
st details – detailed results of a successfu
ul battery ttest
o Start Da
ate & Time – date and
d time the battery tesst began

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 237

o Stop Tim
me – date and
a time th
he battery test ended
d
o Duration
n – total tim
me of the battery
b tesst
o End Volttage – batttery voltag
ge at the en
nd of the ttest
o Discharg
ged Ah – to
otal amp-ho
ours discha
arged
o Calculatted Quality
y – battery quality pe
ercentage b
based on te
est results
s
o Average
e Current – average battery
b disc
charge currrent
o Battery Temperature – batte
ery temperrature during the testt
o Test res
sult – resultt of the battery test (successfu
ul or not)
o Termina e – reason for the batttery test e
ation Cause ending
o Select Unit
U – selec
ct controlle
ers or CAN Nodes tha
at support b
battery inp
puts
o (Inputs) – check bo
oxes for eaach battery
y input on tthe unit se
elected; che
eck
or unche
eck each boox to includ
de or exclu
ude the inp
put from th he chart and
table below.

Figure 6.11
1 – Battery Test
T Details W
Window (and
d Chart)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
238 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

o Chart – tab
t for the
e Battery Test
T Discha
arge data g
graph

■ Batteery Test Diischarge data – line g

graph of ba
attery testt data form
m the
inputts of the se
elected unit
NOTEE: Details fo
or each datta point on
n the graph
h can be se
een by
hovering over a data pointt with the ccursor (mo
ouse-over)

■ (Inpu
uts) – legen
nd for each
h data line a
and point oon the grapph; each input
can be
b toggled on and offf by clickingg on its sym s left)
mbol (on its
o Table – tab
t for the
e data pointts for each
h input on tthe Chart p
page

■ Time – the firstt column lis

sts the time
e at which each data
a point was
s
captu
ured

■ (Inpuut) – the remaining co

olumns represent eac
ch input tha
at is selectted
for th
he controlleer or CAN Node
N unit

Figure
F 6.12 – Battery Tes
st Details Wiindow with T
Table Tab

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 239

Change Log
The Change log page lists system-level changes for technical support purposes.

Figure 6.13 – Change Log Page

NOTE: This page is only viewable with admin login.

There are three navigation buttons in the bottom right corner: First page, Previous
page, and Next page. Each page lists 16 events.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
240 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Save Logs to File

The Save logs to file page is for generating a file for any or all logs, which can be
downloaded and saved.

Figure 6.14 – Save Logs to File Page

• Select/Unselect all – check this box to select or unselect all logs

o Event log – check this box to generate a file with the Event log
o Number of log items – enter the number of events to include in the log
file
o Data log – check this box to generate a file with the Data log
o Number of log items – enter the number of events to include in the log
file
o Choose control unit – drop-down list of controllers and/or CAN Nodes
that record data logs; select a unit from which to generate the data log
o Energy log – check this box to generate a file with the Energy log
o Generator log – check this box to generate a file for the Generator log
o Battery cycle log – check this box to generate a file with the Battery
cycle log

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 241

o Battery test log – check this box to generate a file for the Battery test
log
o Change log – check this box to generate a file with the Change log
o Number of log items – enter the number of events to include in the log
file
o Module inventory – check this box to generate a file with the inventory of
all controllers, monitors, and power modules connected and operating in
the power system
• Generate log(s) – after checking one or more log boxes, the Generate log(s)
button can be pressed to generate a file for one or more logs. A status
indicator appears to the right of the button to show progress on generating
the log file.
NOTE: Only one file is generated by clicking this button; it contains all logs
that are selected.
NOTE: The log file generated is in the comma-separated values (CSV) format
and uses semicolons (;) as delimiters. Typical spreadsheet applications can
open CSV files.
• Download log – after the log file is generated, the Download log button can
be pressed to save the file to the computer

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
242 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Accounts Log
The Accounts log page displays login and logout attempts of all users, as well as
failed login attempts.

Figure 6.15 – Accounts Log Page

NOTE: This page is only viewable with admin login.

• # - record number; up to 20 records are shown on each page

• Account – user or account name associated with the activity

NOTE: “Illegal user” means that the user name entered during the attempt
does not exist in the controller. It indicates a failed login attempt, as the
controller does not permit access by non-existent user names. A failed
password attempt is logged as “Illegal password.”

• Description – action type taken by the account (log in or log out)

• IP Address – IP address of the computer used for the account

• Date – date of the account activity, with format Year-Month-Day (YYYY-MM-

DD)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Logs 243

• Time – time of the account activity, with format Hour:Minute:Second

(HH:MM:SS, 24-hour clock)
There are three navigation buttons in the bottom right corner: First page, Previous
page, and Next page. Each page lists 20 events.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
244 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

7. Comm
C ands
The Com
mmands se ection conttains sets of
o actions that can be manually y executedd
through
h the controller. These actions principally
p c
consist of resets, tes
sts, softwa
are
upgrade
es, and load
ding or sav
ving configuration filees.

Systtem
The Sys
stem page contains commands
c for system
m-wide actions involv
ving resets and
audio/v
visual notification (LED
D, buzzer) tests.
t

Figure 7.1
1 – System Co
ommands Pa
age (Control login)

• Reset
R Manuual Alarm(ss)/Silence Buzzer – resets man nually-trigg
gered alarm
ms
and the buz zzer. This is useful to
o silence nu
uisance ala
arms and m minor alarm
ms
trriggered while
w performing mainttenance.
NOTE:
N This silences the built-in buzzer for the Smarttpack2 Mas
ster contro
oller,
not any aux
xiliary or ex
xternal buzzer boardss.
• Reset
R Numb ber of Mod
dules – rese
ets the num
mber of co ontrollers, m
monitors, a
and
power
p moduules when any are ad
dded or remmoved from m the syste em. This
eliminates communica
c ation alarm
ms when a uunit is perm
manently re emoved froom

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Commands 245

the system by resetting the number of units to the number that are currently
connected to the controller.
• Delete Event Log – erases the Event Log; only available with admin login
(grayed out otherwise)
• Set Default Configuration – resets system values to the defaults for the
selection made on the Choose system voltage drop-down list to the right.
CAUTION: This action is a system reset, removing customized configurations
and restoring default values. It returns the controller to its original
production state and may require assistance from Eltek to restore settings
to post-production values (i.e., the settings it had when shipped for customer
use).
o Choose system voltage – drop-down list of nominal dc system voltages
• Set Default Configuration with Default-xml files – resets system values
using a properly-formatted Eltek XML file. An XML file can be used to
configure all controller parameters.
• Set Default Calibration – resets controllers and CAN Nodes to default
calibration values. The unit to be reset is selected in the Choose unit drop-
down list to the right. This is useful when manual calibration was
unsuccessful, possibly triggering measurement and calculation problems.
o Choose unit – drop-down list of connected controllers and CAN Nodes
that have calibration reset
• Controller led-test – command to test the notification LEDs on the controller
• Rectifier led-test – command to test the notification LEDs on the rectifiers
• Buzzer test – command to test the buzzer in the controller

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
246 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Battery
The Battery page features commands for battery actions.

Figure 7.2 – Battery Commands Page

• Start Battery Test – starts a manual battery test based on the configuration
on the Test page
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Test
Either the Simplified Test or the Normal Test is executed (depending on
which one is selected on the Test page).
• Stop Battery Test – stops a battery test that is in progress
NOTE: Manually stopping a battery test causes the results to be discarded.
• Start Battery Boost – starts battery boost charging based on the
configuration on the Boost page
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Boost
• Stop Battery Boost – stops battery boost charging
• Start Battery Equalize – starts battery equalize charging based on the
configuration on the Equalize page
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Equalize
• Stop Battery Equalize – stops battery equalize charging

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Commands 247

Output Test
The Output Test page has commands for testing output channels on controllers
and CAN Nodes.

Figure 7.3 – Output Test Page (Admin login)

NOTE: Activating output channels triggers alarm notifications.

NOTE: Output tests require admin login.
• Output Test – drop-down list of controllers and CAN Nodes with output
channels that can be tested. The output channels mirror the Outputs tab of
the Alarm Configuration section:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Outputs
NOTE: Activating a Virtual Input channel on the Output Test page activates
the notification on the Virtual Inputs page. The difference is that activation
on the Output Test is temporary (it deactivates after the Output Test
duration expires); a Virtual Input activated on the Virtual Inputs page
remains so until manually deactivated.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
248 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Table 7.1 – Controller and CAN Node Output Channels

Controller or CAN Node Output Channel(s)

SP2 Master 1 Buzzer

(Smartpack2 Master) Virtual 1-4

SP2 BasicInd X Batt contactor

(Smartpack2 Basic Industrial) Load contactor 1-2
Alarm output 1-3

SP2 Basic X Batt contactor

(Smartpack2 Basic) Load contactor 1-2

I/O unit X Alarm output 1-6

(I/O Monitor, Types 1-3)

SmartPack S 1 Alarm output 1-6

(Smartpack S) Batt contactor
Load contactor
Buzzer
Virtual 1-4

Compack 1 Alarm output 1-3

(Compack) Batt contactor
Load contactor
Virtual 1-4

• Output Test duration – time duration (in seconds) for each test activation

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Commands 249

Virtual Inputs
The Virtual Inputs page is for activating and deactivating Virtual Inputs of
controller units.

Figure 7.4 – Virtual Inputs Commands Page

• Description – names of the Virtual Inputs

• Activate/Deactivate – buttons to activate or deactivate Virtual Inputs that
are enabled. Inactive Virtual Inputs have a button labeled Activate; active
sVirtual Inputs have a red button labeled Deactivate. If any Virtual Inputs are
not enabled, the button is grayed out and labeled Disabled.
NOTE: Virtual Inputs are enabled and configured under the Alarm
Configuration page:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Inputs > [Controller] Input Configuration
• Event – shows the alarm event that is configured for the Virtual Input
• Alarm Group – shows the alarm group that is configured for the Virtual Input

Software Upgrade
The Software Upgrade page is for upgrading the software for each controller and
CAN Node connected to the power system.
NOTE: For more details on this procedure and additional methods for performing a
software upgrade, please see Eltek document 370036.063 – Software Upgrade
Procedure.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
250 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 7.5 – Software Upgrade Page (Smartpack2 only)

NOTE: This feature is available for Smartpack2 controllers only and requires
administrator (admin) permissions.
• Unit table – lists all connected controllers and CAN Nodes
o Type – name of the controller or CAN Node unit
o Part # - Eltek part number of the unit
o Ver # - revision number of the unit (hardware)
o Serial # - unique serial number of the unit
o SW part # - Eltek part number of the embedded software
o SW Ver # - revision number of the software on the unit
o Status – status indicator for the unit (whether or not it is in alarm)
• Selected Unit – Information fields for a unit that is selected on the table
• Start Software Update – click this button to start the software update,
using the latest file saved to the SD card
NOTE: The software file must be loaded on to the SD card. Alternatively,
software can be upgraded from a file on the computer by using the Eltek
Network Utility.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Commands 251

Load/Save Config
The Load/Save Config pages facilitate loading and saving controller configuration
files.

Load Config File

The Load Config File page is for loading a configuration file from the computer into
the controller.
NOTE: HEX configuration files may not load properly if the software for the
controller or CAN Node was upgraded after the HEX file was saved. Please contact
Eltek for assistance if this occurs.

Figure 7.6 – Load Config File Page

• Select file – click the Browse… button to find the configuration file (either an
XML or Intel HEX file) on the computer
• Unit table – once a configuration file is selected, the applicable controller or
CAN Node device is selected for upload
• Upload Config file – this button appears in the lower right corner when a
configuration file is selected. Once clicked, a progress bar appears to the left
of the button.
NOTE: If the selected file is not correctly configured for Eltek units, a
warning appears below the file information area stating that the file does not
contain the correct information.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
252 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Save Config File

The Save Config File page is for saving a configuration file to the computer.
NOTE: It is recommended that configuration files for each controller and CAN Node
be saved and stored as backup after the power system is configured, as well as
each time setpoints are reconfigured.

Figure 7.7 – Save Config File (First Page)

• Select/Unselect all – the check box selects and unselects all devices on the
unit table below it
• Unit table – check the box on the far left of each row to select the
controllers and CAN Nodes for which a configuration files should be saved
• Next – click the Next button (below the table) after selecting all devices
from which a configuration file is to be saved to the computer. Another page
appears for saving the files.
• Back – click the Back button to return to the Save Config File page
• Start reading files – click this button to start assembling the configuration
files. A notice appears indicating that the selected file(s) will be read. Click
OK to continue.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Commands 253

Figure 7.8 – Save Config File (Second Page)

• Stop reading files – this button appears after the Start reading files button
has been clicked. Click the Stop reading files button to terminate the
reading progress. A progress bar appears below this button showing the
progress of generating the configuration file.
Once the configuration file is created, a dialog box opens asking where the
file should be saved. Choose the location on the computer where the file is
to be saved.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
254 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 7.9 – Safe Config Page (Reading File)

• Read next file – If multiple files are selected, this button appears after each
file is read, along with a Cancel button. Click Read next file to continue to
the next configuration file, or click Cancel to stop reading configuration files.

Figure 7.10 – Save Config Page (Read Next File)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Statistics
s 255

8. Statist
S tics
The pag
ge for statistics provides downlo
oadable files for a va
ariety of system
measurements an nd calculatiions.

NOTE: Currently,
C the
t Smartp pack S conttroller has the Statisstics categgory but does
not support it. This
s category
y is not ava
ailable on C
Compack co ontrollers.

Statistics
The Sta
atistics sec
ction is for statistics pages.
p

Brow
wse SD Card
C
The Broowse SD Ca ard page is an FTP vie
ewer for sta
atistics file
es on the c
controller’s SD
card; this is availab
ble on the Smartpackk2 controller only.

Figure 8.1
8 – Browse
e SD Card (Sm
martpack2 on
nly)

NOTE: This
T page may
m be blo
ocked if the
e network d
does not p
permit acce
ess to FTP
servers.
• FTP
F root –p product doc cumentatioon and softtware filess at the FTP
P root
directory; th
here are als
so other diirectories:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
256 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

o CONFIG – directory containing configuration files for controller and CAN

Node units connected to the system
o STATS – directory containing system measurements and performance
statistics (such as current, voltage, temperature), sorted by year. Files for
individual input feeds and temperature inputs are also available (under the
FEEDERS and TEMPS directories, respectively).
o LOG – directory containing event and data logs

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Help 257

9. Help
H
The Hellp button opens
o the Eltek
E Help System
S forr the web interface (C
CWUI –
Controller Web-baased User Interface).
I Please co
ontact Elte
ek for the la
atest access
credenttials.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
258 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

10. Logout
The Loggout button n ends the current se
ession, logg
ging out off the user a
account an
nd
returnin
ng to the la
anding pagee.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr

Procedures

259

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
260 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

1. Procedures Overview
Setup of controller functions often requires configuring parameters in several areas
of the Web Interface. This section describes the procedures for common controller
tasks and functions according to the following categories:
• Setup
• Operation
• Administration

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 261

2. Setup
S
This sec
ction descrribes proce
edures for basic
b contrroller setup
p that can be
accomp plished thro
ough the Web
W Interface.

Setting Flo
oat (Re
eferenc
ce) Vo
oltage
CAUTION:: Refer to the
t battery y manufactturer's documented s specificatio
ons
for recommended flo oat voltagee per batte
ery cell. It iss the user's
responsibility to enter proper battery
b parrameters.
NOTE: Float
F voltag
ge can be calculated
c based on tthe voltage
e required per battery
y
cell.
To set float
f voltag
ge through the web in
nterface:
1. Click
C on the
e System Conf.
C icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on the
e Power System butto
on (below tthe Power
System
S heaading), then
n choose System
S Volltages.
3. Locate the fields
f calle
ed Reference voltage e. One is fo
or voltage p
per cell (Ce
ell),
and the oth
her is total voltage for the syste
em (Total).
4. Enter the vo
oltage requ uired using
g either volttage per ceell or total system
voltage. The
e float volttage for the other fie ld is autom
matically caalculated w
when
th
he change is saved.
5. Click
C the dis
skette icon
n in the low
wer right-ha he change. The
and corner to save th
voltage valuue in paren
ntheses updates to re eflect the n
new float v
voltage vallue.
Float vo
oltage is no
ow set.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
262 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Fig
gure 2.1 – Se
etting Float Voltage
V thro
ough the Web
b Interface

Setting Rectifierr Current Lim

mit
Rectifier current limit restricts total output curre nt of all rectifiers.
NOTE: Rectifier
R cu
urrent limit manages total
t rectiffier output rather thaan output p per
rectifierr. Because Eltek rectifiers are coonstant-poower, this mmeans thatt voltage is s
adjusted d to limit current. Theerefore, the controlle current limit
er overridess rectifier c
when th here is any conflict with battery y voltage seettings.
To set rectifier currrent limit through
t th
he web inte
erface:
1. Click
C on the
e System Conf.
C icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on Rec
ctifier buttton (below the Powerr System
heading), thhen choosee Configuraation.
3. To
T turn on rectifier
r current limit, locate the
e Current liimit line an
nd select the
check box next
n to the
e word Enab ble.
4. To
T set the current
c limit value, en
nter the de
esired maxiimum curre
ent value in
n
th
he field Current limitt value.
NOTE:
N This value is fo
or total rectifier outpu
ut, not indiividual recttifiers.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 263

5. Click
C the dis
skette icon
n in the low
wer right-ha
and corner to save ch
hanges.
Rectifier current limit is now set.

Figure 2.2 – Setting

g Rectifier Current
C Limit through the
e Web Interfa
ace

Battery Co
onfigurration
Multi-ba
ay power syystems (lik
ke the Eltek
k Scalable)) may require some setup for th
he
followin
ng features
s:
• Number
N of banks
b
• Capacity
C an
nd number of battery strings
• Setting
S and
d/or editing
g the batte
ery table
To navig
gate to the
e General Battery
B con
nfiguration
n page:
1. Click
C on the
e System Conf.
C icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on Batttery butto
on (below tthe Power System
heading). The Configu uration pag ge appearss by defaullt (the firstt page unde
er
th
he Battery y sub-menu u).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
264 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.3
2 – Generall Battery Con
nfiguration P
Page

The follo
owing secttions expla
ain the purp
pose and c
configuratio
on of each feature.

Numb
ber of Banks
B
The Nummber of ba anks param meter refleccts the tottal number of controlllers that arre
equippeed to monittor batteriees within th
he system.. In multi-ba
ay systems (like the
Eltek Sc
calable sysstem) the value
v showwn should mmatch the ttotal numbber of bays
(both re
ectifier and distributio
on) that are
e present inn the syste
em lineup.
NOTE: In I the Scala
able power system, iff the valuee in the Nummber of baanks field is
s
not the same as th he total nu
umber of baays (both rrectifier and distribution bays), tthen
adjust itt to match by typing in the num
mber of bay ys present in the lineu
up. This
affects how many y Smartpac ck2 Basic In
ndustrial co
ontrollers aappear on ccertain pagges.

Capacity an
nd Number of Battery
B y String
gs
It is assumed that all battery
y strings co
onnected tto the systtem are red
dundant annd
thus have the samme ampere--hour capa acity. To en
nter the ba
attery Ah c
capacity:
1. Enter the Ah capacity for a singlle string in the Capac
city [per sttring] field.
2. Enter the nu
umber of battery
b strings field.
strings in the Number off Battery s
The con
ntroller automatically
y multiplies the amperre-hour cap
pacity by tthe numberr of
battery strings and shows thhat value at
a the bottoom of the m
main displaay screen.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 265

Figure 2.4
2 – Battery
y Capacity on
n Display Scrreen

Batte
ery Tab
ble
The batttery table permits en
ntering or uploading
u c
custom batttery speciifications.
Such sp
pecification paring test data to kn
ns help determine batttery healtth by comp nown
perform
mance value es.
By default the values are fille
ed in by the Eltek Std
d (Eltek Sta
andard) table. To
change either the values or the
t table:
1. Click
C the Ed
dit Battery Table in th
he Battery
y Type line..
2. The
T Battery y table win
ndow appea ars. By deffault the o
option to us
se Eltek's
predefined
p battery table is enab
bled.
3. Uncheck
U the Enable box.
b The window populates with
h the batte
ery table and
action butto
ons.
4. Iff any chang
ges are ma
ade, be sure
e to click th
he Save ico
on (diskettte) in the lo
ower
right hand corner.
c

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
266 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.5
5 – Battery Table Page (ttable to be lo
oaded)

The follo
owing actio
ons can be
e taken, depending on
n what is desired:
• To
T load a ta
able availab ble in the controller s ystem (usu
ually just the Eltek
Standard
S ta
able), selecct the tablee from the Template Options drropdown
menu.
m Then
n click the Load Table e button. TThe table a
and values load into tthe
Table
T Detaiils box in rig
ght side off the windo
ow.
• To
T edit the loaded tabble, select the
t Edit ta able button
n in the leftt side of th
he
window.
w Th
his action also
a allows rows to bee added or deleted (uusing the tw wo
buttons
b imm
mediately below
b the Edit
E table button).
• To
T either uppload a batttery table file or to save the cu
urrent table
e to a file, c
click
th
he File ope
eration tab
b, to the rig
ght of the TTable Details tab.
o To uploa
ad a battery table file
e, click the Browse… b button to oopen an
explore window
w an
nd locate th
he file. Thee file must have a ".tb
bl" extensioon.
Once loc
cated, select the file and
a click th he Upload file buttonn to load it into
the conttroller.
o To save the curren
nt battery table
t as a ffile, click th
he Save to file… button.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 267

Figure 2.6
2 – Battery
y Table - File Operation P
Page

Setting Battery Chargi

C ing Currrent L
Limit
Battery current lim
mit restrictts charge current. Elte
ek controlllers have two separate
current limit param
meters for different power
p situaations: Mains (normall AC utility
service)) and Generator (AC backup).
b
NOTE: A shunt is required
r in order to us
se battery current lim
mit.
To set battery
b cha
arging current limit th
hrough the
e web interfface:
1. Click
C on the
e System Conf.
C icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on Batttery butto
on (below tthe Power System
heading), thhen choosee Current Limit.
L
3. To
T turn on battery
b currrent limit, locate the
e Battery c
current limiitation line
e
and check the
t box nex xt to the word
w Enablee.
4. To
T set curre ent limit va alues, enterr the presc
cribed max
ximum curre ent value in
th
he fields fo
or Mains fe eed currentt limit (normal AC serrvice) and G
Generator
fe
eed curren nt limit (if applicable;
a check sitee and generrator speciifications).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
268 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

NOTE:
N Norm
mally the vaalue for Ge enerator fe
eed currentt limit is lo
ower than
Mains
M feed current lim
mit. If the Generator
G ffeed curre
ent limit is not going tto
be
b used, theen simply put
p the sam me value here as the Mains feed current
limit.
5. Click
C the dis
skette icon
n in the low
wer right-ha
and corner to save ch
hanges.
Battery charging current
c limit is now se
et.

Figure 2.7 – Setting Batttery Charging Current LLimit through

h the Web Intterface

Battery Dis
scharg
ge Testting
CAUTION:: Battery discharge teesting requuires speciffications frrom the
battery manufacture
m er. DO NOTT proceed w with batterry testing oof any kindd
without ha
aving the documente
d ed specifica
ations on h
hand. If una available,
contactt the battery manufaccturer directly. Eltek does not p
provide batttery
discharg
ge specific
cations.
xecuting battery disc
There are two metthods of ex charge testting: Simpllified and
Normal.
• The
T Simpliffied test do oes not use e the batte
ery table fo
or referenc ce (see the
section “Batttery Table e” beginning on page 265); inste ead, it relie
es on user-
entered values to determine whether the b are able to discharge for
batteries a
thhe entire duration
d specified (Ma ax duration n) or meet the amp-h hour value ((Max
discharge) before
b falliing to the voltage
v peer cell specified in thee End voltage
fiield. All three parame eters are us ser-definedd, but mustt be within n the

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 269

specifications provided by the battery manufacturer. The test stops when

any one of the parameters mentioned above (Max duration, Max discharge,
or End voltage) is reached.
• The Normal Test relies on the battery table for reference, using the battery
specifications to determine end voltage. The only editable parameter that
affects termination of the test is Max duration.
NOTE: Under Normal Test, battery discharge results are evaluated only if the
test is stopped by reaching End voltage. Results are discarded if a test is
terminated due to reaching Max duration or any other reasons (such as
manually stopping the test).
Other configurable parameters on the Battery Test Configuration page:
• Guard time is the number of hours that a battery test should be delayed
after a loss of AC input power.
• Interval test facilitates regular, periodic battery testing and also
accommodates the inhibiting testing during certain months (for example,
summer months).
• Automatic test initiates testing when AC input power is lost. Data is
recorded only if End voltage is reached.
• Discontinuance test is an advanced battery feature that is used to detect
defective or failed battery cells in unbalanced battery strings. It requires at
least two battery strings and a separate shunt in each string. The
Discontinuance test is not covered in this document.
Battery discharge testing is designed to record the results of battery discharge—
whether scheduled, manually started, or caused by an outage of ac power. The
following figures show the Battery Test page for both Simplified and Normal test
parameters. The first figure is for the Simplified test:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
270 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.8 – Battery Test Page (Simp

plified test selected)

The follo
owing figure shows which
w fields
s are not c onfigurable
e when sett for a Norm
mal
battery test:

Figure 2.9 – Battery Te

est Page (Norrmal test sellected)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 271

To set battery
b disc
charge tes
sting throug
gh the web
b interface
e:
1. Click
C on the
e System Conf.
C icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on Batttery butto
on (below tthe Power System
heading).
3. Click
C on Tes
st.
4. Enter settin uired for the batteriess. Refer to the descriptions of tthe
ngs as requ
fiields above
e.
5. Click
C on the
e save icon (diskette) to save ch
hanges.
NOTE: The
T battery y table is lo
ocated und
der the Connfiguration
n menu. To access the
battery table, choose System m Conf. > Power
P Sysstem > Batttery > Con
nfiguration
n>
[Edit ba
attery table
e].

Figurre 2.10 – Editt Battery Disscharge Tablle

NOTE: The
T battery y table can
n be adjuste
ed only thrrough the w
web interfa
ace. It cann
not
be chan
nged throug
gh the disp
play.
See the Manual Battery Discha
e section “M arge Test” for instruc
ctions on m
manually
executing a battery discharg
ge test.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
272 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Battery Temperature Compensation

CAUTION: Battery temperature compensation requires specifications from the
battery manufacturer. DO NOT proceed without having the documented
specifications on hand. If unavailable, contact the battery manufacturer directly.
Eltek does not provide battery manufacturer specifications.
Battery temperature compensation adjusts battery charging voltage after a
predefined temperature threshold has been exceeded. The reference voltage and
temperature slope are specifications provided by the battery manufacturer.
Maximum and minimum compensation voltage should also be defined to protect
load equipment.
The fields available are:
• Temperature compensation – check the box to enable Temperature
Compensated Charging parameters. Clicking again on the box (uncheck)
disables the parameters.
• Minimum compensation voltage – minimum charging voltage per battery cell
(protects connected load equipment).
• Maximum compensation voltage – maximum charging voltage per battery
cell (protects connected load equipment).
• Reference voltage – charging voltage per battery cell recommended by the
battery manufacturer at the reference temperature specified in the
“Reference Temperature” field.
NOTE: This field is the same parameter as Reference voltage (Cell) on the
System Voltages page (System Conf. > Power System > Power System >
System Voltages).
• Reference temperature – the reference temperature in degrees Celsius that
the battery manufacturer specifies for the charging voltage entered in the
“Reference Voltage” field.
• Temperature slope – compensation factor in millivolts per degree Celsius per
battery cell recommended by the battery manufacturer
NOTE: It is necessary to connect battery temperature probes to the input(s) of the
controller(s) to be used for this feature. Please see the User Guide provided with
the power system controllers for details on what kind of temperature probes to use
and where to install them on the controller(s).
The following figure shows the Battery Temperature Compensation page in the
Web Interface:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 273

Fig
gure 2.11 – Setting
S Batte
ery Tempera
ature Compe nsation thro
ough the Web
b Interface

To set battery
b tem
mperature compensation throug
gh the web
b interface
e:
1. Click
C on the
e System Conf.
C icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on Batttery (below wer System
w the Pow m heading).
3. Click
C on Tem
mpComp.
4. Enter settin
ngs as requ
uired for the batteriess. See the ssection “Te
empComp””
beginning
b on page 1133 for detailled descrip
ptions of th
he fields.
5. Click
C on the
e Save icon (diskette image) to ssave chang
ges.
NOTICE:
N In larger powwer systemms (like the Eltek Scala able), it is n
necessary to
know
k which h ID number is assigneed to the S Smartpack2 2 Basic Industrial
controller within
w the control
c systtem; this hhelps identify the con ntroller in thhe
Web
W Interfa ace. Check k the bay la
abel on the inside of tthe bay doo or (at the ttop)
fo
or the conttroller ID nu
umber. The e line is ma
arked as "S
SP2 BasicIn nd _____".

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
274 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.12 – Sc
calable Bay Controller
C Ad
ddress Labell (Distribution Bay label s
shown here)

6. Click
C on Ala
arm Conf. in
n the top menu.
m
7. Click
C on Batttery in the
e left menu
u. Wait for the window to popullate.
8. Under
U Batteery Alarm Configurat
C tion, locate
e the Batte
eryVoltage
e line (usua
ally
line #1) and click on th
he gear icon to open tthe Edit wiindow.

Figure
e 2.13 – Batte
ery Voltage Alarm Monittor

9. Locate the Alarm

A Monnitor line an
nd check the Enable box. This e enables
battery
b volttage monittoring, whic
ch is requirred for batttery tempe
erature
compensation.
10. Click
C on the
e Save icon to save th
he change.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 275

11. Back
B on the
e Battery page
p (under Alarm Co
onf.), click o
on the Batttery Bank
section hea
ading. Wait for the win
ndow to po
opulate.
NOTE:
N Therre is only one Battery y Bank hea ading for Sm
martpack S and
Compack
C co
ontrollers; for Smartppack2, therre may be m more than one. The
number nex xt to Batteery Bank coorrespondss to either tthe Smartppack2 Basiic or
Smartpack2
S 2 Basic Induustrial controller ID w
where the bbattery pro
obes are
in
nstalled.
NOTE:
N If the Smartpack2 Basic or o Basic Ind
dustrial controller ID d
does not
appear in thhis list, it may
m be nece essary to a
adjust the N
Number off banks vallue
n the Batte
in ery Configu uration win
ndow. Seee “Configuraation” beginning on page
107 for deta ails.

Figure 2.14 – Battery

B Tem
mperature Pro
obe Inputs (C
Controller)

12. Locate the BatteryTe

empX.X mo
onitors.
NOTICE:
N Baattery Temmp Probe inpputs are nuumbered according to the ID of the
controller and the inpuut position. For exammple, in the e Eltek Scallable plantt,
BatteryTem
B mp1.1 means that tha at input is in the firstt Smartpac
ck2 Basic
In
ndustrial co
ontroller an
nd is input #1 on thatt controllerr.
13. Click
C on the
e Edit icon (gears)
( of the
t first prrobe input tto be enab
bled.
14. Locate the Alarm
A Mon
nitor line an
nd check the Enable box to ena
able the inp
put.
15. Click
C on the
e Save icon to save th
he change.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
276 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

16. Repeat
R step
ps 13 to 15
5 for any re
emaining prrobe inputss to be ena
abled.
The tem
mperature probes
p are now set and battery
y temperatture compe
ensation is
enabled
d.

Temperatu
ure Pro
obe Settup
Temperrature prob be setup foor ambient temperatu ure readinggs is supported by botth
Eltek coontrollers and
a Flexi Monitors. Th he followinng sectionss describe tthe setup
procedu ure in the Web
W Interfa ace for both types of devices. FFor the phyysical
installattion of the temperatuure probe(ss), please refer to the
e documentation for tthe
controlller or Flexi Monitor.

Controllers
Eltek co
ontrollers are
a equippe ed with pro
ogrammablle input terrminals tha
at support
temperaature probes. Smartp pack S and
d Compack controllers have the e input
terminals located on the unitts themsellves. Smarrtpack2 coontrollers re
equire either
the Basic or Basic Industrial devices.
d
NOTE: The
T Tempe erature X.Y
Y and ProggInput X.Y aalarm mon nitors on th
he controlle
er’s
Inputs heading
h are
e the samee physical terminals.
t If the Temmperature a alarm moniitor
is enabled, then th
he correspo
onding ProogInput mo onitor is dissabled; and
d vice-versa
a.

Figure 2.15 – Temp Prob

be Terminals (Smartpack
k2 Basic)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 277

The follo
owing figure illustrates how the
e same terminals are disabled ffor use as
battery temperatu ure probes:

Figu
ure 2.16 – Ba
attery Temp Probe Termi nals (Smartp
pack2 Basic))

NOTE: TheT BatterryTemp X.Y Y alarm moonitor unde er the Batttery Bank h
heading for the
controlller (on the Battery pa
age) uses the
t same te erminals ass Temperaature X.Y aand
ProgInp
put X.Y monitors on the Inputs page.
p If the BatteryT Temp alarm
m monitor iis
enabled
d, then the corresponding Temp perature an nd ProgInpput monitorrs are disab
bled.

Fig
gure 2.17 – In
nput 1 Used for BattTem
mp and Disab led for Temp
perature and
d ProgInput

NOTE: For
F the Smmartpack S controller, only inputt terminals 1-4 can be e used for
tempera
ature moniitoring. If so
s utilized, the corressponding ProgInput is
s disabled.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
278 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.18
8 – Temperatture and Programmable IInput Monito
ors for Smarttpack S

NOTE: For
F the Commpack con ntroller, all three inputt terminalss can be us
sed for
temperaature moniitoring. If so
s utilized, the corressponding ProgInput a alarms are
disabled
d.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 279

Figure 2.19 – Temperrature and Prrogrammable

e Input Monittors for Com
mpack

If tempe
erature proobes are ins
stalled for ambient re
eadings annd connected to a
controlller’s tempe
erature/proogrammable input(s),, use the fo structions to
ollowing ins
enable the
t probe input(s):
1. Click
C on Ala
arm Conf. in
n the top menu.
m
2. Click
C on Inputs in the left
l menu.
3. After
A the window populates, clic
ck on the h eading for the controoller that the
te
emperature probe is connected d to (e.g., S
SP2 BasicIn
nd X Input C
Configurattion
or Smartpacck S Input Configurat
C tion).
NOTE:
N If the system uses
u Smarttpack2 Bassic or Smarrtpack2 Ba
asic Industrrial
controllers and they do
d not appeear on the Inputs pag
ge, it may b
be necessaary
to
o adjust th
he Number of banks value
v on th
he Battery page unde er System
Configurati
C ion. See “C
Configuratio
on” beginn
ning on pag
ge 107 for d
details.
4. Locate the Temperatu
ure X.Y mo
onitors.
NOTE:
N The monitor nu umbers (1.1, 1.2, 1.3) correlate to the term minal numb
bers
of the contrroller inputts (1, 2, and
d 3). The fiirst numbe
er (X) indica
ates the
controller ID
D number, and
a the second (Y) in ndicates the input num mber.
5. Click
C on the
e Edit icon (next
( to the list numb nch the edit window.
ber) to laun
6. The
T first line
e item is fo
or enabling
g the probe
e input. Che
eck the Enable box to
o
enable the temperatu
t ure probe.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
280 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

7. Make
M any otther adjusttments dessired for th
he tempera
ature probe
e paramete
ers,
in
ncluding ala
arm threshholds at the
e bottom.
8. Click
C on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right hand corner tto save changes.
9. Repeat
R step
ps 4 throug
gh 8 for any remaining tempera
ature probe
es to be sett.
10. Click
C e Save icon in the low
on the wer right hand corner tto save changes.
The tem
mperature probes
p are now enabled.

Flexi Monito
ors
If tempeerature proobes are ins
stalled usinng a Flexi M
Monitor, usse the follo
owing
instructtions to ena
able the prrobe input((s):
1. Click
C on Ala
arm Conf. in
n the top menu.
m
2. Click
C on the
e menu pag
ge on the le
eft where tthe Flexi Monitor appears.
NOTE:
N Wheere the Flex
xi Monitor appears
a epends on iits Monitorr Type
de
assignmentt under the
e System Configurati
C ion section
n. To checkk, navigate
e to:
System
S Conf. > Powe
er System
m > Controll System > Flexi Mon
nitor
See
S Table 2.3
2 - Flexi Monitor
M Typ
pes and Corrrespondin ng Alarm He eadings for
th
he Alarm Configurat
C ion menu page
p that tthe Flexi Monitor appears given a
Monitor
M Typ
pe assignm
ment. By deefault, the Flexi Monitor is set tto Std
Fleximon
F an
nd appears
s under the
e Inputs paage of the AAlarm Configuration
section.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 281

Figure
e 2.20 – Loca
ation of Flexii Monitor Ala
arms (set as Std Fleximon)

3. On
O the apprropriate page, click on
n the FlexMMon headinng to expand the Flexxi
Monitor
M list of alarm monitors.
m By
B default, the Flexi M
Monitor is s
set to Monitor
Type
T Std Fleximon an nd appears on the Inp
puts page aas Contr FllexMon X.
4. There
T are 16 channels
s on the Fle
exi Monitorr. Identify tthe channe
el with the
te
emperature probe co
onnected, and
a click thhe Edit icon n beside th
he
corresponding ProgInp
put.
NOTE:
N By default,
d eac
ch terminal is labeledd as ProgInput X.YY, X represen
nts
th
he ID numbber assigneed to the Fllexi Monito
or, and YY rrepresents
s the
programma
p ble input number.
n
5. When
W the Edit window
w opens, cliick on the C
Config tab
b.
6. On nfiguration drop-down
O the Conffig page, click on the Input Con n list and
select Temp
perature.
7. Click
C on the
e Save icon in the low e Edit window to save
wer right corner of the e
th
he change. Note that the inputt descriptioon changess to Tempe erature X.Y
YY.
8. Click
C on the
e General ta
ab.
9. Locate the Alarm
A Monnitor line ne
ear the top
p of the page and che
eck the Ena
able
box.
b This en
nables the alarm mon nitor.
10. Note
N the ap
ppearance of four ala
arm eventss at the botttom of the Edit wind
dow.
Set
S the temmperature thresholds
t and desire
ed Alarm GGroups for eeach Eventt.
11. Click
C on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right corner to sav
ve the chan
nges.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
282 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

12. Click
C anywh
here outsid
de of the Ed
dit window
w to close itt.
The tem
mperature probe
p conn
nected to the
t Flexi Mo
onitor is no
ow set.

Setting Ala
arms
Alarm settings are e configure
ed in the Allarm Configguration section of b
both the weeb
interfacce and disp
play menus. Alarm mo onitors for v
various inp
puts are assigned to
alarm groups. Alarrm groups, in turn, aree mapped tto output cchannels, including
output relays.
r Theese assignm
ments are user-config gurable. Th
he following diagram
illustrattes how ala
arm monitoors are assiigned to alarm groups, and how w alarm gro
oups
are map pped to outtput chann
nels.
Alarrm Monitors A
Alarm Group
ps Output Channe
els
Temperatture Probes Ala
arm Group 01 Outpuut Relays
Programm mable Alarm Inpputs Assign
n to... Ala
arm Group 02 Map to
o... Buzzeer
Current Sense (shunt lea ads) … LVD Contactors
C
Internal Controller
C Monito
ors arm Group XX
Ala Modem (Phone)
Virtual Inp
puts al Inputs
Virtua

Figure 2.21 – Alarrm Assignme

ents Overview
w

The nexxt two secttions expla

ain different parts of tthe preced
ding diagram. Input
Alarms explains what
w the inp
puts are onn the Inputts page of tthe contro
oller and ho
ow
gn them to alarm grou
to assig ups. Outpuut Alarm Re elays expla
ains the Ouutputs pag ge of
the controller, how
w to map alarm group ps to relayss, and how
w to rename e alarm grooups.
NOTE: Each
E contro
oller has different ala
arm input/o
output inte
erfaces:
• The
T Compack controlller has thre
ee inputs a
and three o
output relays; they arre
lo
ocated on the
t top of the
t controoller.
• The
T Smartp pack2 controller does s not have aany input/output terrminals built in;
nstead, an Eltek I/O Monitor
in M is re
equired. I/O
O Monitorss feature siix alarm inp
puts
and six outp
put relays.
• The
T Smartp pack S conttroller has six inputs a
and six outtput relays
s; they are
lo
ocated on the
t left sid
de of the coontroller (w
when viewe ed from thee front).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 283

Figure 2.2
22 – Alarms Terminals
T forr Eltek Contrrollers

Inputt Alarms
There are three ca
ategories of
o input alarms:
• Temperatu
T re: Temperrature inpu uts are justt one of sev
veral possiible
designation ns for the in
nput alarm terminals (three for the Compa ack controller;
six for the Smartpack
S S; six for an
a I/O Moniitor2 conne ected to th
he
Smartpack2
S 2). Enablingg the inputt for Tempe erature ind
dicates thatt a
te
emperature probe is connected d to the inp
put termina al selected.
• Virtual
V inpu
ut: Virtual inputs are for
f use as mmanual trig ggers to to
oggle an
assigned Alarm Group p on comma nal associated
and. There is no physsical termin
with
w these; they are "v virtual".
• Programma
P able input (ProgInput
( t): Programmmable inpu uts are thee designatio
ons
fo
or the input alarm terrminals, witth the exceeption of ttemperaturre probes. TThe
programma
p ble input designation
d n can be ussed for rela ay input (no
ormally ope
en or
normally clo
osed), diode matrix, clock
c input,, or voltage
e.
NOTE: The
T input te erminals us
sed for Tem mperature e are the saame physic cal terminaals
used for the Progrrammable inputs (Pro ogInput). Iff the Tempperature input is enab bled,
then the
e corresponding proggrammable e input farth her down oon the list tturns gray and
cannot be configu
ured. Similarly, if the Programma
P able input is enabled, then the
corresponding Temmperature e input turn ns gray andd cannot be e configureed.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
284 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.23 – Temp

perature and ProgInput Monitors
M on a Smartpack2
2 Basic Indus
strial Contro
oller

NOTE: For
F the Sm martpack2 Basic
B and Smartpack
S k2 Basic Ind
dustrial con
ntrollers, th
he
Temperrature X.Y and ProgIn
nput X.Y allarm monittors on the controller’s Inputs
heading
g are the sa
ame physic
cal termina
als. If the T
Temperature alarm m monitor is
enabled
d, then the corresponding ProgInput monittor is disabbled; and vice-versa.

Figure 2.24 – Temp Prob

be Terminals (Smartpack
k2 Basic)

The follo
owing figure illustrates how the
e same terminals are disabled ffor use as
battery temperatu ure probes:

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 285

Figu
ure 2.25 – Ba
attery Temp Probe Termi nals (Smartp
pack2 Basic))

NOTE: For
F the Sm martpack2 Basic
B and Smartpack
S k2 Basic Ind
dustrial con
ntrollers, th
he
BatteryyTemp X.Y alarm mon nitor under the Batteery Bank heeading for tthe controller
(on the Battery paage) uses the
t same terminals ass Tempera ature X.Y aand ProgInp put
X.Y monnitors on th
he Inputs page.
p If the
e BatteryT
Temp alarm m monitor iss enabled,
then thee corresponding Temmperature anda ProgIn put monito ors are disaabled.

Fig
gure 2.26 – In
nput 1 Used for BattTem
mp and Disab led for Temp
perature and
d ProgInput

NOTE: For
F the Smmartpack S controller, only inputt terminals 1-4 can be e used for
tempera
ature moniitoring. If so
s utilized, the corressponding ProgInput is
s disabled.
NOTE: For
F the Commpack con ntroller, all three inputt terminalss can be us
sed for
temperaature moniitoring. If so
s utilized, the corressponding ProgInput a alarms are
disabled
d.
To setup an input alarm thro
ough the web interfac
ce:
1. Click
C on the
e Alarm Con
nf. icon in the
t top me
enu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on Inputs and wa
ait for the llist to popu
ulate.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
286 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

3. Find the input to set and

a click on
n the edit ic
con (gears)). Wait for tthe edit
window
w to populate.
p

Figure 2.27
7 – Alarm Inp
puts Page (Co
ompack Controller)

4. Check
C the Enable
E box.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 287

Fig
gure 2.28 – Alarm
A Input E dit Window

5. Set
S the Eve
ent type. Fo
or a virtual input, leav
ve Event ass Event.
6. Select
S the alarm
a group to trigger when the
e alarm eve
ent occurs.
NOTE:
N For Programma
P able Inputs only, click on the Callibration ta
ab. Select tthe
ty
ype of inpu
ut.
7. Click
C the Sa
ave icon (diskette sym
mbol in the lower righ
ht corner) to save
changes.
8. Assign
A the alarm
a grouup to a relay
y, if not do
one so alrea
ady. See th
he subsequ
uent
section for “Output Alarm Relays s”.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
288 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Output Alarrm Relays

Output alarm relay
ys are form
m-C contacts that are
e triggered if mapped
d to one or
arm groups
more ala s.
To set output
o relays through
h the web interface:
1. Click
C on the
e Alarm Con
nf. icon in the
t top me
enu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on Outtputs and w
wait for the list to po
opulate. This
can take ab bout a minuute to complete.
NOTE:
N At th
he top of th
he window is a drop-d down box c called Selecct Unit. Usse
thhis to selecct the conttrol unit to which the alarms are
e connecte ed. This is
particularly
p importantt for the Smmartpack2 Master controller, sinnce the unit
ittself only has
h an audible buzzer to assign to the alarrm groups. For the
Smartpack2
S 2 controller, I/O Monittors are required for external allarm input and
output; the appropriatte I/O Moniitor must b be selectedd in the dro
op-down menu
in
n order to modify
m alarrm relay asssignmentss.
3. For each ala
arm group that
t shouldd trigger an
n output re elay, place a check in
n the
box
b under the
t relay(s)) desired. Relays
R can be assigne ed to multipple alarm
groups,
g and
d alarm groups can triigger multiiple relays..

Fig
gure 2.29 – Alarm
A Outputs Page (Map
pping Examp
ple Shown)

4. Change
C alarrm group names
n as desired to re eflect the alarm to be indicated
d by
th
hat group. Click in the
e Alarm Grroup field tto edit the name.
5. Click
C the Sa
ave icon (diskette sym
mbol in the lower righ
ht corner) to save
changes.
ut alarm is now set up.
The inpu

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 289

Alarm
m Setpo
oints
Since alll alarm parrameters are
a set esse entially in tthe same m
manner, the followingg
instructtions demo onstrate hoow to set Battery
B Volltage alarm
m paramete ers as an
example e. As the foollowing diagram illus
strates, thi s section e
explains ho
ow to set uup
alarm in
nputs (Interrnal Alarm Parameterrs in this ex xample), ho
ow to assig
gn the
parameters to alarm groups,, and how to t assign a alarm groupps to outpu
ut relays.

Figure
e 2.30 – Alarm
m Groups to Output Rela
ays

Please note
n that the
t screens shots are taken
t from
m the Comppack contro
oller; the
process
s is identica
al for Smartpack2 andd Smartpacck S contro
ollers.

Setting Alarrm Batttery Vo

oltage A
Alarm (Examp
ple)
To illusttrate how to
t set an alarm monittor, the folllowing proc
cedure desscribes how
w to
set up the
t Battery y Voltage alarm
a throu
ugh the We eb Interfacee as an exa
ample.
To set alarm
a Batte
ery Voltage
e alarm parrameters tthrough the
e web interface:
1. Click
C on the
e Alarm Con
nf. icon in the
t top me
enu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on the
e Battery a o populate..
and wait for the list to
3. Under
U the Battery
B Ala
arm Configguration ba ge (it should
ar, find BattteryVoltag
be
b line #1) and
a click on
n the Edit icon
i (gear ssymbol).
4. The
T edit win
ndow open
ns. Locate the
t Alarm M
Monitor lin ck the Enable
ne and chec
box.
b
NOTE:
N The edit
e window w may varyy from reviision to rev vision. Somme edit
windows
w ha
ave a General tab and
d a Calibrattion tab; iff so, click on the Gene
eral
ta
ab.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
290 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.3
31 – Battery
y Voltage Ala
arm Configurration

5. At
A the very bottom off the edit window
w is w
where alarmm threshold
ds are set. For
Battery
B Voltage theree are four events:
e Majjor High, M
Minor High, Minor Low
w,
and Major Low.
L Configgure parammeters as d esired. Clic
ck the Save
e icon
(d
diskette sy
ymbol in the lower rig
ght corner) to save chhanges.
6. Note
N the Allarm Groupp assignmeents next to
o each Eve ent line. Click on the
drop-down arrow
a to se
ee the alarrm groups a
available.
The
T output relay assiggnment of the alarm g me
group and the alarm group nam
can be chan
nged on thee Outputs page. In th
his example
e, Alarm Group 06 wiill be
changed for the Majorr Low parameter of th
he Battery
y Voltage alarm.
7. In
n the current edit win hen close the edit
ndow, click the Save icon and th
window.
w
8. Select
S Outp pulate, which
puts in the left menu bar. Wait ffor the window to pop
can take ab
bout a minuute to complete.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 291

Figure 2.32 – Smartpack

k2 Alarm Outtputs Page ((Multiple Con
ntrol/Monito
or Units)

NOTE:
N At th
he top of th
he window is a drop-d down box c called Selecct Unit. Us
se
thhis menu to select th he control unit
u to whic ch the alarrms are connnected. TThis
is
s particularrly important for the Smartpack
S k2 Master c controller, since the u
unit
ittself only has
h an audible buzzer to assign to the alarrm groups. For the
Smartpack2
S 2 controller, I/O Monittors are required for external allarm input and
output; the appropriatte I/O Moniitor must b be selected d in the dro
op-down menu
in
n order to modify
m alarrm relay as
ssignmentss.
9. Locate the line of the alarm grou
up assigned arm event (Alarm Gro
d to the ala oup
06
0 in this ex
xample).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
292 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.33
3 – Alarm Outtput Page (C
Compack Con
ntroller)

10. Click
C in the field underr Alarm Gro
oup and tyype in a disttinctive name for this
s
alarm group p. In this ex
xample, the
e name is c
changed to o BatteryLo owMajor (liine 6
n the prece
in eding figuree).
11. Next,
N selectt the outpu
ut relay thaat the alarmm should ttrigger. In this examplle,
Alarm
A output1 is selected becau use it is the
e default ffor all major alarms. N
Note,
to
oo, that there are onlly three ou
utput alarm m relays forr the Comp pack controoller.
12. Click
C the Sa
ave icon (diskette sym
mbol in the lower righ
ht corner) to save
changes.
13. Return
R to th
he Battery
y Voltage edit
e window
w by clickin
ng on Batte
ery in the le
eft
menu
m bar.
14. Locate BattteryVoltag
ge (line #1) and click o
on the Editt icon (gearr symbol).
15. After
A the window populates, clic
ck on the A
Alarm Group box in th
he Major Lo
ow
event line.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 293

Figurre 2.34 – Batttery Voltage

e Edit Window
w

16. Find and sellect BatterryLowMajo

or.
17. Click
C the Sa
ave icon (diskette sym ht corner) to save
mbol in the lower righ
changes.
The Batttery Voltag
ge alarm monitor
m is now
n set.

Setting Nag
g Alarms
Eltek I/O
O Monitors support th he use of a “nag” or reecurring bu
uzzer alarm
m which, evven
if reset or silenced
d, activatess the buzzeer again affter a configured time
e elapses ffor
as long as the trigggering alarrm group is
s active.
To enab
ble the nag n alarm group:
g alarm featture for an
1. Navigate
N to
o the Alarm
m Outputs page
p (Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
ystem >
Outputs).
O
2. Select
S the unit w use the nag alarm feature.
u that will
NOTE:
N If the I/O Monittor has the
e latest sofftware insttalled, then
n the first
column to appear
a afte
er the Alarm
m Group co olumn is caalled Buzze er Output. If it

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
294 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

does not ap
ppear, then
n the I/O Mo
onitor unit requires a software upgrade
before
b proc
ceeding to the
t next sttep.

Fig
gure 2.35 – I//O Monitor Outputs Page
e (with latestt software)

3. Id
dentify the
e alarm grou
up(s) in the
e first colum
mn to map
p to the nag
g feature a
and
click the correspondin
ng box(es) under
u the B
Buzzer Outtput colum
mn.
4. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.
5. Click
C on the
e Buzzer Ou
utput colum
mn heading
g to open tthe Outputt Config
window.
w

Figure 2.3
36 – Buzzer Output
O Conffiguration Window

6. Locate the Description field. To its right iss a drop-down list for configuring
th
he behavio
or of the bu
uzzer. Sele
ect Normallly activate ed resettable.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 295

7. For the Nagg timer (minutes) fieldd, enter th

he number o of minutes s that shou
uld
elapse after the buzzeer is silence
ed before iit should ac
ctivate agaain. The
buzzer
b will continue
c activating after
a the el apsed timee for as lon
ng as the alarm
groups
g thatt are mapped to it aree active.
8. Click
C on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right corner to sav
ve changes
s.
The nag
g alarm is now
n set.

Setting Sitte Inforrmatio

on
NOTE: Site
S informa ation can be
b set through the we eb interfac
ce only, nott through tthe
display. However, site inform
mation is re
eadable thrrough the ddisplay at tthe followin
ng
path:
Main
M Menu > Logs/Re
eports > In
nventory R
Report
In the web
w interfac ce, site info
ormation is
s set on thee System IInfo page, where dettails
about thhe site and d the powe er system in
nstallation are entere ed. Entering a field va
alue
is option
nal, but it is
s highly reccommende ed for futurre identific
cation, mainntenance a and
traceabbility.
To set site
s informa
ation throu
ugh the we
eb interface
e:
1. Click
C on the
e System Conf.
C icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on Pow
wer System
m.
3. Click
C on Sys
stem Info.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
296 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.37 – Sy
ystem Inform
mation Page

4. Fill in the fie

elds as des
sired. All fie
elds are opttional.
5. Click
C on the
e save icon (diskette) to save ch
hanges.

The follo
owing field
ds are availlable (referr to preced
ding figure):
• Company
C – Name of the
t compan
ny that ow
wns the pow
wer system
m
• Site
S – Name
e and/or ID
D of the site
e
• Model
M – Pow
wer system
m model (re
efer to doc
cumentatio
on provided
d with the
system)
• Serial
S Numb
ber – Syste
em serial number or o
other identtification nu
umber
• In
nstall Date
e – Installattion date (y
year, montth, day)
• Service
S Datte – Date of latest service (yearr, month, da
ay)
• Responsible
R e – Person or compan
ny that serviced the p
power systtem
• Message
M lin
nes (1 and 2) – Free-fform fields for any me
essages re
elated to
services performed on n the powe er system ((results, un
nresolved is
ssues, etc..)
• Latitude – Latitude
L off the site (d
degrees, ho
ours, minuttes, hemisp
phere [nortth or
south])

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 297

• Longitude – Longitude
e of the sitte (degreess, hours, minutes, dire
ection [eas
st or
west])
w
• Elevation
E – Site elevation (in me
eters)

Setting Ge
enerato
or Actiivation
n
Generattor activatiion is trigge
ered by configuring sseveral parrameters available
through
h the Web Interface.
NOTE: The
T activattion switch h of the gen
nerator mu ust be connnected to o one of the
output relays
r of th
he power system’s
s co
ontroller orr monitors (like an I/O
O Monitor),
which serves to acctivate the
e generatorr when sign naled by th
he controlle er.
NOTE: There
T is no digital inpu
ut required
d from the generator back to th
he power
system. The Eltek k controllerr system determines if the gene
erator has been
success
sfully switcched on by detecting the presence (or lack) of ac inp
put.
To set generator
g activation
a parameter
p s:
1. Navigate
N to
o the Generral Generator Config
guration pa
age.
System
S Conf. > Gene
erator > Ge
eneral > G
Generator c
control

Figure
F 2.38 – Generator Configuratio
C n Settings (E
Example)

2. Locate Generator con

ntrol and ch
heck the Enable box..

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
298 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

3. At
A the bottoom of the page
p are tw
wo Event lines for Geenerator. O
One or both
h can
be
b assigned d to alarm groups
g to the
t right. FFor this exa
ample, only
y one Alarm
m
group
g is ass
signed.
NOTE:
N In th
his example
e, an alarm group callled Gensett has alread
dy been
created on the Outputts page (Alarm Conff. > Outputts). If an alaarm group has
not already been reserved for sw witching on
n the generator, thenn select one
e of
th
he unused alarm grou ups for this
s purpose.
4. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.
5. Navigate
N to
o the alarm Outputs page.
p
Alarm
A Conff. > Output

Figure
e 2.39 – Alarm
m Outputs Pa
age (Examplle)

6. Locate Sele
ect Unit and use the drop-down
d n list to sele
ect the con
ntroller or C
CAN
Node
N with the
t output relay that is connectted to the ggenerator’s activatioon
switch.
7. Id
dentify the
e Alarm Gro
oup that was selected for the G
Generator e
event in sttep
3.
3
NOTE:
N If the
e alarm gro
oup has nott been rena amed, it is recommen nded to entter a
name in the e Alarm Gro
oup field (w
which is a ffree-form ttext field) tthat reflectts its
use for send ding ON/OFFF signals to
t the gen erator. In tthis example, the alarrm
group
g has beb named Genset.
G

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 299

8. Id
dentify the
e output rellay (Alarm output X) to which the generattor is
connected; click the box
b at the intersectio on of this ou
utput relay
y column and
th
he alarm group row for the generator.
9. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.
10. Navigate
N to
o the Generrator alarm
ms page.
Alarm
A Conff. > Genera
ator > Gen
nerator Ala
arm Config
guration

Figure
e 2.40 – Gene
erator Alarm Configuratio
on

11. Click
C the Ed
dit icon nex
xt to the Ge
eneratorFa
ail monitorr.
12. Check
C the Enable
E box for the Ala
arm Monito or line. This enables the monito
or,
which
w reporrts an alarm
m if the gen
nerator acttivation sig
gnal has be
een issued,, but
th
here is no ac
a input.

Figu
ure 2.41 – Generator Fail Edit Window
w

13. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.
14. Return
R to th
he Generattor configuuration pag
ges to set a
activation p
parameters.
(S
System Co onf. > Generator). Thhe generattor can be a
activated b
by battery
current or capacity;
c vo
oltage; and
d time para
ameters (Caapacity, Daily, Monthhly,

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
300 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

and Voltage e Setup). See

S the top
pic “Genera
ator” beginn
ning on pag
ge 93 for
details on each
e parammeter page..
NOTE:
N The Generator
G event is au
utomaticallly triggere
ed if system
m voltage
drops to one volt abov
ve the Batttery Disco nnect Volttage (Batteery Disconn
nect
Voltage
V + 1V). This pa
arameter iss configure
ed at Alarmm Conf. > BBattery >
Battery
B Ala
arm Configguration > LVBD (clicck the Editt icon).

Fig
gure 2.42 – Battery
B Disco
onnect Volta
age (LVBD Ed
dit Window)

15. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er of each c
configuration page to
o
save changes.
Generattor activatiion is now set.

Setting SN
NMP Co
ommun
nicatio
on
NOTE: This
T featuree is only av
vailable thrrough the w
web interfaace, not through the
display. Simple Ne
etwork Man nagement Protocol
P SNMP) setttings through the web
(S b
ce are availlable from software revision
interfac r 2.2
2 and later.. Screenshots in this
section are from the Smartp pack2 contrroller.
NOTE: Configurat
C tion options
s are availa NMP v3, SNMP v1, and
able for SN d SNMP v2c
c.
Configure the appropriate se
ettings for the SNMP version off the netwo
ork.
This secction descrribes the se
etup requirred to esta
ablish the E
Eltek controller as an
object on
o an existing networrk commun nicating viaa SNMP. An ny other de
etails regarding
the netw work, Netw work Managgement Syystem (NMS S), or SNMPP configuraation for th
he
installattion site must be obtained from
m local systtems admin nistration ((IT) and

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 301

associatted docummentation. The

T SNMP version, ne etwork setttings, secu
urity protoc
cols,
commun nity strings
s, etc. shou
uld be prov
vided by the local IT g
group.
NOTE: For
F detailed overview ws of each SNMP pag e in the Weeb Interfac
ce, please rrefer
to the in
nformation
n in the Sys
stem Configguration se
ection (“SN
NMP Settinggs”, beginn
ning
on pagee 144).

SNMP
P Web-B
Based Configu
C uration
To acce
ess the SNM
MP Setting
gs pages:
1. Click
C on the
e System Conf.
C icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m bar, click
c on Dev
vice Settin
ngs to expa
and the me
enu.
3. Under
U Devic
ce Settings
s, click on SNMP
S Setttings. The General SN
NMP
Configurati
C ion page ap
ppears.
System
S Conf. > Devic
ce Setting
gs > SNMP
P settings
By default, the controller is set
s to SNM MP-based c means that an
configuration, which m
SNMP managemen
m nt applicattion will be used to co
onfigure the controlle
er's SNMP
settings
s rather tha
an the controller's we eb interfac
ce.

Figure 2..43 – SNMP-b

based config
guration (deffault)

Where permissible
p e, a Web-ba
ased config
guration opption is ava
ailable to c
configure the
controlller's SNMP settings thhrough the
e web interrface. Whe en the radioo button is
selected d, the follo
owing menuus appear on
o the left menu bar::

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
302 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

• USM
U Users
• Vacm
V Acces
ss
• V1/V2
V Com
mmunity
• Traps
T

Figure 2.44 – Web-based Config

guration Pag
ges

NOTE: For
F detailed overview ws of each SNMP pag e in the We
eb Interfac
ce, please rrefer
to the in
nformation
n in the Sys
stem Configguration se
ection.

SNMP
P Imple
ementattion
To conffigure the controller
c for
f the Netw
work Mana
agement Sy
ystem (NM
MS):
1. Compile
C the
e Eltek MIB files in the
e NMS data
abase.
2. Add
A the Elte
ek controller object to
t the mana
agement m
map.
3. Ping
P the con
ntroller to verify conn
nectivity.
4. Define
D and configure
c trap
t handling and SNM
MP users (especially for SNMP v
v3).
NOTE: The
T Manag gement Infoormation Base
B (MIB) ffiles for Elttek controlllers are
available only from
m Eltek. Ple
ease contact Eltek Teechnical Su upport at 1
1-800-435-
4872 orr [email protected] forr the latestt MIB files.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 303

Table 2.1 – Alarm Traps (Eltek MIB branch 10)

Trap Description

alarmPowerSystemTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the power system.

alarmBatteryTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the Battery subsystem.

alarmLoadGroupTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the Load subsystem.

alarmMainsTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the Mains subsystem.

alarmRectifierTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the Rectifier subsystem.

alarmControlSystemTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the Control-system subsystem.

alarmDcDcTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

theDCDC converter subsystem.

alramInputsTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the Inputs subsystem.

alarmOutputsTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the Outputs subsystem.

alarmGeneratorTrap This trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the Generator subsystem.

alarmSolarChargerTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the SolarCharger subsystem.

alarmWindChargerTrap This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in

the WindCharger subsystem.

infoHeartBeatTrap When enabled, this trap transmits a periodic

“heartbeat” signal to indicate that the system is
connected and operational.

For details on using various SNMP applications with Eltek controllers, please see
document #2155710, How to SNMP with Eltek Controllers.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
304 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Load
d Monittor and
d Flexi Monittor Settup
Eltek Lo
oad Monitor and Flexi Monitor unnits provide
e supplemeentary mon nitoring. A
After
connectting one orr more of th
hese devices to the CCAN bus, ad
dditional se
etup is
required
d in the con
ntroller und
der the Sys
stem Conffiguration aand Alarm Configuration
sectionss.

Load Monito
or
Load Moonitors are used for monitoring
m load shuntts and load
d fuses. Wh
hen conneccted
to the CAN
C bus of an Eltek controller, a page calle
ed Currentt Monitor a
appears under
the System Config guration menu:
m
System
S Conf. > Powe
er System
m > Controll System > Current M
Monitor
In additiion, the ala
arm monito ors for the Load
L Monittor appear under the Alarm
Configuuration sec ction; the precise
p pag
ge dependss on the Mo
onitor Typee selected on
the Current Monittor page.
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > [Load / R
Rectifier / DCDC / So
olar / Wind
d/
Fuel
F Cell]
Table
e 2.2 – Load Monitor
M Type
es and Corre
esponding Ala
arm Heading
gs

Monitor
M Type
e Alarm Confiiguration Pag
ge Section Heading
g

Std
S Loadmon Load Load
dPrimary X

Load CurMon Load Load

d CurMon X

Rect
R CurMon Rectifiers Rect CurMon X

DCDC
D CurMon
n DcDc Conve
erter DcD
Dc CurMon X

Solar
S CurMon Solar Charge
er Sola
ar CurMon X

Wind
W CurMon Wind Charge
er Wind
d CurMon X

FuelC CurMon
n FuelCell Cha
arger FuelC CurMon X

To conffigure the Load

L Monito
or in the Web
W Interfac
ce:
1. Navigate
N to
o the follow
wing page to
t set the M
Monitor Type:
System
S Conf. > Powe
er System
m > Controll System > Current M
Monitor
2. Id
dentify the
e Load Monitor (called
d CurrMonittor X unde
er the first c
column) to
o
configure.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 305

3. Under
U Monitor type, select
s the current
c typ
pe the unit is intended to monitor.
4. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.

Figure 2.45 – Currrent Monitorr Page (for Co

onfiguring Lo
oad Monitors
s)

5. Navigate
N to
o the follow
wing page to
t set the a
alarm monitors:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > [Load / R
Rectifier / DCDC / So
olar / Wind
d/
Fuel
F Cell]
NOTE:
N The alarm pagee where th
he Load Mo
onitor appeears depend ds on the
selection made
m on the
e Current Monitor
M pag
ge. See Taable 2.2 - Load Monitoor
Types
T and Correspond
C ding Alarm Headings for the corrrespondingg page andd
heading nammes. Regardless of the section
n name, thee Load Mon nitor alarm
monitors
m are always the same.
6. Id e alarm section headin
dentify the ng for the LLoad Monittor and clic
ck on it to
expand it.
The follo
owing secttions descrribe how to
o configure
e the Load Monitor’s s
shunt and ffuse
inputs.

Shuntt Configuration
To conffigure a Loa
ad Monitor shunt inpu
ut:
1. Click
C on the ng to expand it.
e Currents sub-headin

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
306 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.46 – Load Monito

or Heading an
nd Sub-head ings (Monito
or Type: Std L
Loadmon)

2. Id
dentify the
e shunt inpu
ut(s) to con
nfigure and
d click on tthe Edit ico
on.
NOTE:
N The first row is
s for LoadC
Current, an n alarm mon
nitor that s
sums all off the
current inpu
uts and gennerates ann alarm if th
he sum excceeds the sspecified
th
hreshold.

Figu
ure 2.47 – Lo
oad Monitor Current
C Alarm
m Monitor (G
General Tab)

3. Click
C the ch
heck box ne
ext to Enab
ble to enab
ble the alarrm monitorr.
4. Set
S the amp
perage thre
eshold (und
der Amp).
5. Assign
A alarm
m groups (iif differentt from the d
default).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 307

6. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.
7. Click
C the Sc
cale tab.

Figure 2.4
48 – Load Mo
onitor Curren
nt Shunt Scalle Tab

8. Check
C that the scale and
a rating are correctt; otherwisse, change them by u
using
th
he drop-do
own lists fo
or Scale/Sh
hunt type a
and Max ra ating.
NOTE:
N The shunt size e and rating
g must be k
known and
d correctly entered on
n
th
his page in order to get
g accuratte readingss.
9. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.
10. Repeat
R for any
a remain
ning shunt inputs thatt need to b
be configurred.
The shu
unt input is now configured.

Fuse Configu
C ration
To conffigure a Loa
ad Monitor fuse (or cirrcuit break
ker) monito
or input:
1. Click
C on the
e Fuses sub
b-heading to
t expand iit.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
308 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.4
49 – Load Monitor Fuses Sub-Heading
S g (Monitor Ty
ype: Std Load
dmon)

2. Id
dentify the
e fuse inputt(s) to conffigure and click on the Edit icon
n.

Figure 2.50 – Load Mon

nitor Fuse Mo
onitor Generral Tab

3. Click
C the ch
heck box ne
ext to Enab
ble to enab
ble the alarrm monitorr.
4. Iff desired, change the Event and
d Alarm Gro
oup assignnments (the
e default
assignmentt is a Majorr Alarm eve
ent assigne Fuse alarm Alarm Group).
ed to the F

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 309

5. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.
6. Click
C the Sc
cale tab.
7. Enter the ra
ating of the
e fuse (or circuit
c breaker).
8. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.

Figure 2.5
51 – Load Mo
onitor Fuse M
Monitor Scale
e Tab

9. Click
C the Co
onfig tab.
10. Select
S the type
t of input that the
e fuse (or c
circuit breaker) provid
des to the L
Load
Monitor
M (No
ormally Ope en, Normallly Closed, o
or Diode Maatrix).
11. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
310 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Figure 2.52 – Load Monitor Fuse Configuration Tab

Flexi Monitor
Flexi Monitors can be employed for the following monitoring purposes: current,
voltage, temperature, relay input, and fan speed. When connected to the CAN bus
of an Eltek controller, a page called Flexi Monitor appears under the System
Configuration menu:
System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Flexi Monitor
In addition, the alarm monitors for the Flexi Monitor appear under the Alarm
Configuration section; the precise page depends on the Monitor Type selected on
the Flexi Monitor page.
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Battery / Load / Rectifier / DCDC / Solar /
Wind / Fuel Cell / Inputs
The following table shows the Alarm Configuration pages and section headings that
correspond to each Monitor Type.

Table 2.3 – Flexi Monitor Types and Corresponding Alarm Headings

Monitor Type Alarm Configuration Page Section Heading

Std Fleximon Inputs Contr FlexMon X

Batt Fleximon Battery Batt FlexMon X

Load Fleximon Load Load FlexMon X

RectifierFleximon Rectifiers Rect FlexMon X

DCDC Fleximon DcDc Converter DcDc FlexMon X

Solar Fleximon Solar Charger Solar FlexMon X

Wind Fleximon Wind Charger Wind FlexMon X

FuelC Fleximon FuelCell Charger FuelC FlexMon X

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 311

To conffigure the Flexi

F Monito
or in the Web Interfac
ce:
1. Navigate
N to
o the follow
wing page to
t set the M
Monitor Type:
System
S Conf. > Powe
er System
m > Controll System > Flexi Mon
nitor
2. Id
dentify the
e Flexi Moniitor (under the first co
olumn) to c
configure.
3. Under
U Monitor type, select
s the current
c typ
pe the unit is intended to monitor.
4. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.

Figure 2.53 – Flexi Monitor

M Conffiguration Pa
age

5. Navigate
N to
o the follow
wing page to
t set the a
alarm monitors:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > [Load / B
Battery / R
Rectifier / DCDC / So
olar
/ Wind / Fu
uel Cell / In
nputs]
NOTE:
N The alarm pagee where thhe Flexi Monitor appea
ars depend ds on the
selection made
m on thee Flexi Mon
nitor page. See Tablee 2.3 - Flexi Monitor
Types
T and Correspond
C ding Alarm Headings for the corrresponding g page andd
heading nammes. Regardless of the Monitorry Type nam me, the Fleexi Monitorr
alarm monittors are alw
ways the same.
6. Id
dentify the
e alarm section headin
ng for the FFlexi Monittor and clic
ck on it to
expand it.
7. Iff the Inputs
s sub-head
ding does not
n expand
d, click on the Inputs s
sub-headin
ng to
expand it.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
312 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.54
2 – Config
guration Secttion and Opttions for Flex
xi Monitor Inp
puts
(A
Alarm Configuration > Inpputs Page)

8. Id
dentify the
e fuse inputt(s) to conffigure and click on the Edit icon
n.
NOTE:
N The first row is
s for Curren
nt X, an ala
arm monito ms all of the
or that sum
current monnitors and generates
g an alarm iff the sum e
exceeds thhe specified
th
hreshold.
NOTE:
N The input typee and Enablle box can be selecte
ed on this p
page, but
th
hese instru
uctions use
e the Edit window
w to d
do so.
9. Click
C the ch
heck box ne
ext to Enab
ble to enab
ble the alarrm monitorr.
10. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 313

Figure 2.55
5 – Flexi Mon
nitor Edit Win
ndow (Generral Tab)

11. Click
C on the
e Config tab.
12. Next
N to Inpu
ut Configu
uration, clic drop-down list and select the ty
ck on the d ype
of input tha
at is connec
cted to thee alarm moonitor channel.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
314 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.56 – Configuration Tab

b for Flexi Mo
onitor Inputss (Edit Windo
ow)

See the
e following table for th
he tabs tha at appear w
with each sselection. Some inpu
ut
types re
equire additional conffiguration.

Table 2.4
2 - Definitio
ons of Inputs
s and Additio
onal Tabs (wh
here applicab
ble)

Inp
put Type De
efinition Additional Tabs
s

No
ormally Open
n No
ormally-open
n relay None

No
ormally Close
ed No
ormally-close
ed relay None

Vo
oltage Vo
oltage input Callibration

Te
emperature Te
emperature input None

Cu
urrent Cu
urrent input Callibration, Sca
ale

Fa
an Speed Fa
an speed (tac
chometer) inp
put Fan
n Config

Fu
use-NO Fu
use input, normally-open Sca
ale

Fu
use-NC Fu
use input, normally-closed
d Sca
ale

Fu
use-DM Fu
use input, dio
ode matrix Sca
ale

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 315

13. Iff applicable

e, click on the
t tab tha
at appears for the inp
put type for further
configuratio on.
CAUTION:
C Calibration
C should only be used when the accuracy o of the inpuut
value is proved to be significantl
s ly off the m
measured vvalue. It sh
hould not b be
used as parrt of an insttallation prrocedure. MManufactu urer valuess and prope er
calibration equipment
e t (e.g., an ac
ccurate mu ultimeter) must be av vailable in
order to calibrate the input value es accurattely. Improper calibraation can
cascade inaaccuracy to o all contro ations and functions that use th
oller calcula he
nput value..
in
14. Return
R to th
he Generall tab.
15. In
n the box between
b Ev
vent and Alarm
A Group
p, set the a
alarm thres
shold.
16. Use
U the dro
op-down list under Event to sele
ect the alarm event ttype.
17. Use
U the dro op-down list under Ala
arm Group to select tthe alarm g
group to
trrigger for alarm
a outpu
ut.
18. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.
19. Repeat
R step
ps 8 to 18 for
f any rem
maining inp
puts to con
nfigure.
The Flex
xi Monitor inputs
i are now config
gured.

Logic
cal Gro
oups (B
Boolea
an Alge
ebra)
Logical groups are
e provided in
i the Outp puts of thee Alarm Connfiguration
n section to
o
supportt Boolean algebra
a ope
erations. In
n short, the
e controller can be co
onfigured tto
trigger an
a Alarm Group
G if two
o other Ala
arm Groupss are in the states spe ecified.
NOTE: The
T Alarm Group assigned to th
he Result G
Group cannot be used
d for any otther
alarm monitor.
m
Currently, the equ
uation functions as fo
ollows:
Alarm
A Group [1] (ON/OFF) + Ala
arm Group [2] (ON/OF
FF) = Result Group (O
ON)
NOTE: TheT alarm group num mbers in the
e equation above are in bracketts becausee
they can be any off the Alarm
m Groups avvailable in the contro
oller. The A
Alarm Group
numberrs in the equation do not
n specifically indica Groups 1 and 2 of the
ate Alarm G e
controlller.
The pag
ge for Logic
cal Group is a tab on the Outpu
uts page off the Alarm
m
Configu
uration sec
ction:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > Outputs > Logical Groups (ta
ab)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
316 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.57 – Logical Gro

oups Tab

To set a Logical Grroup:

1. Determine
D the
t conditions require
ed for two Alarm Groups in orde
er to trigge
er a
unique Alarm
m Group fo
or the Resu
ult Group.
IF
F Alarm Gro
oup [1] is active/inacttive AND A
Alarm Group
p [2] is acttive/inactiv
ve,
THEN
T Resullt Group is activated.
2. Navigate
N to
o the Logica
al Groups tab
t of the Outputs page.
3. Select
S an Alarm Group
p from the drop-down
n list for Alarm Group
p 1.
4. Select
S the state
s (Active or Not Active)
A thaat the first Alarm Group should be
in
n as part off the condition to trig
gger the Re esult Group p using the
e drop-dow
wn
lis
st for Activ
ve/Not Active (to the e right of tthe Alarm G Group 1 coolumn).
5. Select
S an Alarm Group
p from the drop-down
n list for Alarm Group
p 2.
6. Select
S the state
s (Active or Not Active)
A thaat the seco
ond Alarm G Group shou
uld
be
b in as part of the coondition to trigger
t the e Result Grroup using the drop-d
down
lis
st for Activ
ve/Not Active (to thee right of tthe Alarm GGroup 2 coolumn).
7. Select
S the Alarm
A Grou
up to be trig
ggered by the condittions of the
e equation
using the drrop-down list for Resu
ult Group.
NOTE:
N Do not
n assign ana Alarm Group
G to the Result Group if it is
s used for a
any
other alarm
m monitor.
8. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 317

Up to 10
0 Logical Groups
G can be set.
EXAMPL LE: Set up a unique alarm
a for a situation w
where therre is an ac m
mains alarm
m
and a re
ectifier alarrm, providin
ng a prelim
minary indic
cation that the powerr system m may
have to switch to back-up po ower.
1. Go
G to the Outputs pagge (Alarm Conf. > Ou
utputs > O
Outputs ta
ab). Wait fo
or
th
he Alarm Groups
G tablle to populate.
2. Find an unused Alarm Group (Alaarm Group XX). Check k each devvice under
Select
S Unit to make sure the Ala
arm Group selected iss not mappped to any
output channnel. The Alarm
A Groupp selected for the Re
esult Group
p of the Log
gical
Group
G equation must be dedicatted.
3. Rename
R the
e Alarm Gro
oup to som
mething desscriptive, liike “Backup
p Warning””.
4. Select
S an ou
utput channnel for thee Alarm Gro
oup. In a real-world ap
pplication,
select the output
o alarrm relay to which an e
external alarm monitor is
connected.

Figure 2.58 – Alarm

m Group Map
pped (Examp
ple)

5. Click
C on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right corner to sav
ve changes
s.
6. Click
C on the
e Logical Grroups tab (at
( top, nex
xt to the O
Outputs tab
b).
7. In
n the first available
a ro
ow, select Mains
M alar m for Alarm
m Group 1.
8. In
n the Activ
ve/Not Acttive list to the
t right off Alarm Group 1, sele
ect Active..
9. Select
S Recttifier alarm
m for Alarm
m Group 2.
10. In
n the Activ
ve/Not Acttive list to the
t right off Alarm Group 2, sele
ect Active..

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
318 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

11. Set
S Result Group
G to th
he reserved alarm gro
oup (Backu
up Warning
g in this
example).

Figure 2.59 – Log

gic Group Se tup Example
e

12. Click
C on the
e Save buttton in the lo
ower right corner to ssave chang
ges.

Emaiil (SMT
TP) Settup
Eltek co
ontrollers support
s em
mail delivery
y of data and alarm m
messages tto other
addressses on a loc
cal network with an SMTP
S serveer.
The folloowing item
ms are requ
uired in orde
er to setup
p email messsaging fro
om the
controlller:
• An
A SMTP se
erver on the
e local netw
work
• The
T SMTP server’s
s IP address
a
• Iff authentication is req
quired on the SMTP server, then
n the User Name and
d
Password
P are
a needed
NOTE:
N If au
uthenticatio
on is requirred, Alarm messagess from the c
controller
cannot be delivered
d siince they do
d not curr ently use tthe User Name and
Password
P fields.
• Email addre
esses for re
ecipients (u
up to two)
NOTE:
N The controller,, recipients
s, and SMTPP server m
must be on tthe same
domain. Forr example, if the serveer is SMTP .companyddomain.com m, then all
email addre uding the one selecte
esses (inclu controller) must all ha
ed for the c ave
th
he domain @compan nydomain.com.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 319

To set up
u email me
essaging:
1. Navigate
N to
o the eMail page (Sysstem Conf.. > Device Settings > Network
k
Settings
S > eMail). Wa
ait for the Alarm
A Grou
ups table to
o populate.

Figure 2.60
2 – Email (SNMP) Con figuration Pa
age

2. Iff authentication for th

he SMTP se
erver is req
quired, enter the userr name (SM
MTP
User
U Name field) and the
t passwo ord (SMTP Password field).
3. For the SMT
TP Server ip-Address field, ente
er the SMTP
P server’s IIP address..
TIP:
T Ping the network to find thee email serv ver’s IP add
dress. If un
ncertain,
contact the
e local systtems admin
nistrator (IT
T departme ent) for help.
4. For the Sender e-mail Address, enter
e an em
mail addresss for the c
controller. It
can be fictittious. This address will appear a
as the send
der’s addreess. The
controller cannot rece eive email messages.
m
5. Enter email addresses s for up to two
t recipie
ents in the Receiver M
Mail X secttions
(R
Receiver E--mail Addrress X fields).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
320 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 2.61 – Receiver

R Maiil Sections

6. Select
S whic
ch message es these reecipients arre to be se
ent: Alarms
s, interval
messages
m (data logs),, and/or cu
ustom funcction (Receive Funct. 1).
7. Iff configurin
ng alarm messages, find the Ala
arm E-Mail Settings s
section.

Fig
gure 2.62 – Alarm
A Setting
gs Section

8. Enter the su
ubject line for alarm email
e messsages in the Alarm mail Subjectt
fiield.
9. Iff a message should be sent if an
n alarm turrns off, sele
ect the Sen
nd Off Alarrm
box.
b
10. Iff configurin
ng interval data mess
sages, find the Interv
val E-Mail S
Settings
section.

Fig
gure 2.63 – In
nterval Settin
ngs Section

11. Iff configurin

ng interval data mess
sages, find the Interv
val E-Mail S
Settings
section.
12. Enter the su
ubject line for interva
al email me
essages in tthe Interva
al Subject
fiield.
13. Enter the fille name for the data file sent ass an attach
hment in th
he Intervall
Attachmen
A t field.
14. Enter the time betwee
en each intterval in the Interval period (min) field; the
units are miinutes.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Setup 321

15. Enter the time the inte

ervals shou
uld start in
n the Interv
val start time field
(H
HH:MM form mat)
16. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.
Email no
otifications
s using SMT
TP are now
w set.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
322 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

3. Operat
O tion
This sec
ction descrribes commmon operattional proce
edures tha
at can be ac
ccomplishe
ed
throughh the Contrroller Web Interface.

Using
g the Comma
C ands Button
B s
The Commmands se ection prov
vides functtion button
ns to quicklly execute basic testts
and rese
ets. Click on
o the Commmands ico on to navigaate to this page.

NOTE: Admin-leve
A el permissio
ons are req
quired to ex
xecute the
e following commands
s:
• Delete
D Even
nt Log
• Output
O Testts (relays and
a LVD co
ontactors)
NOTE: When
W mmand button is clicked, a warning message appears to confirm
a com
the action. Simplyy click OK to
t execute the comm
mand.

Syste
em
Commands on the e System page are priimarily for silencing a
active alarm
ms, testing
g
alarm in
ndicators, resetting in
nventory, and
a resettin ng defaultss.
For each h command d, click the
e Apply buttton to exe
ecute the a
action. The
e table belo
ow
lists pottential actions and thhe correspo
onding com mmand to eexecute.

Table 3.1 – System Com

mmands

Action Click th
he Apply buttton for…

Silence the alarm bu

uzzer Reset M
Manual Alarm
m(s)/Silence B
Buzzer

Reset an alarm Reset M

Manual Alarm
m(s)/Silence B
Buzzer

Refresh inventory co
ount for conttrollers and/o
or Reset N
Number of Modules
CAN Nodes

Refresh inventory co
ount for rectiifiers or othe
er Reset N
Number of Modules
power modules
m

Test con
ntroller LEDs Contro ller led-test

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 323

Action Click th
he Apply buttton for…

Test rec
ctifier LEDs Rectifie
er led-test

Test the
e alarm buzze
er Buzzer test

NOTE: The
T Delete
e Event Log
g command
d requires admin-leve
el permissions to
execute
e.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t System
m Command
ds page.

Fig
gure 3.1 – Sy
ystem Comm
mands Page

Batte
ery
Commands on thee Battery page
p are for starting a
and stopping battery
y tests and
charging
g modes. For
F each co ommand, click
c the Appply button
n to execute the actiion.
Commands on the e Battery page
p are se
elf-explanatory (eithe
er Start or S
Stop the
action), so please refer to the relevant sections u
under the ““Battery” toopic (Sectio
on 4
- System
m Configuration) for additional
a details
d abo
out Batteryy Test, Batttery Boostt,
and Batttery Equallize.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Battery
y page.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
324 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Fig
gure 3.2 – Ba
attery Comm
mands Page

Output Testt
The Outtput Test page
p providdes a convvenient way
y to test sp
pecific output channeels
of Eltek
k controllers and CAN Nodes. Ou utput chan
nnels includ
de alarm re
elays, LVD
contacttors, buzzeers, and virttual inputs.
NOTE: Admin-leve
A el permissio
ons are req
quired to e xecute outtput tests..
CAUTION:: Testing th
he Load co
ontactor annd Battery y contactorr channels
opens the
e corresponnding LVD contactor!
c If these ch
hannels are
e to be tes
sted,
ensure that
t openin
ng the con
ntactors do
oes not disrrupt system m operatio
on.
CAUTION:: Testing output
o channels gene
erates false alarm conditions fo
or
any monittors connec
cted to tho
ose channe
els.
To test an output channel:
1. Note
N the Ou utput Testt duration time
t at the
e bottom of the page e. This is th
he
le
ength of tim
me (in seco
onds) that the test w
will last. Change if nec
cessary.
2. Select
S the controller
c or
o CAN Nod
de from the
e Output T
Test drop-d
down list.
3. Id
dentify the
e channel to
o test and click the A
Apply butto
on.
4. Confirm
C tha
at the output channel has been activated..
NOTE: Virtual
V Inpu
uts can be tested botth on this ppage and o
on the Virtu ual Inputs
page. Only
O the priimary controller in a power
p systtem has virrtual inputs
s (Smartpaack2
Master, Smartpack S, and Coompack).
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Outputt Test page
e for a Flatpack S sys
stem (which
h
uses thee Smartpacck S contro
oller).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 325

Figure
e 3.3 – Outpu
ut Test Page (Smartpack S)

Virtual Inputs
The Virttual Inputs
s page prov
vides a quic
ck means o of triggerin
ng the Virtu
ual Inputs,
which are used to manually activate
a an
n Alarm Grooup which, in turn, ac
ctivates
whichevver output channel(s)) the alarm
m group is a
assigned to o.
To set up
u a Virtual Input:
1. Go
G to the Virtual Inputt alarm monitor unde r the Alarm
ms Conf. paage:
Alarm
A Conff. > Powerr System > Inputs > [Controlle er] Input C
Configuratiion

Figure 3.4
3 – Virtual Inputs
I (Smarrtpack2 Masster)

2. Click
C on the
e Edit icon (gears)
( nex
xt to the Virtual Inputt to configu
ure.
3. Check
C the Enable
E box to enable the Virtual Input.
4. Assign
A the Virtual
V Inpu
ut to an Ala ed one of the options
arm Group by selecte s in
th
he Alarm Group
G drop-down list.
5. Click
C on the
e Save icon to save ch
hanges. Th
he Virtual Input is now
w enabled and
assigned too an Alarm Group.
G

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
326 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Fig
gure 3.5 – Virrtual Input Ed
dit Window

6. Click
C on the
e Outputs page.
p
7. Locate the Alarm
A Grou
up that the
e Virtual Inp
put is assig
gned to.
NOTE:
N If the power syystem conttains more than one c controller o
or monitor
with
w outputt channels, check eac ch device u using the Select Unit drop-down n list
to
o see if thee Alarm Grooup for the
e Virtual Inp
put is alrea
ady mapped (assigned d) to
another cha annel. Alarrm Groups can be mapped to multiple outp put channeels.
8. Map
M the Alaarm Group to
t an Outp
put Channe
el (for exam
mple, an ala
arm relay o
or a
buzzer).
b

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation 327

Figure 3.6 – Map Alarm Groups to Output Channels

The Virtual Input is now set up.

The following graphic illustrates the assignments and mappings required to set up a
Virtual Input:
Alarm Conf. >
Power System > Alarm Conf. >
Inputs > Power System >
[Controller] Input Virtual Input X Outputs >
Configuration (Edit Window) [Select Unit]

Virtual Input X Assign to... Alarm Group XX Map to... Output Channel

Figure 3.7 – Setup Path for Virtual Inputs

NOTE: Virtual Inputs also appear as output channels on the Outputs page.
Mapping an Alarm Group to a Virtual Input on the Outputs page differs from the
procedure described above in that the Alarm Group triggers the Virtual Input. While
it is possible to create assignment loops (where a Virtual Input triggers an Alarm
Group that is assigned to the same Virtual Input), the signals do not create an
indefinite loop; the signal sent is either ON or OFF and does not change the state of

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
328 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

the Virtual Input iff it is alread

dy in the sttate of the signal (i.e.., a Virtual Input that is
ON disreegards ano other ON signal; and a Virtual Inp put that is OFF disreg gards anothher
OFF sign
nal).

Virrtual Input
Assigned to an Alarm Group
G
on th
he Inputs page
e

Ala
arm Group
Mapped to
o a Virtual Inp
put on
the Outputs
O page e

Figure 3.8 – Virtual Inpu

ut and Alarm Group Assig
gnments

CAUTION:: Triggering a Virtual Input thatt is assigne

ed to an Ala
arm Group can
generate false alarm
m condition
ns for any mmonitors co onnected tto the
assigned output channel(s).
c
To activ
vate a virtu
ual input:
1. Click
C the Ac
ctivate buttton to activate the V
Virtual Inpu
ut. The buttton turns red
and change es to Deacttivate.
2. Confirm
C tha
at the assig
gned outpu
ut channel((s) for the A
Alarm Grou
up is/are
active.
3. Click
C the De
eactivate button
b to deactivate
d the Virtual Input.
NOTE: Unlike
U the Output Te est page, which
w autom matically deactivatess after the
specifie
ed duration elapses, activating
a a Virtual Inp
put on the Virtual Inp
puts page
keeps itt active unttil it is man
nually deac
ctivated.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Virtual Inputs pag
ge.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 329

Figure 3.9 – Virtual Inpu

uts (with an Activated Ch
hannel)

EXAMPL LE: As an example,

e co
onsider how
w a Virtuall Input can be used to
o turn a lam
mp
on or offf:
NOTE: Admin
A perm
missions are required..
1. Id
dentify an available
a output relay
y on one off the powe
er system’s
s controllerrs or
I/
/O Monitorss.

Figure 3.10 – I/O Monito

or Type 2

2. Connect
C a la
amp switch
h to the av
vailable outtput relay.
3. Test
T functio
onality by going
g to th
he Comman nds > Outp put Test p
page; selecct
th
he device from
f the Output Testt drop-dowwn list. Click
k the Applyy button next
to
o an Alarm
m Output linne. The lam
mp activate
es when th he correct rrelay is
activated.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
330 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 3.11 – Output Te

est Page

4. Go
G to the Alarm Conff. > Outputts page and select th he controlle
er or I/O
Monitor
M dev
vice from th
he Select Unit
U drop-d
down list.

Figure 3.1
12 – Alarm Ou
utputs Page for an I/O M onitor

5. Locate the Alarm

A Outpput in the column
c hea
adings and
d click on it (the Alarm
m
output
o headding is a hy
yperlink). The
T Outputt Config window appears.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 331

Fig
gure 3.13 – Ou
utput Config
guration Wind
dow for Alarrm Output 1

6. Change
C the text in the
e Descriptiion field to
o something
g appropria
ate, like
“L
Lamp”.
7. Make
M sure Normally
N deactivated
d d is selecte
ed in the drop-down llist to the rright
of the Desc
cription fielld.
8. Save
S chang
ges by click
king on the Save icon in the lowe
er right corner.
9. Id
dentify an available
a Alarm
A Group
p in the Ala
arm Group column.
10. Change
C the Alarm Gro
oup name to somethin
ng approprriate, like “L
Lamp Switc
ch”.
11. Map
M the Ala arm Group to
t the Alarrm Output by placing a check m
mark in the cell
where
w the Alarm
A Group and Alarm Output iintersect.

Figure 3.14 – Ex
xample of Ma
apping an Ala
arm Group to
o an Output

12. Save
S chang
ges by click
king on the Save icon in the lowe
er right corner.
13. Go
G to the Alarm
A Conff. > Inputs
s page and click on th
he [Controlller] Input
Configurati
C ion heading
g.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
332 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Fig
gure 3.15 – Location
L of Virtual
V Inputss (Smartpack
k2 Master)

14. Id
dentify an available
a Virtual
V Inputt and click on the Ediit icon to o
open the Ed
dit
Window.
W

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 333

Figu
ure 3.16 – Viirtual Input E
Edit Window

15. Check
C the Enable
E box to enable the Virtual Input.
omething appropriate
16. Iff desired, change the Monitor Description field to so e,
like “Lamp On/Off”.
O
17. Select
S Even
nt from the
e Event dro
op-down lisst.
18. Select
S the Alarm
A Grou
up (“Lamp Switch”
S fro m step 10 in this exa
ample) under
th
he Alarm Group
G drop-down list.
19. Save
S chang
ges by click
king on the Save icon in the lowe
er right corner.
20. Test
T functionality on the Commmands > Viirtual Inpu uts page. C
Click the
Activate
A bu
utton next to the Virttual Input sselected.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
334 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figu
ure 3.17 – Virrtual Inputs Command
C Pa
age with Inpu
ut Activated
d

Setup of
o a Virtual Input as a lamp switc
ch is compllete.

Alarm
m Rela
ay Testt
The alarrm relays can
c be testted the web interface
e by going to the Outtput Test p
page.
See the
e section Ouutput Testt.
CAUTION: Testing ala arm relays causes ala arm condittions. Makee sure
monitoringg equipmennt and pers sonnel are aware of ssuch testin
ng and will n
not
be adverseely affecte
ed. It is not recommen nded to tesst alarm re
elays from aan
off-site location!
CAUTION: Some conttroller unitts have relaays for low
w-voltage disconnect
(LVD) conttactors. Activating thhese contac
ctors will o
open them and
disconnect any batte eries or loa
ads connec
cted!

Manu
ual Batttery Discha
D rge Te
est
To manu
ually execu
ute a batte
ery discharge test:
1. Double-chec
D ck Battery Test settings (Systeem Conf. > Battery > Test). Ma ake
sure test paarameters are reasonnable for th
he batterie
es and dete
ermine if th
he
te
est will be Simplified or Normal.
NOTE:
N Undeer Normal Test,
T batte
ery discharg
ge results are evalua
ated only iff the
te
est is stopped by rea
aching End voltage. Reesults are discarded if a test is

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation 335

terminated due to reaching Max duration or any other reasons (such as

manually stopping the test).
2. If any changes are made, make sure to save them by clicking on the Save
icon in the lower right corner.
3. Go to the Commands > Battery page.

Figure 3.18 – Battery Commands Page

4. Locate the Start Battery Test line and click the Apply button to start the
manual battery test.
NOTE: The battery test must run its course to the end in order to save
results. Otherwise, they will be discarded.
NOTE: If a premature abort is required, click the Apply button for Stop Battery
Test.

Downloading Logs
Logs collected by the controller include:
• Event log – Alarm and event history.
• Data log – A log of data values, including battery voltage, battery current,
load current, total rectifier current, mains voltage, power, battery
temperature, and battery remaining capacity. Data is collected at intervals
specified in the Data Log Setup page of the web interface.
System Conf. > Power System > Data Log

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
336 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

• Energy
E log – A log of energy
e use
ed for load,, rectifier, ssolar chargger, genera
ator,
and battery
y: displayedd in watt-ho
ours (totall, hourly, da aily, and we
eekly).
• Generator
G log
l – A log of generattor run time
e and fuel consumption (total,
daily, weeklly, monthly
y).
• Battery
B cyc
cles – The number
n of battery cy
ycles (totall, daily, wee
ekly, montthly).
• Battery
B tes
sts – A list of battery discharge tests.
• Change
C log
g – Parametter change
e log.
• Accounts
A – A list of lo
ogins and lo
ogouts, inc
cluding IP addresses o
of failed log
gins.
Logs can be downloaded through the Web
W Interfa
ace.
NOTICE: Logs are stored in “CSV”
“ files,, which are
e delimited by tabs an
nd semicolo
ons.
To view
w the data properly
p formatted in
n a spreadssheet progrram, files m
must be
importe
ed as delimited files, with
w “tabs” and “semicolons” specified as tthe delimitters.
Prior to creating and downloading logs, you may w want to co
onfigure the
e energy lo
og,
in order to choosee intervals for
f the info
ormation gaathered. O
Or, you may
y want to verify
the setttings that will
w be applied to logss created a
and downlo oaded. To c
configure o
or
verify datalog setttings, see “Data
“ Log” on page 1 37.
After th
he datalog has been configured
c , create an
nd downloa
ad a log.
To creatte a log:
1. In
n the Web Interface, choose
c gs > Save logs to fil e.
Log

Figure 3.19 – Save Logs Page in

n Web Interfa
ace

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 337

2. On
O the Save e logs to file page, ch
heck Selec t/Unselectt all (in the
e upper righ
ht
corner of thhe page). This single action
a addss a check b
beside all the logs on the
le
eft side of the
t page. If you do no ot need all the logs, leave checked only th hose
lo
ogs desiredd; selecting
g fewer loggs will redu ce the processing tim
me described
in
n the next step.
s

Figure 3.20 – Cho

oosing Logs to Download
d

3. After
A selectting all logs
s, click the Generate log(s) buttton near th
he lower le
eft
corner of th
he page.

Fiigure 3.21 – Generate

G Lo
ogs Button

Wait
W for the e process to conclude e; the proce
ess can take several minutes. AAfter
th
he process d, an updatted status message a
s is finished appears, in
ndicating th
hat
th
he log gene
eration is Complete!
C

Figure 3.22 – Sta

atus: Comple
ete! Message
e

At
A this point, the log is
s available for downlo
oad.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
338 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

4. To
T retrieve the log, click the Dow
wnload log
g button in the lower rright corne
er of
th
he page.

Figure 3.23 – Download Lo

og Button

5. When
W prompted to open or save the file, ch
hoose Save
e as.

Figure 3.24
3 – Saving
g Log

6. In
n the next dialog,
d cho
oose the loc d format for the
cation, filename, and
download. From
F the Saave as typpe list, be sure to choo
ose Microssoft Excel
Comma
C Sep
parated Va alues File (**.csv).

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 339

Figure 3.25
5 – Choosing Location, Fillename, and Format

After th
he file has been
b savedd, it can be
e imported into a spre
eadsheet p
program, su
uch
as Micro
osoft Excel, for viewin
ng and ana alysis.

Downloading Sta
atistics
s
NOTE: This
T featurre is curren
ntly availab
ble for Sma
artpack2 co
ontrollers o
only. This
page ma
ay be blockked if the local netwoork does no
ot permit a
access to F
FTP servers s.
The Staatistics sec
ction conta
ains configu
uration file
es, system statistics, and eventt and
data log
gs, which can be downloaded to o a computter. See Se ection 8 - S
Statistics
(under Comprehen
C nsive Overv
view) for de
etailed desscriptions. To downlo oad files fro
om
this sec
ction:
1. Click
C on the
e Statistics
s button in the top me
enu bar to navigate tto the
statistics window.
w
2. The
T defaultt page unde er Statistic
cs is called
d Browse SD Card, wh es
here the file
are currentlly stored. As
A such, th he top leveel may conttain user documentattion
and controller software files (*.s19).
3. To
T download a file, sim
mply right-c
click on the
e hyperlink
k, choose S
Save as… att
th
he prompt,, and navig
gate to the folder on tthe compuuter where the file is tto
be
b stored.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
340 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 3.2
26 – Statistic
cs Window (S
Smartpack2 Only)

Downloading and
d Uploa
ading C
Config
guratio
on Files
s
Configuration files
s—which sttore param meter settin ngs for the
e controllerr(s) and any
y
connectted CAN No odes—can be saved fromf and lo
oaded to each device e. This is
useful when
w custo om configuurations aree to be load ded on sev
veral power systems, or
when a custom co onfiguration
n is either lost
l or corrrupted. Th
hese operattions are
perform
med through the Load d/Save Con nfig page oof the Commands sec ction.
Commands
C s > Comma
ands > Loa
ad/Save Co
onfig
NOTE: Loading
L an
nd saving controller configuratio
on files req
quires admiinistrator
permiss
sions (admiin login).
Configuration files
s are generrated by th
he controlle
er itself, so
o the follow
wing
procedu
ures start with
w downlloading (Sa ave Config)) the configguration filles.

Down
nload Configur
C ration Files
F
To down
nload configuration files:
1. Navigate
N o the Save Config File
to e page:
Commands
C s > Comma
ands > Loa
ad/Save Co
onfig > Sa ve Config
g File
2. The
T page lis sts all conn
nected con ntroller and
d CAN Node e devices. By defaultt, all
check boxes by each device
d is se
elected. SSelect the d
devices fro
om which
configuratio
on files are
e to be saveed.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 341

3. With
W the desired units
s selected, click the N
Next button.

Figure 3.27 – Save Config

g File Page

4. On
O the nextt page, the controller units to be e read fromm are listed
d in the
Reading
R datta from co
ontrol units
s box (left). Click the button Staart reading
g
fiiles to begin downloaading the configuratioon files.
NOTE:
N The Back butto on can be selected
s at any time to the retu urn to the
Save
S Configg File page
e. Howeverr, if the Sta
art reading
g files buttton has beeen
selected, th
he downloaad continue
es uninterrrupted.

Figure
e 3.28 – Read
d Page for Sa
ave Config Fiile

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
342 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

5. A notice app
pears indic
cating that the selectted file willl be read. C
Click OK to
o
continue.

Figure 3.29
9 – Notice Me
essage

6. A progress message appears

a in the
t Processs Status b box on the right, and a
progress
p baar appears at the botttom of thee page (Gennerating file). The Sttart
re
eading file
es changes to Stop reeading filess, which ca
an be clicke
ed to abortt the
process.
p

Figure 3.30
0 – Save in Prrogress

7. When
W the co
onfiguratio
on file for one download, a dialog box
o unit is rready for d
appears ask
king where
e the file shhould be sa
aved. Choo ose a location on the
computer where
w the file
f is to be saved.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 343

Figure 3.31
1 – Save File Prompt

8. Iff multiple files were selected,

s th
he buttonss Read nextt file and C
Cancel app pear.
Click
C the Reead next fille button to
t read the
e configurattion file forr the next
controller device. The e Cancel buutton can b
be clicked tto cancel tthe downlo oad
of the rest ofo the files
s.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
344 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Figure 3.3
32 – File Save
e Completed (first device
e only)

Uploa
ad Conffiguration File
es
NOTE: Configurat
C tion files fo
or the contrrollers and/or CAN Noodes mustt be on the
computter being us sed to acce ess the Weeb Interfac e. Make suure that th
he file name
es
have no ot been alteered, as anny alteratio
on will prev
vent the co
ontroller fro
om recogniizing
the file as valid.
To uploa
ad configuration files
s:
1. Navigate
N to
o the Load Config
C File
e page:
Commands
C s > Comma
ands > Loa
ad/Save Co
onfig > Lo ad Config File
2. The
T page th hat appears lists all controller a nd CAN No
ode devices
s connecte
ed to
th
he power system.
s Click the Broowse… buttton at the top of the page to
lo
ocate the configurati
c on file to lo
oad.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Operation
n 345

Figure 3.33 – Load Config

g File Page

3. After
A selectting the co
onfiguration
n file to upload, the W
Web Interfa
ace determ
mines
which
w devic
ce the conffiguration file
f is for.
Iff the file is correct, th
hen an Uplo
oad Config
g file button appears in the lowe
er
right cornerr.
Iff the file is not correcct, then an error messsage appea
ars below tthe list of
devices. Th he file namee must be corrected in order to
o continue. Please
contact Elte ek for speccifications.
4. Click
C the Up
pload Conffig file buttton to load the file intto the appllicable
device(s). A progress bar then appears
a to the left of the buttonn.
5. Once
O the prrogress barr indicates the upload
d is comple
ete, the pro
ocedure is
fiinished.
Configuration file save
s and lo
oad is complete.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
346 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

4. Administration
This section describes common administrative tasks that can be accomplished
through the Web Interface.

Administering User Accounts

User accounts are administered from the User Accounts page:
System Conf. > Device Settings > User Accounts
NOTE: Admin login is required to make any changes to User Account settings,
except for the current user’s password.
To change or add user accounts, navigate to the User Accounts page and click the
Edit Accounts button.

Figure 4.1 – Edit Accounts Button

On the Edit page are two sections: Global Account Settings and User Account
Administration.
• Global Account Settings – this section is for specifying password
requirements. See User Accounts beginning on page 158 for descriptions of
each setting.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Administrration 347

• User
U Accouunt Adminis stration – this
t section is for cre
eating, editting, and
deleting use
er accountts. See Useer Accountts beginnin ng on page 158 for
descriptions
s of each column.
c
ser account, find the first availa
o To creatte a new us able user ac
ccount row
w
and click
k the Enablle button (at the end of the roww).
o To edit an
a existing user account, simply
y click in th
he field(s) tto be modiffied.
o To delette an existing user account, clic k the Delette button a
at the end of
the row.

Fig
gure 4.2 – Ed
dit User Acco
ounts Page

When finished, clic

ck the Save
e icon in th ght corner tto save changes.
he lower rig

Chan
nge Co
ontrolle
er Nam
me
The nam
me of the controller
c is
s changed under Netw
work Settiings:
System
S Conf. > Devic
ce Setting
gs > Netwo
ork Settin
ngs > TCP//IP
NOTE: Changing
C the
t name ofo the controller on th
his page afffects how it appears
s on
any network it is connected
c to and the
e Eltek Netw
work Utilityy program..

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
348 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

The fieldd to chang

ge the conttroller name
e is called Device Name. To change the
controlller name:
1. Click
C in the Device Name field.
2. Iff undesired
d text existts, delete the
t existing
g text.
3. Type
T in the desired na
ame for the
e controllerr.
4. Click
C the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r corne
er to save c
changes.

Figure 4.3 – Device Nam

me Field

Find and Ch
hange the IP
P Addre
ess
Finding the IP addrress of an Eltek
E contrroller can b
be done in a number oof ways. Iff the
controlller is conne
ected to a computer
c or
o compute er network
k, then simply navigatte
to the TCP/IP
T page
e to see th
he current IP
I address::
System
S Conf. > Devic
ce Setting
gs > Netwo
ork Settin
ngs > TCP//IP
Of cours
se, if a netw
work connection is no
ot establisshed with tthe controller, then th
he
Web Interface is not useful for
f this procedure. Th his section explains h
how the IP
address
s can be found using other
o meth hods.

Find the
t IP Address
A s
By default, all Elte
ek controlle
ers are ship
pped with a static IP a
address off
192.1688.10.20.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Administrration 349

It is com
mmon for thhe IP addre ess to be chhanged aftter the conntroller is c
connected tto a
computter network k. It is either configurred with a new staticc IP address s (manuallyy
reconfiggured) or se
et to DHCP P in order to
o obtain a d
dynamic IPP address ffrom the
network k. If a conn
nection through the WebW Interfa ace has nott been esta ablished, then
there arre two principle ways s that the controller’s
c s IP addresss can be foound:
• Through
T the
e display (iff available;; the Eltek Compack c
controller d
does not have
a display)
• Through
T the
e Eltek Nettwork Utilitty (ENU), w
which must first be ins
stalled on tto a
computer th
hat is conn
nected to the
t controller (either directly or through a
LAN)

Throu
ugh the Display
D
NOTE: Since
S the Compack
C controller does not ha
ave a displa ethod cannot
ay, this me
be used d to find the
e IP addres
ss of a Commpack conttroller. Use
e the Eltek Network
Utility method
m insttead.
To find the
t IP addrress of a Sm
martpack2
2 or Smartp
pack S controller:
1. Unlock
U the screen by pressing th
he UP key, the DOWN
N key, and tthen the
ENTER key.
2. Use
U the key
ys to navigate to the following sscreen:
System
S Config > Pow
wer System
m > Generral System
m Config
3. Use
U the DOW
WN key to find Agentt IP Addresss
NOTE:
N Eachh octet of the
t IPv4 ad ddress is onn a separatte line, so tthe IP addrress
appears as three-digitt groups ov
ver four line
es.
In
n the figure
e below, the IP addres
ss is 172.0
016.062.18
80.

Figurre 4.4 – IPv4 Address on Display (eac

ch octet is on
n its own line
e)

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
350 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Throu
ugh the Eltek
E Ne
etwork Utility
U
NOTE: This
T proced
dure requirres the use
e of a comp
puter with the Eltek N
Network Uttility
(ENU) in
nstalled.
1. Launch the Eltek Netw
work Utility
y (ENU) on tthe compu
uter.

Fig
gure 4.5 - Elte
ek Network Utility Icon

2. After
A the EN
NU program m opens, cllick on the search button (magn nifying glas
ss
ic
con) in the upper left corner to find
f the co
ontroller. W
Wait for the
e window too
populate.
p

Figurre 4.6 – Eltek

k Network Uttility Window
w

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Administrration 351

3. Once
O the co
ontroller ap
ppears, the
e IP Addresss is shown
n under the
e IP Addres
ss
column.

Change the IP Address

The IP address
a of the
t controller can be
e changed tthrough the Web Inte
erface on th
he
TCP/IP page:
p
System
S Conf. > Devic
ce Setting
gs > Netwo
ork Settin
ngs > TCP//IP
By default, Eltek controllers
c are configured with a static IP a
address. T
This can be
e
changedd to either another sttatic addre
ess or to a d
dynamic ad ddress (DH
HCP)
determiined by thee network.
NOTE: IfI the contrroller is to be connected to a co
omputer ne
etwork, req
quirementss for
proper addressing
a g must be provided
p by
y the local systems/n
network addministrato
or(s)
(IT group).

Dynam
mic (DHC
CP)
To enab
ble dynamic c addressin
ng, simply check
c the Enable box ght of DHCP.
x to the rig
The con
ntroller will then obtain its new IP
I address from the n
network.

Figure 4.7 – DCHP Config

guration

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
352 User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface

Static
c (Manua
al)
To enter a static IP
P address:
1. Make
M sure that
t the En
nable box next
n to DHC
CP is not c
checked; ottherwise, the
fiields for th
he Manual settings
s se
ection cann
not be editted.
2. With
W the fields under Manual
M setttings editable, enterr the netwoork setting
gs
fo ent IP Address, Netw
or the conttroller: Age work Subne et Mask, Default
Gateway,
G and DNS Se erver. See Network S Settings beeginning onn page 139 for
definitions of
o these fieelds
NOTE:
N Not all fields are required
d for netwo
ork setup, sso consult with the lo
ocal
systems or network administrattor(s) for th
he required
d informatioon.
3. Once
O all Manual settinngs fields are
a configuured as nee
eded, click the Save icon
in
n the lowerr right corn
ner to save the chang
ges.

Figure 4.8 – Static

S IP Conffiguration

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, Aprril 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Trademark and Copyright Notices
353

Trademark and Copyright Notices

NOTE: This publication is an independent production of Eltek, Inc. and has not been
authorized, sponsored, or approved by the companies and organizations credited in
this section. The third-party (unaffiliated) companies, organizations, and respective
trademarks mentioned in this publication are named only for the purpose of
specifying compatibility and known compatibility issues with their software
applications and/or operating systems and Eltek products; such mentions are not
either an endorsement or a criticism of, sponsorship by, or affiliation with any of the
products or organizations mentioned.
The credit lines that follow are listed in no particular order:
• Microsoft, Windows, and Internet Explorer (IE) are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
• Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
• Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
• Chrome is a registered trademark of Google Inc.
• Mac and Safari are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
• Opera is a trademark of Opera Software ASA.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
354 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Glossary
AC Mains Monitor – Eltek CAN Node designed for monitoring ac input (mains), monitoring ac voltage,
current, and frequency.
Alarm – a software-generated notice from the system controller that an alarm monitor has detected
a measurement or signal that triggered a reportable event.
Alarm Group or Alarm Output Group (AOG) – a software assignment for grouping alarms together
and mapping to alarm output channels of the controller or CAN Nodes. Alarm groups are user-
definable, and mapping them to the controller’s output relays is also customizable. Currently, there
are 24 alarm groups available: 18 for relays, and 6 for low-voltage disconnect (LVD) contactors.
Alarm Monitor – a software module that measures input or output signals or logical states and
compares the measurement with programmed values or limits, raising an alarm if the programmed
threshold is met or exceeded.
Ampacity – the current-carrying capacity or current rating of a power conductor; the term is a
portmanteau of the terms ampere and capacity.
Battery Bank – a set of battery strings connected in parallel, with each string consisting of enough
batteries to support the full voltage of the power system (e.g., 24V or 48V strings). A power system
can be supported by multiple battery banks.
Battery Block – a manufactured battery unit consisting of two or more battery cells and connected
in series with other battery blocks to build a battery string. For example, typical
telecommunications equipment requires either 24V or 48V batteries; in 24V systems, two 12V
blocks are connected to produce the 24V capacity string required; in 48V systems, four 12V blocks
are connected to produce the capacity string required.
Battery Boost (Fast or Quick Charge) – battery boost charging is used to accelerate battery
recharging by elevating charge voltage. In Eltek controllers, this function is very similar to Battery
Equalize charging.
Battery Equalize – battery equalize charging is used to rebalance individual battery cells, since they
tend to become slightly unbalanced over time. Equalize charging applies an elevated charge voltage
for a few hours in an attempt to rebalance the battery cells. This is used mainly for large lead-acid
batteries. In Eltek controllers, this function is very similar to Battery Boost charging.
Battery Monitor – Eltek CAN Node that monitors battery current, temperature, and fuse (or circuit
breaker).
Battery Quality – a value representing the percentage of a battery’s original capacity that remains
for charging.
Battery String – a series of battery blocks that are connected to provide the required dc voltage for
a power system. Two or more battery strings connected in parallel comprise a battery bank.
Battery Symmetry – a category of battery voltage monitoring designed to detect battery cells that
are failing to hold charge. Symmetry monitoring looks for deviations between the voltage
measurements between or within battery strings.
Battery Test – controller mode that records battery performance data during discharge.
CAN Node – an Eltek control unit designed to communicate controller and monitoring information
over a proprietary controller area network (CAN) bus. Eltek CAN Nodes include controllers, but

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Glossary
355
usually refer to the auxiliary monitoring devices (like the Battery Monitor, Load Monitor, and I/O
Monitor Types 1-3) that provide additional monitoring and output signal functionality.
Charger – generic term for a power module or system that charges batteries. As such, the term can
be applied to rectifiers, converters, and even entire power systems. As used by Eltek, the term is
limited to power modules designed for converting energy from solar, wind, or fuel cell sources. See
RECTIFIER and CONVERTER for specific uses of these terms.
Compack – a small form-factor Eltek controller designed for use with the Micropack family of power
modules. Configuration can only be done through a computer interface (e.g., PowerSuite or the Web
Interface). It provides three configurable inputs and three output relays.
Converter – generic term for a power module that converts electric current from one form to
another. Though often applied to ac-to-dc power conversion, this term is specifically applied to dc-
to-dc power modules, which transform dc voltage from one level to another (e.g., 48 Vdc to 24 Vdc).
Critical premises (Contactor operation) – alarm conditions that must be met for the system to
report a critical condition, which indicates that there is low ac current (mains) and/or low battery
current. The choice affects when the low-voltage disconnect (LVD) contactors may be
disconnected; by design, LVDs disconnect in critical condition and reconnect in normal condition.
Current Monitor – one of the nomenclatures give to Eltek Load Monitors. See Load Monitor.
Depth of Discharge (DOD) – the inverse of SOC (State of Charge), depth of discharge determines
how much battery charge has been used during a battery discharge. Eltek controllers report DOD in
amp-hours (Ah).
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) – a network application protocol where devices added
to the network obtain configuration information from the network host. Eltek controllers can have
DHCP enabled in order to be configured by the computer network. By default, Eltek controllers are
pre-configured with a static IP address.
Discontinuance Test – The discontinuance test detects battery string imbalances (caused by such
problems as open circuits and short-circuits) faster than battery symmetry measurements. It
monitors individual battery string currents (which means that each battery string must have its own
shunt) and raises an alarm if any of the currents deviates from the average current for all strings by
more than the percentage specified under the DeltaStringCurr alarm parameter (Alarm Conf. >
Battery > Battery Alarm Configuration).
Earth Fault Detection – The Earth Fault Detection functionality built-in the Smartpack2 Basic
controllers can be used to raise an earth fault alarm, when the impedance ground-to-positive supply
conductor is not the same as the impedance ground-to-negative supply conductor. This situation will
occur when there is current leakage from the supply conductor (from + or – or both) to ground.
ENU (Eltek Network Utility) – Eltek computer application for locating Eltek controllers on a local
network and changing some of their network parameters, upgrading software, and launching the
Web Interface. ENU is designed for the Microsoft Windows environment only.
Event – the internal controller action triggered by an alarm monitor when programmed thresholds
are exceeded by the monitored signal or logical state device. Events are associated with alarms.
Flexi Monitor – Eltek CAN Node designed for a variety of input monitoring; it is very similar in
function to the Load Monitor, but can also be used for monitoring batteries and fans. In addition, its
inputs can monitor both current and fuses (or circuit breakers), and each input can be assigned to a
type that is different from the others.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
356 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Float Voltage – battery charge voltage that compensates for battery self-discharge; this is the
power system voltage under normal conditions. It is also called Reference Voltage in the web
interface, typically in the context of volts per battery cell.
Genset/Gen-set (Generating set) – backup power supply system, which can be activated,
deactivated, and/or monitored by Eltek controllers. Up to two generators and fuel tanks can be
monitored.
Hysteresis – lag or delay. In the Web Interface, Hysteresis is a parameter in alarm monitors for
entering a tolerance value on either side of the alarm threshold values. This tolerance value
prevents rapid ON/OFF switching of the alarm if the measured value is changing rapidly.
I/O Monitor – Eltek CAN Node device that provides auxiliary alarm inputs and output relays. Types 1
and 3 also support inputs and signaling features for outdoor cabinet applications.
I/O Unit – generic term in the Web Interface for Eltek I/O Monitors. See I/O Monitor.
IP Address – Internet Protocol address; the network address of a computer device (such as an Eltek
controller).
LAN (Local Area Network) – computer network within a defined area, such as a building or office.
Eltek controllers are designed for integration with computer networks through built-in Ethernet
ports and TCP/IP parameters.
Load Group – a load group refers to the loads monitored by a single controller unit. All controllers
except for the Smartpack2 Master have a load group.
Load Monitor – an Eltek CAN Node that monitors load current. It can be set to a variety of current
monitor types, including load, dc-to-dc converters, and alternative energy sources.
LVBD (Low-Voltage Battery Disconnect) – contactor that disconnects batteries from the power
system when the specified voltage limit is reached.
LVD (Low-Voltage Disconnect) – contactor that opens and closes a circuit (usually a set of loads or
battery banks) based on voltage parameters.
LVLD (Low-Voltage Load Disconnect) – contactor that disconnects loads from the power system
when the specified voltage limit is reached.
Mains – the ac power supplied by a utility grid. Eltek’s Web Interface uses “mains” because it is a
more common term globally.
Mains Group – a mains group is a set of ac inputs for a rectifier group that is monitored by a
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller; rectifiers must be connected to the Smartpack2 Basic
Industrial controller in order for this group to appear.
Normal Test – The Normal Test relies on the battery table for reference, using the battery
specifications to determine end voltage. The only editable parameter that affects termination of the
test is "Max duration". Under Normal Test, battery discharge results are evaluated only if the test is
stopped by reaching End voltage. Results are discarded if a test is terminated due to reaching Max
duration or any other reasons (such as manually stopping the test).
NTP (Network Time Protocol) – network application protocol for synchronizing computer clocks.
Eltek controllers support reception of current time information from an NTP server under the
Timeserver page (System Conf. > Device Settings > Network Settings > Timeserver).
OVS (Over-Voltage Shutdown) – protection feature that shuts down rectifiers which exceed high
voltage thresholds.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Glossary
357
Power Module – generic term for the power-converting units of power systems, including rectifiers
and converters. Ac-to-dc rectifiers, dc-to-dc-converters, and solar, wind, and fuel cell chargers are
power modules.
PowerSuite – an Eltek software application that provides advanced configuration and monitoring
capabilities for computers connected to Eltek controllers. PowerSuite is designed for the Microsoft
Windows environment only. The Web Interface is being expanded to offer all of the same capabilities
as PowerSuite, since the Web Interface has the distinct advantage of not requiring software
installation on the computer accessing the controller.
Rectifier – a power module that converts ac power to dc power. See Converter for comparison.
Rectifier Group – a rectifier group is a set of rectifiers monitored by a single Smartpack2 Basic
Industrial controller.
Reference Voltage – voltage per battery cell required to compensate for self-discharge. It is also
called Float Voltage.
Simplified Test – The Simplified test does not use the battery table for reference; instead, it relies
on user-entered values to determine whether the batteries are able to discharge for the entire
duration specified (Max duration) or meet the amp-hour value (Max discharge) before falling to the
voltage per cell specified in the "End voltage" field. All three parameters are user-defined, but must
be within the specifications provided by the battery manufacturer. The test stops when any one of
the parameters mentioned above (Max duration, Max discharge, or End voltage) is reached.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) – communication protocol for transmitting email messages
across a network. Eltek controllers support email communication for reporting purposes.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) – protocol for managing devices on a computer
network. The Eltek controller supports integration onto a network managed by SNMP. Eltek
provides MIB (Management Information Base) files for this integration. Currently, Eltek controllers
support SNMP v1, v2c, and v3.
SP2 (Smartpack2) – an Eltek controller family designed for use with the Flatpack2 and Powerpack
power modules. Most configurations consist of a Smartpack2 Master, Smartpack2 Basic (or Basic
Industrial), and I/O Monitor Type 2 unit to comprise the controller system. Additional controllers and
CAN Nodes can be added to increase functionality, especially for large-scale power systems.
SP2 Basic (Smartpack2 Basic) – an Eltek controller unit primarily responsible for monitoring
rectifiers and reporting data to the Smartpack2 Master controller.
SP2 BasicInd (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial) – an Eltek controller unit designed for more extensive
applications than the Smartpack2 Basic unit, including multi-bay power systems, polarity isolation,
and Modem Callback.
SP2 Master (Smartpack2 Master) – the central unit of the Smartpack2 controller system,
containing both an interactive display and Ethernet port for the Web Interface. It features an SD
card that can be used to save and load statistics and software. The Master unit requires other
Smartpack2 units in order to form a complete controller system.
SPS (Smartpack S) – an Eltek controller designed for use with the Flatpack S family of power
modules. It contains both an interactive display and Web Interface. It provides six configurable
inputs and six output relays.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) – a cryptographic communication protocol available as a connection
option for the Eltek Controller Web Interface.
State of Charge (SOC) – the percentage of battery capacity remaining during a battery discharge.
Depth of discharge (DOD) is its inverse.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
358 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

State of Health (SOH) – calculation of a battery’s ability to deliver on its performance ratings based
on its quality (percentage of original capacity that remains for charging) and total maximum
capacity.
Temperature Compensation – controller feature that adjusts battery charging based on thermal
conditions.
Virtual Alarm – a manually-activated toggle for alarm events and alarm groups. A virtual alarm can
be used to manually activate and deactivate output channels, depending on how the assigned alarm
group is mapped. A virtual alarm may also be treated as an output channel, permitting an alarm
group to toggle the virtual alarm.
WAN (Wide Area Network) – a computer network that connects computers across a large area,
usually interconnecting numerous office locations and their local area networks (LANs).
Web Interface – the web browser-based user interface provided with Eltek controllers that
facilitates power system monitoring and configuration through a computer without requiring
installation of Eltek software.

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Index
359

Acronyms
A – ampere (amp)
A/D – analog-to-digital
AC or ac – alternating current
Ah – amp-hour
AOG – Alarm Output Group
DC or dc – direct current
DOD – Depth of Discharge
ENU – Eltek Network Utility
LAN – Local Area Network
mA – milliamp
MIB – Management Information Base
mV – millivolt
NMS – Network Management System
SMTP – Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol
SOC – State of Charge
SOH – State of Health
SP - Smartpack
SP2 – Smartpack2
SPS – Smartpack S
SSL – Secure Sockets Layer
TCP/IP – Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
V – volt
WAN – Wide Area Network

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
360 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Index
Alarm Group Configuration files
description, 166, 167
download from controller, 340
Alarm(s) upload to controller, 344
event. See Event
Control System
group. See Alarm Group
alarm summary window, 71
logical groups. See Logical Groups
monitor types, 162 Controllers
nag (recurring) buzzer, 203, 293 compatible, 11
output channels, 202 documentation, 10
output relay tests, 247, 324, 334
setting, 282 Dc-to-Dc Converter
setup example, 289 status window, 52

Battery ENU (Eltek Network Utility)

alarm summary window, 58 description, 17
bank, configure number of, 108 for IP address, 350
battery table, 109–13 for logging in, 18
boost. See Boost
Equalize charging
command buttons, 323
description, 118
discharge testing. See see Tests (battery)
execute, 246
disconnect voltage (Battery page), 108
disconnect voltage (System Voltages Event
page), 89 description, 165
equalize. See Equalize charging list, 166–67
estimated Ah capacity, 264
reconnect voltage (Battery page), 109 Flexi Monitor
reconnect voltage (System Voltages monitoring types, 216
page), 90 names by monitor type, 230
setting current limit, 267 setup, 310

Boolean Algebra. See Logical Groups Fuel Cell

status window, 50
Boost
execute, 246 Generator
voltage (Boost page), 116 alarm group assignment(s), 94
voltage (System Voltages page), 89 alarm summary window, 38
setting activation parameters, 297
Buzzer
silence, 244 High-voltage shutdown. See Over-
voltage shutdown (OVS)
CAN Nodes
overview, 207 Home Page
overview, 28
Commands
using command buttons, 322 I/O Monitor
inputs and outputs by Type, 221–23
Compack output relays for Types 1 and 3, 224
alarm monitors, 198 Type 3, fan control settings, 129

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Index
361
LED test Rectifier
controller, 245 alarm summary window, 40
rectifier, 245 current limit, 99
over-voltage shutdown (OVS). See Over-
Load voltage shutdown (OVS)
alarm summary window, 56 setting current limit, 262
group description, 106, 187 shuffle (rotation) feature, 101
how to make LVLDs appear, 106 startup delay, 100
Load Monitor suppress rectifier fail alarm, 99
configuration page (Current Monitor), 132 Reference voltage
monitoring types, 212 difference between Cell and Total, 88
names by monitor type, 230 set on System Voltages page, 88
setup, 304 set on TempComp page, 113
Logical Groups setup procedure, 261
description, 204 Reset alarms, 244
setup procedure, 315, 318
Reset modules, 244
Login
procedure, 17 Smartpack S
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), 13 alarm monitors, 196

Logs Smartpack2
download, 335 Basic and Basic Industrial alarm monitors,
195
Low-voltage disconnect (LVD) Master alarm monitors, 195
setup on Battery page (LVBD), 108
setup on LVBD alarm monitor, 172 SMTP
setup on LVLD alarm monitor, 173 configuration, 141

Mains SNMP
alarm summary window, 34 setup, 300

Naming the system Solar

device (Network Settings), 140, 347 status window, 47
site (System Info), 84
Statistics
Networking download, 339
controller IP address, 139, 348
Symbols
Outdoor Inputs alarm icons, 25
alarm summary window, 77 category buttons, 26
system overview buttons, 32
Over-voltage shutdown (OVS)
set on Rectifiers page, 99 System Inputs
set on System Voltages page, 89 alarm summary window, 74
Parameters Temperature Compensation
identical fields (table), 90 setup, 272
temperature probe setup, 276
Passwords. See User Accounts
Test (battery)
PowerSuite test result details, 236
description, 17
unique functions, 81

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
362 User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface

Tests (battery) Virtual inputs

execute, 246, 271, 334 activate/deactivate, 249
setup, 268
Virtual Inputs
Thermal Compensation. See setup example, 329
Temperature Compensation Web Interface
User Accounts features, 12
"Illegal user" explanation, 242 requirements, 15
change current password, 159 supported browsers, 12, 16
defaults, 14 unique functions, 12
permissions, 14
Wind
set inactivity timeout, 161
status window, 48

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr
Index
363

Doc. No. 370035.013 Issue 1, April 2014

[email protected]
www.hypercable.fr

ww
ww.eltek.com
US Office: Internaational:
Eltek, Inc. [email protected] Elltek AS
2925 E Planoo Pkwy, Plano, TX 75074,
7 USA Gråterudv. 8, P
Pb 2340 Strømsø, 3003 Drammen, N Norway
Phone: +1 (469) 330-9100 Fax: +1 (469) 330-910
01 Phone e: +47 32 20 32 00
0 Fax: +47 32 200 32 10

(70-100054) CAB1000 - Engineering Manual Rev051320
No ratings yet
(70-100054) CAB1000 - Engineering Manual Rev051320
66 pages
Telecom Power System Cutover Service Training
No ratings yet
Telecom Power System Cutover Service Training
37 pages
Guide For 150B1 01074848 Parameter Modification Through Maintenance Tool
No ratings yet
Guide For 150B1 01074848 Parameter Modification Through Maintenance Tool
6 pages
ESM-48100C1 V100R022C92 User Manual - Litiobatery
No ratings yet
ESM-48100C1 V100R022C92 User Manual - Litiobatery
73 pages
05 DPC-LFP48150 Datasheet V1.1 200908
No ratings yet
05 DPC-LFP48150 Datasheet V1.1 200908
2 pages
PS48300-1800 Power Supply System User Manual
No ratings yet
PS48300-1800 Power Supply System User Manual
61 pages
ELTEK Rectifier Systems Installation Guidelines
100% (2)
ELTEK Rectifier Systems Installation Guidelines
11 pages
Eltek CTRL Web Interface - Compressed
100% (1)
Eltek CTRL Web Interface - Compressed
364 pages
WebInterface Configuration Manual Basics
No ratings yet
WebInterface Configuration Manual Basics
32 pages
Telecom Energy Brochure - 3T190225-V1 （电子档）
100% (1)
Telecom Energy Brochure - 3T190225-V1 （电子档）
14 pages
SYSTEM TRAINING - ENETEK 24kW OD - V2
No ratings yet
SYSTEM TRAINING - ENETEK 24kW OD - V2
88 pages
Eltek Solar PVC Communication Guide
No ratings yet
Eltek Solar PVC Communication Guide
9 pages
Delta ChargerUser Manual
No ratings yet
Delta ChargerUser Manual
30 pages
Types of Rectifiers and The Most Common Alarms
No ratings yet
Types of Rectifiers and The Most Common Alarms
43 pages
Datasheet - Delta ORION Controller
100% (1)
Datasheet - Delta ORION Controller
2 pages
05.02-04 - Installation Guide For 2-4 Hour Battery Backup System
No ratings yet
05.02-04 - Installation Guide For 2-4 Hour Battery Backup System
35 pages
ZTE HYBRID Installation Guide
100% (2)
ZTE HYBRID Installation Guide
41 pages
SCC800-B2 SmartSite Management System Installation Guide (Simplified Edition)
No ratings yet
SCC800-B2 SmartSite Management System Installation Guide (Simplified Edition)
9 pages
ZXESM R422 (V1.0) Lithium-ion Battery Quick Installation Guide0927
No ratings yet
ZXESM R422 (V1.0) Lithium-ion Battery Quick Installation Guide0927
6 pages
Tp48300b-n16b2 Tp48600b-n16b2 User Manual
No ratings yet
Tp48300b-n16b2 Tp48600b-n16b2 User Manual
53 pages
User Manual Ver1.0 20190505
50% (2)
User Manual Ver1.0 20190505
16 pages
Agission Tp48300 A N07a3 Maintenance Guide v100r00104 2
No ratings yet
Agission Tp48300 A N07a3 Maintenance Guide v100r00104 2
53 pages
Emerson: User'S Manual EN/LZB 135 050/1
100% (2)
Emerson: User'S Manual EN/LZB 135 050/1
176 pages
User's Guide: Smartpack2 Master Controller
100% (1)
User's Guide: Smartpack2 Master Controller
32 pages
Annex 2-HRESYS TL-LFP (B) User Manual - V1.0.1 - 201024
No ratings yet
Annex 2-HRESYS TL-LFP (B) User Manual - V1.0.1 - 201024
27 pages
Maintaining Monitor Software Operation Guide For ESM-4870
No ratings yet
Maintaining Monitor Software Operation Guide For ESM-4870
11 pages
Manual de Instalacion y Monitoreo PDF
No ratings yet
Manual de Instalacion y Monitoreo PDF
118 pages
Datasheet Batería Li Ion NMC 48V250Ah
No ratings yet
Datasheet Batería Li Ion NMC 48V250Ah
2 pages
Zxdu68t451 Manual L Connectthebatterycablesaccordingtotheinstructions
No ratings yet
Zxdu68t451 Manual L Connectthebatterycablesaccordingtotheinstructions
34 pages
EverExceed EV Series Lithium Battery User Manual V3.2 20220723
No ratings yet
EverExceed EV Series Lithium Battery User Manual V3.2 20220723
36 pages
TP48300-A-N07A3 Maintenance Guide (V100R001 - 04)
0% (1)
TP48300-A-N07A3 Maintenance Guide (V100R001 - 04)
53 pages
Brochure Battery Lithium 48NPFC100
No ratings yet
Brochure Battery Lithium 48NPFC100
2 pages
MCS48600 TLUA5 Manual E 070622 PDF
No ratings yet
MCS48600 TLUA5 Manual E 070622 PDF
76 pages
Solar Hybrid User Manual
100% (1)
Solar Hybrid User Manual
62 pages
External Alarm Schematic
No ratings yet
External Alarm Schematic
6 pages
Huawei Rectifier DG Setting
No ratings yet
Huawei Rectifier DG Setting
3 pages
Passive Assets Information Revised Version.V3
No ratings yet
Passive Assets Information Revised Version.V3
54 pages
Fundamentals of Telecom Power Supply - Ems1
50% (2)
Fundamentals of Telecom Power Supply - Ems1
28 pages
Rectificador HW Etp48400-C9a2 v500r001 User Manual 01
No ratings yet
Rectificador HW Etp48400-C9a2 v500r001 User Manual 01
88 pages
User - Manual - ESEA050-HAA01 - en - Rev01 (5017385201)
100% (1)
User - Manual - ESEA050-HAA01 - en - Rev01 (5017385201)
41 pages
Sda10 48200
No ratings yet
Sda10 48200
2 pages
ZTE Power Solution (V2.0)
No ratings yet
ZTE Power Solution (V2.0)
30 pages
ORION Touch Preliminary Information V1.0 Dist
0% (2)
ORION Touch Preliminary Information V1.0 Dist
13 pages
SoC - 1530 Lib 48 100 - Natcom
No ratings yet
SoC - 1530 Lib 48 100 - Natcom
7 pages
Huawei Rectifier Settings
60% (5)
Huawei Rectifier Settings
2 pages
HowTo - Firmware Upgrade Eltek Controllers LAN Devices - Readme
No ratings yet
HowTo - Firmware Upgrade Eltek Controllers LAN Devices - Readme
1 page
Flatpack1500 - MCU User Manual
No ratings yet
Flatpack1500 - MCU User Manual
68 pages
ZXDC48 FB150C1 Lithium-Ion Battery Installation V1.0 - EN
No ratings yet
ZXDC48 FB150C1 Lithium-Ion Battery Installation V1.0 - EN
13 pages
SOP DPC - Download Upload Config System
No ratings yet
SOP DPC - Download Upload Config System
6 pages
HUAWEI SMU02B Monitoring Unit Data Sheet PDF
100% (1)
HUAWEI SMU02B Monitoring Unit Data Sheet PDF
2 pages
Enetek Rectifier
0% (1)
Enetek Rectifier
29 pages
SMU05A V200R002C00 Site Monitoring Unit User Manual PDF
No ratings yet
SMU05A V200R002C00 Site Monitoring Unit User Manual PDF
97 pages
Lithium Battery Storage and Recharge Guide
100% (1)
Lithium Battery Storage and Recharge Guide
48 pages
External Alarm Installation & Smart Pack Configuration Guide Outdoor (V 1.0)
No ratings yet
External Alarm Installation & Smart Pack Configuration Guide Outdoor (V 1.0)
32 pages
DC Power System Sizing Final
No ratings yet
DC Power System Sizing Final
22 pages
User Manual - NetSure 501 A50 and NetSure 701 A51
100% (2)
User Manual - NetSure 501 A50 and NetSure 701 A51
125 pages
Standard Operation Procedure Upload and Upgrade Software Delta System ESOA300-HAF-Series.R01
No ratings yet
Standard Operation Procedure Upload and Upgrade Software Delta System ESOA300-HAF-Series.R01
49 pages
FR-DCMG DC System Monitor: User Manual (V2.0)
No ratings yet
FR-DCMG DC System Monitor: User Manual (V2.0)
39 pages
6.2. F-MPC60B - Manual - English PDF
100% (1)
6.2. F-MPC60B - Manual - English PDF
68 pages
3 Cooper Form6 S280703 10000 PDF
No ratings yet
3 Cooper Form6 S280703 10000 PDF
56 pages
Doaa
No ratings yet
Doaa
1 page
TP48200B-L20A5 & N20A5 & N20A6 & N20B1 Training Slides
No ratings yet
TP48200B-L20A5 & N20A5 & N20A6 & N20B1 Training Slides
82 pages
Nagah
No ratings yet
Nagah
2 pages
XPIC Installation
No ratings yet
XPIC Installation
21 pages
Alcatel-Lucent 9600 Lsy PDF
No ratings yet
Alcatel-Lucent 9600 Lsy PDF
3 pages
Alcatel-Lucent 9600 Lsy PDF
No ratings yet
Alcatel-Lucent 9600 Lsy PDF
3 pages